MY18 C Cab Operators Manual

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Mercedes-Benz C-Cabriolet Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 350 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

C-Class

Cabriolet

Operator's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Your Operator's Manual

Digital form inside the vehicle

Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your

vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").

Booklet inside the vehicle

In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-

media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the Internet

You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

Digital form as an App

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple®App store or Google

Play.

Apple® iOS Android™

Order no. P205 0847 13 Part no. 205 584 31 12 Edition A 2018

É2055843112*ËÍ

2055843112

C-Class Cabriolet Operator's Manual

Publication details

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the

following websites:

http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or

otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-

out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG

Mercedesstrae 137

70327 Stuttgart

Germany

Symbols

Registered trademarks:

RBluetooth®is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth SIG Inc.

RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.

RDolby®and MLP™ are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.

RBabySmart™, ESP®and PRE-SAFE®are reg-

istered trademarks of Daimler AG.

RHomeLink®is a registered trademark of John-

son Controls.

RiPod®and iTunes®are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc.

RBurmester®is a registered trademark of

Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.

RMicrosoft®and Windows media®are regis-

tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

RSIRIUS®is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc.

RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.

RGracenote®is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.

RZAGAT Survey®and related brands are regis-

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-

lowing symbols:

GWARNING

Warning notes make you aware of dangers

which could pose a threat to your health or

life, or to the health and life of others.

HEnvironmental note

Environmental notes provide you with infor-

mation on environmentally aware actions or

disposal.

!Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-

cle.

iPractical tips or further information that

could be helpful to you.

XThis symbol indicates an

instruction that must be fol-

lowed.

XSeveral of these symbols in

succession indicate an

instruction with several

steps.

page)

This symbol tells you where

you can find more informa-

tion about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a

warning or an instruction

that is continued on the next

page.

Dis‐

play

This text indicates a mes-

sage on the multifunction

display/multimedia display.

As at 03.11.2016

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

We urge you to read this Operator's Manual

carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-

cle before driving. For your own safety and a

longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and

warning notices in this Operator's Manual.

Ignoring them could result in damage to the

vehicle or personal injury to you or others.

Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow

instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty.

The equipment or product designation of your

vehicle may vary depending on:

RModel

ROrder

RCountry specification

RAvailability

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to

introduce changes in the following areas:

RDesign

REquipment

RTechnical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore

differ from that shown in the descriptions and

illustrations.

The following are integral components of the

vehicle:

RDigital Operator's Manual

RPrinted Operator's Manual

RMaintenance Booklet

REquipment-dependent supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all

documents on to the new owner.

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides app

may not yet be available in your country.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

A Daimler Company

2055843112 É2055843112*ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 26

Introduction ...........................................26

Operation ............................................... 26

Introduction ......................................... 27

Protecting the environment ...................27

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...............27

Operator's Manual ................................. 28

Service and vehicle operation ................28

Operating safety .................................... 30

QR codes for the rescue card ................32

Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 32

Information on copyright ....................... 34

At a glance ........................................... 35

Cockpit .................................................. 35

Instrument cluster ................................. 36

Multifunction steering wheel ................. 37

Center console ...................................... 38

Overhead control panel .........................41

Door control panel ................................. 42

Safety ................................................... 43

Panic alarm ............................................ 43

Occupant safety .................................... 43

Children in the vehicle ........................... 59

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 64

Driving safety systems ........................... 64

Protection against theft .........................74

Opening and closing ........................... 76

SmartKey ............................................... 76

Doors ..................................................... 81

Trunk ..................................................... 83

Side windows ......................................... 85

Soft top .................................................88

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 94

Correct driver's seat position ................94

Seats ..................................................... 94

Steering wheel ..................................... 100

Mirrors ................................................. 103

Memory function ................................. 105

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107

Exterior lighting ................................... 107

Interior lighting .................................... 110

Replacing bulbs ................................... 111

Windshield wipers ................................ 111

Climate control ................................. 115

Overview of climate control systems ... 115

Operating the climate control sys-

tems .................................................... 116

Air vents .............................................. 120

Driving and parking .......................... 122

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 122

Driving ................................................. 122

DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 130

Automatic transmission ....................... 132

Refueling ............................................. 141

Parking ................................................ 143

Driving tips .......................................... 146

Driving systems ................................... 151

On-board computer and displays .... 192

Important safety notes ........................ 192

Displays and operation ........................ 192

Menus and submenus ......................... 196

Display messages ................................ 211

Warning and indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster ............................... 241

Multimedia system ........................... 253

General notes ...................................... 253

Important safety notes ........................ 253

Function restrictions ............................ 253

Operating system ................................ 254

Stowage and features ...................... 263

Stowage areas ..................................... 263

Features .............................................. 267

Maintenance and care ...................... 281

Engine compartment ........................... 281

2Contents

ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 285

Care ..................................................... 286

Breakdown assistance ..................... 295

Where will I find...? .............................. 295

Flat tire ................................................ 296

Battery (vehicle) .................................. 301

Jump-starting ....................................... 304

Towing and tow-starting ...................... 306

Fuses ................................................... 309

Wheels and tires ............................... 312

Important safety notes ........................ 312

Operation ............................................ 312

Winter operation .................................. 314

Tire pressure ....................................... 315

Loading the vehicle .............................. 322

All about wheels and tires ...................325

Changing a wheel ................................ 331

Wheel/tire combination ......................336

Technical data ................................... 338

Information regarding technical data ... 338

Vehicle electronics .............................. 338

Identification plates .............................339

Service products and filling capaci-

ties ...................................................... 340

Vehicle data ......................................... 345

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...

4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-

tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel

drive) .................................................. 166

12 V socket

see Socket (12 V)

360° camera

Cleaning .........................................292

Display in the multimedia system .. 178

Function/notes .............................176

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 213

Function/notes ................................ 64

Warning lamp ................................. 244

Acceleration

see Kickdown

Accident

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent ................................................. 59

Accident warning

see Driving safety system

Activating media mode

General notes ................................ 261

Activating/deactivating cooling

with air dehumidification ................. 117

Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 205

Display message ............................ 230

Function/notes .............................186

Active Brake Assist

Activating or deactivating .............. 204

Display message ............................ 218

Function/notes ................................ 65

Active Brake Assist with cross-

traffic function

Activating or deactivating .............. 205

Display message ............................ 219

Function/notes ................................ 71

Important safety notes .................... 72

Warning lamp ................................. 250

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 205

Display message ............................ 229

Function/information .................... 189

Active light function

Display message ............................ 224

Active Service System PLUS

see ASSYST PLUS

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 71

Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 67

Adaptive Damping System

Function/notes ............................. 165

Adaptive Damping System with

continuous damping adjustment

(ADS PLUS) ........................................ 164

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 224

Function/notes ............................. 109

Switching on/off ........................... 110

Additional speedometer ................... 207

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 343

Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Adjusting the volume

Multimedia system ........................ 254

After-sales service center

see ASSYST PLUS

Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 56

Display message ............................ 222

Front air bag (driver, front

passenger) ....................................... 50

Head bag ......................................... 51

Important safety notes .................... 49

Introduction ..................................... 48

Knee bag .......................................... 50

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 51

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ............................................... 44

Side impact air bag .......................... 50

Air vents

Important safety notes .................. 120

Rear ............................................... 120

Setting ........................................... 120

4Index

Setting the blower output of the

AIRSCARF vents ............................. 121

Setting the center air vents ........... 120

Setting the side air vents ............... 120

Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100

Air-conditioning system

see Climate control

Airbag

Warning lamp ................................. 247

AIRCAP

Cleaning instructions ..................... 289

Extending/retracting ....................... 91

Important safety notes .................... 91

AIRMATIC

Display message ............................ 228

Function/notes ............................. 163

Setting the normal vehicle level ..... 164

Setting the raised vehicle level ...... 164

AIRSCARF

Switching on/off ........................... 100

AIRSCARF vents

Setting the blower output .............. 121

Alarm

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74

Switching off (ATA) .......................... 74

Switching the function on/off

(ATA) ................................................ 74

Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

All-wheel drive

see 4MATIC (permanent four-

wheel drive)

AMG

Adaptive sport suspension sys-

tem ................................................ 165

Performance Seat ............................ 98

Switchable performance exhaust

system ........................................... 129

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 208

Animals

see Pets in the vehicle

Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chains

see Snow chains

Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AppCode

see QR code

Armrest

Stowage compartment .................. 264

Ashtray ............................................... 269

Assistance display (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 203

Assistance menu (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 204

Assistance system

see Driving systems

ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 285

Driving abroad ............................... 286

Hiding a service message .............. 285

Resetting the service interval dis-

play ................................................ 286

Service message ............................ 285

Special service requirements ......... 286

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 74

Function ........................................... 74

Switching off the alarm .................... 74

ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating ................. 205

Display message ............................ 228

Displaying level .............................. 181

Function/notes ............................. 180

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 224

see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 286

Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) .................................... 128

Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

start/stop function) .......................... 127

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 107

Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 135

Changing gear ............................... 135

DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 133

Display message ............................ 236

Double-clutch function .................. 135

Index 5

Drive program ................................ 136

Drive program display .................... 134

Driving tips .................................... 135

DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 130

Emergency running mode .............. 141

Engaging drive position .................. 134

Engaging neutral ............................ 133

Engaging park position automati-

cally ............................................... 133

Engaging reverse gear ................... 133

Engaging the park position ............ 133

Gearshift recommendation ............ 140

Gliding mode ................................. 136

Kickdown ....................................... 136

Manual shifting .............................. 138

Oil temperature (on-board com-

puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 208

Overview ........................................ 132

Permanent setting ......................... 139

Problem (malfunction) ................... 141

Pulling away ................................... 126

Starting the engine ........................ 125

Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 138

Transmission position display

(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 134

Transmission positions .................. 135

Automatic transmission emer-

gency mode ....................................... 141

Back button ....................................... 254

Backup lamp

Display message ............................ 224

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 65

Basic settings

see Settings

Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 79

Important safety notes .................... 78

Replacing ......................................... 79

Battery (vehicle)

Charging ........................................ 303

Display message ............................ 226

Important safety notes .................. 301

Jump starting ................................. 304

Belt

see Seat belts

Belt warning ......................................... 48

Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 205

Display message ............................ 230

Notes/function .............................. 182

see Active Blind Spot Assist

Blower

see Climate control

Bluetooth®

Connecting a different mobile

phone ............................................ 261

Searching for a mobile phone ........ 260

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Telephony ...................................... 260

Brake

Active Brake Assist with cross-

traffic function ................................. 71

Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake assistance

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 218

Notes ............................................. 343

Brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Brake linings

Display message ............................ 218

Brakes

ABS .................................................. 64

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 67

BAS .................................................. 65

Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 343

Display message ............................ 213

EBD .................................................. 71

High-performance brake system .... 150

Hill start assist ............................... 127

HOLD function ............................... 161

Important safety notes .................. 148

Maintenance .................................. 149

Parking brake ................................ 145

Riding tips ...................................... 148

Warning lamp ................................. 243

Breakdown

Where will I find...? ........................ 295

6Index

see Flat tire

see Towing away

Brightness control (instrument

cluster lighting) ................................... 35

Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 193

California

Important notice for retail cus-

tomers and lessees .......................... 28

Calling up a malfunction

see Display messages

Calling up the climate control bar

Multimedia system ........................ 258

Calling up the climate control

Multimedia system ........................ 258

Camera

see 360° camera

see Rear view camera

Car

see Vehicle

Car wash

see Care

Care

360° camera ................................. 292

AIRCAP .......................................... 289

Car wash ........................................286

Carpets .......................................... 294

Display ...........................................293

Exhaust pipe .................................. 292

Exterior lights ................................ 291

General notes ................................ 286

Interior ...........................................293

Matte finish ................................... 289

Paint .............................................. 288

Plastic trim ....................................293

Power washer ................................ 288

Rear view camera .......................... 292

Roof lining ...................................... 294

Seat belt ........................................ 294

Seat cover ..................................... 294

Selector lever ................................ 293

Sensors ......................................... 292

Soft top .......................................... 289

Steering wheel ............................... 293

Trim pieces .................................... 293

Washing by hand ........................... 287

Wheels ........................................... 291

Wind deflector ............................... 289

Wind screen ................................... 290

Windows ........................................ 291

Wiper blades .................................. 291

Wooden trim .................................. 293

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 266

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 201

Center console

Lower section .................................. 39

Lower section (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles) .......................................... 40

Upper section .................................. 38

Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76

Change of address .............................. 29

Change of ownership .......................... 29

Changing the media source ............. 200

Charge-air pressure (on-board

computer, Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles) .................................................... 208

Child

Restraint system .............................. 60

Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 63

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

anchors ............................................ 61

On the front-passenger seat ............ 63

Rearward-facing restraint system .... 63

Top Tether ....................................... 62

Children

Special seat belt retractor ............... 60

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes .................... 59

Cigarette lighter ................................ 270

Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 292

Climate control

Control panel for dual-zone auto-

matic climate control ..................... 115

Controlling automatically ............... 117

Cooling with air dehumidification .. 117

Index 7

Coolingwith air dehumidification

(multimedia system) ...................... 258

Defrosting the windows .................119

Defrosting the windshield .............. 118

ECO start/stop function ................ 116

General notes ................................ 115

Indicator lamp ................................ 117

Ionization ....................................... 120

Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 258

Notes on using the automatic cli-

mate control .................................. 116

Overview ........................................ 257

Overview of systems ......................115

Problem with the rear window

defroster ........................................ 119

Problems with cooling with air

dehumidification ............................ 117

Refrigerant ..................................... 344

Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 345

Setting the air distribution ............. 118

Setting the air vents ......................120

Setting the airflow ......................... 118

Setting the climate mode (multi-

media system) ............................... 258

Setting the temperature ................ 118

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ............................................ 120

Switching on/off ........................... 116

Switching the rear window

defroster on/off ............................ 119

Switching the synchronization

function on and off ........................ 118

Synchronization function (multi-

media system) ............................... 258

Climate control settings

Multimedia system ........................ 257

Climate control system

Climate control .............................. 116

Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 35

Code for Apps

see QR code

COMAND display

Cleaning ......................................... 293

Combination switch .......................... 108

Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................253

Consumption statistics (on-board

computer) .......................................... 197

Controller ...........................................254

Controlling the speed

see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Convenience opening feature ............ 90

Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 284

Display message ............................ 225

Filling capacity ............................... 344

Important safety notes .................. 343

Temperature display in the instru-

ment cluster .................................. 193

Warning lamp ................................. 248

Cooling

see Climate control

Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 224

Function/notes .............................109

Crosswind Assist ................................. 71

Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 152

Deactivating ................................... 153

Display message ............................ 232

Driving system ............................... 151

Function/notes .............................151

General notes ................................ 151

Important safety notes .................. 151

Setting a speed .............................. 152

Storing and maintaining current

speed ............................................. 152

Storing the current speed or call-

ing up the last stored speed .......... 152

Cup holder

Center console .............................. 268

Important safety notes .................. 267

Rear compartment ......................... 268

Customer Assistance Center

(CAC) ..................................................... 31

Customer Relations Department ....... 31

Dashboard

see Instrument cluster

Dashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lighting

8Index

Data

see Technicaldata

Datacarrier

Selecting ........................................ 201

Daytime runninglampmode

see Daytime running lamps

Daytime runninglamps

Displaymessage ............................ 224

Function/notes .............................107

Switching on/off (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 207

Diagnostics connection ......................31

Digital Operator's Manual

Help .................................................26

Introduction .....................................26

Digital speedometer .........................197

DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 133

Display

see Display messages

see Warning and indicator lamps

Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 285

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 212

Driving systems .............................228

Engine ............................................ 225

General notes ................................ 211

Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 211

Introduction ................................... 211

Lights ............................................. 224

Safety systems .............................. 213

SmartKey ....................................... 240

Tires ............................................... 234

Vehicle ...........................................236

Distance control

see Driving system

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Activating ....................................... 155

Activation conditions ..................... 155

Cruise control lever ....................... 155

Display Message ............................ 231

Displays in the instrument cluster .. 157

Driving tips ....................................159

Driving with Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC ....................................156

Function/notes .............................153

Important safety notes .................. 154

Setting a speed .............................. 157

Setting the specified minimum

distance ......................................... 157

Stopping ........................................ 156

Switching off .................................. 158

with Steering Pilot ......................... 159

Distance recorder .............................196

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 250

Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 66

Distance warning system

see Active Brake Assist

Doors

Automatic locking (switch) ...............82

Central locking/unlocking

(SmartKey) .......................................76

Control panel ...................................42

Display message ............................ 238

Emergency locking ........................... 83

Emergency unlocking ....................... 83

Important safety notes .................... 81

Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 147

Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 136

SETUP (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 209

Drive programs

Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 134

DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 130

Driver's door

see Doors

Driver's seat

see Seat

Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 286

Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 186

Driving on flooded roads .................. 150

Driving safety system

Active Brake Assist .......................... 65

Crosswind Assist ............................. 71

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64

Active Brake Assist with cross-

traffic function ................................. 71

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 71

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 67

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 65

Index 9

Distance warning function ............... 66

EBD (electronic brake force distri-

bution) ............................................. 71

ESP®(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) ............................................... 67

Important safety information ........... 64

Overview .......................................... 64

STEER CONTROL ............................. 74

Driving system

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 153

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with

Steering Pilot ................................. 159

Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 170

Parking Pilot .................................. 166

RACE START (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles) ........................................ 162

Driving systems

360°camera .................................. 176

Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 186

Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 189

AIRMATIC ...................................... 163

AMG adaptive sport suspension

system ........................................... 165

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 180

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 182

Cruise control ................................ 151

Display message ............................ 228

Driving Assistance Plus package ... 186

HOLD function ............................... 161

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 184

Lane Tracking package .................. 182

Rear view camera .......................... 173

Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 182

Driving tips

AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 150

Automatic transmission ................. 135

Brakes ........................................... 148

Break-in period .............................. 122

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 159

Downhill gradient ........................... 148

Drinking and driving ....................... 147

Driving in winter ............................. 151

Driving on flooded roads ................ 150

Driving on wet roads ...................... 150

Exhaust check ............................... 147

Fuel ................................................ 147

General .......................................... 146

Hydroplaning ................................. 150

Icy road surfaces ........................... 151

Important safety notes .................. 122

Limited braking efficiency on sal-

ted roads ....................................... 149

Snow chains .................................. 315

Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 149

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 122

Wet road surface ........................... 149

DVD video

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 201

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Automatic transmission ................. 130

Climate control (dual-zone auto-

matic climate control) .................... 116

EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 101

EASY-ENTRY system ............................ 97

EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ............................. 101

EBD (electronic brake force distri-

bution)

Display message ............................ 215

Function/notes ................................ 71

ECO display

Function/notes ............................. 147

On-board computer ....................... 197

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start .................. 128

Automatic engine switch-off .......... 127

Deactivating/activating ................. 128

General information ....................... 127

Important safety notes .................. 127

Introduction ................................... 127

Electronic brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Electronic Stability Program

see ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent ................................................. 59

Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

10 Index

Emergency release

Driver's door .................................... 83

Trunk ...............................................85

Vehicle .............................................83

Emergency Tensioning Devices

Activation .........................................56

Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 28

Engine

Check Engine warning lamp ...........247

Display message ............................ 225

ECO start/stop function ................ 127

Engine number ............................... 340

Irregular running ............................ 129

Jump-starting ................................. 304

Starting (important safety notes) ... 125

Starting problems .......................... 129

Starting the engine with the

SmartKey ....................................... 125

Starting via smartphone ................ 126

Starting with the Start/Stop but-

ton ................................................. 125

Switching off .................................. 144

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 309

Engine electronics

Problem (malfunction) ................... 129

Engine jump starting

see Jump starting (engine)

Engine oil

Adding ...........................................283

Additives ........................................ 343

Checking the oil level ..................... 282

Checking the oil level using the

dipstick .......................................... 283

Display message ............................ 227

Filling capacity ............................... 343

General notes ................................ 342

Notes about oil grades ................... 342

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 282

Temperature (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............208

Engine oil additives

see Additives (engine oil)

Entering an address

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................253

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

see ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

ESP®(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 209

Characteristics ................................. 68

Crosswind Assist .............................71

Deactivating/activating (button

in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............69

Deactivating/activating (notes,

except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 68

Deactivating/activating (on-

board computer, except

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 204

Display message ............................ 213

Function/notes ................................ 67

General notes .................................. 67

Important safety information ........... 68

Trailer stabilization ........................... 70

Warning lamp ................................. 244

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-

tem) ...................................................... 68

Exhaust

see Exhaust pipe

Exhaust check ................................... 147

Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 292

Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 291

Setting options .............................. 107

see Lights

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting ....................................... 103

Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104

Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104

Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 103

Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104

Setting ........................................... 103

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ............................................... 106

Storing the parking position .......... 104

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 264

Favorites

Overview ........................................ 256

Features ............................................. 267

Filler cap

see Refueling

Index 11

Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting the

spare wheel ...................................331

MOExtended tires .......................... 297

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 296

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 298

Floormats ...........................................280

Folding wind screen

Cleaning ......................................... 290

Installing .......................................... 92

Removing ......................................... 92

Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 338

Two-way radio ................................ 338

Front-passenger seat

see Seat

Fuel

Additives ........................................ 342

Consumption statistics .................. 197

Displaying the current consump-

tion ................................................ 197

Displaying the range ......................197

Driving tips ....................................147

Fuel gauge ....................................... 36

Grade (gasoline) ............................ 341

Important safety notes .................. 341

Problem (malfunction) ................... 143

Refueling ........................................ 141

Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 341

Fuel filler flap

Closing ...........................................143

Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board

computer) ...................................... 197

Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 341

Problem (malfunction) ................... 143

Fuses

Allocation chart .............................311

Before changing .............................309

Dashboard fuse box ....................... 310

Fuse box in the engine compart-

ment .............................................. 310

Fuse box in the front-passenger

footwell .......................................... 310

Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 311

Important safety notes .................. 309

G-Meter (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 208

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 280

General notes ................................ 277

Important safety notes .................. 278

Opening/closing the garage door .. 280

Problems when programming ........279

Programming (button in the rear-

view mirror) ................................... 278

Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 279

Gear indicator (on-board com-

puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 208

Genuine parts ...................................... 27

Glove box ...........................................264

Google™ Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................253

Handbrake

see Parking brake

Handling control system

see ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader function

on/off ............................................ 256

Touchpad ....................................... 255

Hazard warning lamps ......................109

Head bags

Display message ............................ 221

Operation ......................................... 51

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........100

Head restraints

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97

Adjusting the fore-and-aft posi-

tion manually ................................... 96

General notes .................................. 96

Important safety notes .................... 96

Installing/removing (rear) ................ 97

Head-up display

Adjusting the brightness ................ 206

Displays and operating .................. 195

Function/notes .............................195

Important safety notes .................. 195

12 Index

Selecting displays .......................... 206

Setting the position ....................... 206

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ............................................... 106

Switching on or off ......................... 195

Headlamps

Display message ............................ 224

Fogging up ..................................... 110

see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating

see Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 108

High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 109

Display message ............................ 224

Switching on/off ........................... 108

Hill start assist .................................. 127

HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 162

Activation conditions ..................... 161

Deactivating ................................... 162

Display message ............................ 231

Function/notes ............................. 161

General notes ................................ 161

Home address

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Hood

Closing ........................................... 282

Display message ............................ 238

Important safety notes .................. 281

Opening ......................................... 281

Horn ...................................................... 35

HUD

see Head-up display

Hydroplaning ..................................... 150

Ignition key

see SmartKey

Ignition lock

see Key positions

Immobilizer .......................................... 74

Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators

see Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 282

Inspection

see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 36

Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 192

Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 111

Control ........................................... 111

Overview ........................................ 110

Reading lamp ................................. 110

iPod®

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Jack

Using ............................................. 333

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 304

Key positions

SmartKey ....................................... 123

Start/Stop button .......................... 124

KEYLESS-GO

Activating ......................................... 77

Deactivation ..................................... 77

Locking ............................................ 77

Removing the Start/Stop button ... 124

Start function ................................... 77

Unlocking ......................................... 77

Kickdown

Driving tips .................................... 136

Manual gearshifting ....................... 141

Knee bag .............................................. 50

Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane Change Assist

see Active Blind Spot Assist

Lane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 185

Index 13

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 205

Display message ............................ 229

Function/information .................... 184

see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Tracking package ..................... 182

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 210

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

anchors ................................................ 61

License plate lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 224

Light function, active

Display message ............................ 224

Light switch

Operation ....................................... 107

Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 109

Automatic headlamp mode ............ 107

Cornering light function ................. 109

Fogged up headlamps .................... 110

General notes ................................ 107

Hazard warning lamps ...................109

High beam flasher .......................... 108

High-beam headlamps ................... 108

Light switch ................................... 107

Low-beam headlamps .................... 108

Parking lamps ................................ 108

Rear fog lamp ................................ 108

Setting exterior lighting ................. 107

Standing lamps .............................. 108

Switching the daytime running

lamps on/off (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 207

Turn signals ................................... 108

see Interior lighting

see Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 263

Locking

see Central locking

Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 82

Emergency locking ........................... 83

From inside (central locking but-

ton) ..................................................82

Locking centrally

see Central locking

Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 224

Switching on/off ...........................108

Lubricant additives

see Additives (engine oil)

Luggage cover

see Trunk partition

Lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-

port ..................................................98

M+S tires ............................................ 314

Malfunction message

see Display messages

Matte finish (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 289

mbrace

Call priority ....................................274

Display message ............................ 218

Downloading destinations

(COMAND) ..................................... 274

Downloading routes ....................... 277

Emergency call .............................. 272

General notes ................................ 271

Geo fencing ................................... 277

Info call button .............................. 273

Locating a stolen vehicle ...............276

Remote fault diagnosis .................. 276

Remote vehicle locking .................. 275

Roadside assistance button ........... 273

Search & Send ............................... 275

Self-test ......................................... 271

Speed alert .................................... 277

System .......................................... 271

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 277

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 275

Mechanical key

Function/notes ................................ 78

General notes .................................. 78

Inserting .......................................... 78

Locking vehicle ................................ 83

Removing ......................................... 78

Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83

Media Interface

see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 201

14 Index

Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exterior

mirrors ........................................... 105

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

360°camera .................................. 176

Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 186

Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 189

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 180

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 182

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 153

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with

Steering Pilot ................................. 159

General notes ................................ 151

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 184

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .......... 170

Parking Pilot .................................. 166

PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occu-

pant protection) ...............................58

PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory

occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58

Rear view camera .......................... 173

Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 182

Message memory (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 212

Messages

see Display messages

see Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signal

Cleaning ......................................... 292

Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors

see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone

Connecting (Bluetooth®inter-

face) ..............................................260

Connecting another mobile

phone ............................................ 261

Frequencies ................................... 338

Installation ..................................... 338

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 202

Transmission output (maximum) .... 338

Model type

see Vehicle identification plate

Modifying the programming

(SmartKey) ...........................................78

MOExtended tires .............................. 297

Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 336

Mounting a new wheel ................... 335

Preparing the vehicle .....................332

Raising the vehicle ......................... 333

Removing a wheel .......................... 335

Securing the vehicle against roll-

ing away ........................................ 332

MP3

Operation ....................................... 201

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................253

Multifunction display

Function/notes .............................194

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer .. 193

Overview .......................................... 37

Multimedia system

Switching on and off ......................254

Music files

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................253

Navigation

Displaying (on-board computer) ..... 198

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 198

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................253

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-

cle ....................................................... 122

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 51

Faults ............................................... 55

Operation ......................................... 52

System self-test ............................... 54

Occupant safety

Air bags ...........................................48

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent ................................................. 59

Belt warning ..................................... 48

Children in the vehicle ..................... 59

Important safety notes .................... 43

Index 15

Introduction to the restraint sys-

tem .................................................. 43

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 51

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ............................................... 44

Pets in the vehicle ........................... 64

PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occu-

pant protection) ............................... 58

PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory

occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58

Restraint system warning lamp ........ 44

Seat belt .......................................... 44

OCS

Conditions ....................................... 51

Faults ............................................... 55

Operation .........................................52

System self-test ............................... 54

Odometer ........................................... 196

Oil

see Engine oil

On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 208

Assistance graphic menu ............... 203

Assistance menu ........................... 204

Display messages .......................... 211

Displaying a service message ........ 285

Displays and operation .................. 192

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 158

Factory settings ............................. 207

G-Meter ......................................... 208

Head-up display ............................. 195

Important safety notes .................. 192

Instrument cluster menu ............... 207

Lights menu ................................... 207

Media menu ................................... 200

Menu overview .............................. 196

Message memory .......................... 212

Navigation menu ............................ 198

RACETIMER ................................... 210

Radio menu ................................... 200

Service menu ................................. 203

Settings menu ............................... 203

Standard display ............................ 196

Telephone menu ............................ 202

Trip menu ...................................... 196

Video DVD operation ..................... 201

On-board diagnostic interface

see Diagnostics connection

Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 30

Important safety notes .................... 30

Operating system

see On-board computer

Operation

Digital Operator's Manual ................ 26

Operator's Manual

Overview .......................................... 28

Vehicle equipment ........................... 28

Outside temperature display ........... 193

Overhead control panel ...................... 41

Paddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shifters

Paint code number ............................ 339

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 288

Panic alarm .......................................... 43

Parcel net ........................................... 267

Parking

Important safety notes .................. 143

Parking brake ................................ 145

Parking position for the exterior

mirror on the front-passenger

side ................................................ 104

Rear view camera .......................... 173

Switching off the engine ................ 144

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking aid

see 360° camera

see Exterior mirrors

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

see Parking Pilot

see Rear view camera

Parking Assist

Display message ............................ 230

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 172

Driving system ............................... 170

Function/notes ............................. 170

Important safety notes .................. 170

Problems (malfunctions) ................ 172

Sensor range ................................. 170

Warning display ............................. 171

16 Index

Parking assistance

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking brake

Applying automatically ...................145

Applying or releasing manually ...... 145

Display message ............................ 215

Electric parking brake .................... 145

Emergency braking ........................ 146

General notes ................................ 145

Releasing automatically ................. 146

Warning lamp ................................. 247

Parking lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 108

Parking Pilot

Canceling ....................................... 170

Detecting parking spaces .............. 167

Exiting a parking space .................. 169

Function/notes .............................166

Important safety notes .................. 166

Parking .......................................... 168

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Display message ............................ 222

Indicator lamps ................................ 44

Problems (malfunction) .................. 222

Pedestrian protection

see Hood

Permanent all-wheel drive

see 4MATIC (permanent four-

wheel drive)

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 64

Phone book

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................253

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-

tions) ..................................................293

Power washers .................................. 288

Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occupant

protection)

Display message ............................ 219

Operation ......................................... 58

PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory

occupant protection PLUS)

Operation ......................................... 58

Program

see Drive programs

Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74

Immobilizer ...................................... 74

Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 27

Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 126

General notes ................................ 126

Hill start assist ............................... 127

QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1

Rescue card ..................................... 32

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31

Quick access for audio and tele-

phone

Changing the station/music

track .............................................. 256

RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles) .................................................... 162

RACE TIMER (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 210

Radar sensor system

Display message ............................ 220

Radiator cover ................................... 282

Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 200

Radio mode

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Radio-wave reception/transmis-

sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 30

Reading lamp ..................................... 110

Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 120

Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 224

Switching on/off ........................... 108

Rear seat (folding the backrest for-

wards/back) ...................................... 265

Rear view camera

"Reverse parking" function ............ 175

Index 17

Cleaning instructions .....................292

Display in the multimedia system .. 173

General notes ................................ 173

Object detection (function/

notes) ............................................ 176

Switching on/off ........................... 173

Wide-angle function ....................... 176

Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 119

Switching on/off ........................... 119

Rear-view mirror

Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104

Recuperation display ........................ 197

Reflective safety jacket .................... 295

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

tem)

Important safety notes .................. 344

Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 36

Important safety notes .................. 141

Refueling process .......................... 142

see Fuel

Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 277

Programming (garage door

opener) .......................................... 278

Replacing bulbs

General notes ................................ 111

Reporting safety defects .................... 31

Rescue card ......................................... 32

Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 227

Warning lamp ................................. 247

Restraint system

Display message ............................ 220

Introduction ..................................... 43

Warning lamp ................................. 247

Warning lamp (function) ................... 44

Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 85

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29

Roll away protection

see HOLD function

Roll bar

Display message ............................ 221

Operation ......................................... 55

Roof

Overview .......................................... 88

see Soft top

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

guidelines) ......................................... 294

Route guidance

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Route guidance active ...................... 198

Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 59

see Occupant safety

see Operating safety

Safety system

see Driving safety systems

SD card

Inserting/removing ........................ 261

Selecting ........................................ 201

SD memory card

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Search & Send

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Seat

Correct driver's seat position ........... 94

Seat belts

Adjusting the driver's and front-

passenger seat belt ......................... 48

Cleaning ......................................... 294

Correct usage .................................. 46

Fastening ......................................... 47

Important safety guidelines ............. 45

Introduction ..................................... 44

Releasing ......................................... 48

Warning lamp ................................. 241

Warning lamp (function) ................... 48

Seat function

see Seat

Seats

Adjusting (AMG Performance

Seat) ................................................ 98

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 96

18 Index

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-

port .................................................. 98

Adjusting the head restraint ............ 96

Calling up a stored setting (mem-

ory function) .................................. 106

Cleaning the cover ......................... 294

Folding the backrest (rear com-

partment) forwards/back .............. 265

Folding the backrests forward/

back ................................................. 97

Important safety notes .................... 94

Seat backrest display message ..... 238

Seat heating .................................... 99

Seat heating problem .................... 100

Seat ventilation ................................ 99

Seat ventilation problem ................ 100

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ............................................... 106

Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100

Securing a load

see Securing cargo

Securing cargo .................................. 266

Selecting a gear

see Automatic transmission

Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 293

see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 292

Service center

see Qualified specialist workshop

Service Center

see Qualified specialist workshop

Service menu (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 203

Service message

see ASSYST PLUS

Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 343

Coolant (engine) ............................ 343

Engine oil ....................................... 342

Fuel ................................................ 340

Important safety notes .................. 340

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

tem) ............................................... 344

Washer fluid ................................... 344

Setting the date/time format

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Setting the language

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Setting the time

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 207

On-board computer ....................... 203

SETUP (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 209

Side impact air bag ............................. 50

Side marker lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 224

Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 291

Important safety information ........... 85

Opening/closing .............................. 86

Opening/closing (all) ....................... 86

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87

Resetting ......................................... 87

Reversing feature ............................. 85

SIRIUS services

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

SmartKey

Changing the battery ....................... 79

Changing the programming ............. 78

Checking the battery ....................... 79

Display message ............................ 240

Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76

Important safety notes .................... 76

KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 77

Loss ................................................. 80

Mechanical key ................................ 78

Opening/closing soft top ................. 90

Overview .......................................... 76

Positions (ignition lock) ................. 123

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80

Starting the engine ........................ 125

Smartphone

Starting the engine ........................ 126

SMS

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Snow chains ...................................... 315

Socket (12 V)

Center console .............................. 270

Index 19

General notes ................................ 270

Rear compartment .........................270

Soft top

AIRCAP ............................................ 91

Cleaning ......................................... 289

Display message ............................ 239

Important safety notes .................... 88

Opening/closing (SmartKey) ........... 90

Opening/closing (with soft-top

switch) ............................................. 89

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93

Relocking ......................................... 90

wind screen ..................................... 91

Soft-top switch ....................................89

Sound

Switching on/off ........................... 254

Special seat belt retractor .................. 60

Specialist workshop ............................31

Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-

tional speedometer ........................ 207

Digital ............................................ 197

In the Instrument cluster ................. 36

Segments ...................................... 192

Selecting the display unit ............... 207

SPORT handling mode

Deactivating/activating

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................69

Warning lamp ................................. 246

Sports exhaust system

AMG ............................................... 129

Standing lamps

Display message ............................224

Switching on/off ........................... 108

Start button

Display message ............................ 241

Start/Stop button

Key positions ................................. 124

Starting the engine ........................ 125

Start/stop function

see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 125

Starting the engine

see Starting (engine)

STEER CONTROL .................................. 74

Steering

Display message ............................ 238

Warning lamps ............................... 252

Steering assistant STEER CON-

TROL

see STEER CONTROL

Steering Pilot

Display message ............................ 232

with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ...... 159

Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101

Button overview ............................... 37

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 193

Cleaning ......................................... 293

EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 101

Important safety notes .................. 100

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ............................................... 106

Steering wheel heating

Problem (malfunction) ................... 101

Switching on/off ........................... 101

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........138

Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 210

Stowage areas ................................... 263

Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) .............................264

Center console .............................. 264

Cup holders ................................... 267

Door ............................................... 265

Eyeglasses compartment ...............264

Glove box ....................................... 264

Important safety information ......... 263

Map pockets .................................. 265

Stowage net ................................... 265

see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 265

Stowage well beneath the trunk

floor .................................................... 267

Summer opening

see Convenience opening feature

Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 314

Sun visor ............................................ 268

Suspension setting

AIRMATIC ...................................... 164

AMG adaptive sport suspension

system ...........................................165

20 Index

Suspension tuning

SETUP (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 209

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off .................................................120

Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 261

Tachometer ........................................ 193

Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 224

Tank

see Fuel tank

Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 36

Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 340

Information .................................... 338

Vehicle data ................................... 345

Telephone

Accepting a call (multifunction

steering wheel) .............................. 202

Authorizing a mobile phone (con-

necting) ......................................... 260

Connecting a mobile phone (gen-

eral information) ............................ 260

Display message ............................ 239

Introduction ................................... 202

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 202

Number from the phone book ........ 202

Redialing ........................................ 203

Rejecting/ending a call ................. 202

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Switching between mobile

phones ........................................... 261

see Mobile phone

Temperature

Coolant (display in the instrument

cluster) .......................................... 193

Engine oil (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208

Outside temperature ...................... 193

Setting (climate control) ................ 118

Transmission oil (on-board com-

puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 208

Through-loading feature ................... 265

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 210

Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 319

Checking manually ........................ 318

Display message ............................ 234

Maximum ....................................... 318

Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 299

Notes ............................................. 316

Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 300

Recommended ............................... 315

Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 298

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notes ................................ 318

Important safety notes .................. 318

Restarting ...................................... 319

Tire pressure monitor

Checking the tire pressure elec-

tronically ........................................ 321

Function/notes ............................. 319

General notes ................................ 319

Important safety notes .................. 319

Radio type approval for the tire

pressure monitor ........................... 322

Restarting ...................................... 321

Warning lamp ................................. 251

Warning message .......................... 321

Tire pressure sensors

Display message ............................ 235

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 296

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes .................. 298

Storage location ............................ 296

Tire pressure not reached .............. 299

Tire pressure reached .................... 300

Using ............................................. 298

Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 331

Average weight of the vehicle

occupants (definition) .................... 329

Bar (definition) ............................... 329

Changing a wheel .......................... 331

Characteristics .............................. 329

Checking ........................................ 313

Curb weight (definition) ................. 330

Definition of terms ......................... 329

Direction of rotation ...................... 332

Display message ............................ 234

Index 21

Distribution of the vehicle occu-

pants (definition) ............................ 331

DOT (Department of Transporta-

tion) (definition) ............................. 329

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) ............................................... 329

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

(definition) .....................................330

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-

inition) ...........................................330

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) (definition) .............................. 330

Important safety notes .................. 312

Increased vehicle weight due to

optional equipment (definition) ...... 330

Information on driving .................... 312

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 330

Labeling (overview) ........................ 326

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 331

Load index ..................................... 328

Load index (definition) ................... 330

Maximum load on a tire (defini-

tion) ............................................... 330

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(definition) ..................................... 330

Maximum permissible tire pres-

sure (definition) ............................. 330

Maximum tire load ......................... 328

Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 330

MOExtended tires .......................... 314

Optional equipment weight (defi-

nition) ............................................ 331

PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-

inition) ........................................... 331

Replacing ....................................... 331

Service life ..................................... 313

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 331

Snow chains .................................. 315

Speed rating (definition) ................ 330

Storing ........................................... 332

Structure and characteristics

(definition) ..................................... 329

Summer tires in winter .................. 314

Temperature .................................. 326

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

(definition) ..................................... 331

Tire bead (definition) ...................... 331

Tire pressure (definition) ................ 331

Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 330

Tire size (data) ............................... 336

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity, speed rating .................... 326

Tire tread ....................................... 313

Tire tread (definition) ..................... 331

Total load limit (definition) ............. 331

Traction ......................................... 325

Traction (definition) ....................... 331

Tread wear ..................................... 325

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards ...................................... 325

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards (definition) .................... 330

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 331

Wheel and tire combination ........... 336

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 330

see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 62

Touchpad

Changing the station/music

track .............................................. 256

Character suggestions ................... 255

Deleting characters ....................... 255

Entering a space ............................ 255

Entering characters ....................... 255

Gesture control .............................. 255

Handwriting recognition ................ 255

Operating the touchpad ................. 255

Overview ........................................ 255

Quick access for Audio .................. 256

Switching ....................................... 255

Switching input line ....................... 255

Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 309

Important safety notes .................. 306

Towing a trailer

ESP®(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) ............................................... 70

Towing away

Important safety guidelines ........... 306

Installing the towing eye ................ 307

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 309

Removing the towing eye ............... 307

Transporting the vehicle ................ 308

With both axles on the ground ....... 308

With the rear axle raised ................ 307

Towing eye ......................................... 296

22 Index

Traction system

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-

tion System)

Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Traffic Sign Assist

Activating/deactivating the warn-

ing function .................................... 204

Display message ............................ 231

Function/notes ............................. 182

Important safety notes .................. 182

Instrument cluster display ............. 182

Transfer case ..................................... 141

Transmission

Display message ............................ 237

see Automatic transmission

Transmission oil

Temperature (on-board computer,

Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208

Transmission position display ......... 134

Transporting the vehicle .................. 308

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 293

Trip computer (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 197

Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 196

Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 198

Trunk

Important safety notes .................... 83

Locking separately ........................... 84

Opening (automatically from

inside) .............................................. 84

Opening (automatically from out-

side) ................................................. 84

Opening/closing (manually from

outside) ............................................ 83

Trunk lid

Display message ............................ 238

Opening dimensions ...................... 345

Trunk partition

Display message ............................ 239

General notes .................................. 90

Opening/closing .............................. 90

Turn signals

Display message ............................ 224

Switching on/off ........................... 108

Two-way radio

Frequencies ................................... 338

Installation ..................................... 338

Transmission output (maximum) .... 338

Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 83

From inside the vehicle (central

unlocking button) ............................. 82

USB devices

Connecting to the Media Inter-

face ............................................... 262

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 269

Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 31

Data acquisition ............................... 32

Display message ............................ 236

Electronics ..................................... 338

Equipment ....................................... 28

Individual settings .......................... 203

Limited Warranty ............................. 32

Loading .......................................... 322

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76

Lowering ........................................ 336

Maintenance .................................... 29

Operating safety .............................. 30

Operation outside the USA/

Canada ............................................ 29

Parking .......................................... 143

Parking for a long period ................ 146

Pulling away ................................... 126

Raising ........................................... 333

Reporting problems ......................... 31

Securing from rolling away ............ 332

Technical data ............................... 338

Towing away .................................. 306

Transporting .................................. 308

Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76

Vehicle data ................................... 345

Index 23

Vehicle battery

see Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 345

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83

Vehicle identification number

see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 339

Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 164

Display message ............................ 228

Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 201

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

VIN

Seat ............................................... 340

Type plate ...................................... 339

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 244

Active Brake Assist ........................ 250

Airbag ............................................ 247

Brakes ........................................... 243

Coolant .......................................... 248

Distance warning ........................... 250

Engine diagnostics ......................... 247

ESP®.............................................. 244

ESP®OFF ....................................... 246

Fuel tank ........................................ 247

General notes ................................ 241

Overview .......................................... 36

Parking brake ................................ 247

PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 44

Reserve fuel ................................... 247

Restraint system ............................ 247

Seat belt ........................................ 241

SPORT handling mode ................... 246

Steering ......................................... 252

Tire pressure monitor .................... 251

Warranty .............................................. 28

Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 239

Weather display (COMAND)

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 253

Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 336

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 336

Wheel chock ...................................... 332

Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 331

Checking ........................................ 313

Cleaning ......................................... 291

Important safety notes .................. 312

Information on driving .................... 312

Interchanging/changing ................ 331

Mounting a new wheel ................... 335

Mounting a wheel .......................... 332

Removing a wheel .......................... 335

Snow chains .................................. 315

Storing ........................................... 332

Tightening torque ........................... 336

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 336

Wind deflector (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 289

Wind screen ......................................... 91

Wind screen (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 290

Windows

see Side windows

Windshield

Defrosting ...................................... 118

Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 285

Important safety notes .................. 344

Windshield wipers

Problem (malfunction) ................... 114

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 112

Switching on/off ........................... 111

Winter driving

Important safety notes .................. 314

Slippery road surfaces ................... 151

Snow chains .................................. 315

Winter operation

Radiator cover ............................... 282

Summer tires ................................. 314

Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 314

Wiper arm

Moving to a vertical position .......... 112

24 Index

Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 291

Important safety notes .................. 112

Replacing ....................................... 112

Without changing gears

Display message ............................ 237

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 293

Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 25

Introduction

The printedOperator's Manual providesinfor-

mation about thesafeoperation of your vehicle.

The Digital Operator's Manual providescompre-

hensiveand specifically adapted information on

your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia sys-

tem. You can call up theDigital Operator's Man-

ual via themultimedia system.

iYou will notincur any costswhen calling up

theDigital Operator's Manual. The Digital

Operator's Manual works without connecting

to theInternet.

Thereare three ways to access thetopicsof the

Digital Operator's Manual:

RVisualsearch

The visual search allows you to exploreyour

vehicle"virtually". Starting from either the

vehicleexteriorviewor interiorview, you can

access manyof thedifferenttopicscovered

by theDigital Operator's Manual. To access

thevehicleinteriorsection,select the"Vehi-

cle interior" view.

RKeywordsearch

The keyword search allows you to search for a

keyword by enteringcharacters.

RContents

You can select individual sectionsin thecon-

tents.

iThe Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-

tedfor safetyreasonswhile driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-

ual

XPress theØbuttonon thecenter console.

The overview relating to thevehicleappears.

XSelectthe"Operator's Manual" menuitem by

turning3or pressing7thecontroller.

XConfirm7themessage about thewarning

and safetynotes.

The menufor theDigital Operator's Manual

appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual

General notes

Pleaseobservetheinformation about theoper-

ation of thecontroller (Ypage 254).

Content pages

The contentpages can be accessed by meansof

avisual search, a keyword search or usingthe

contents.

XTo scroll forward/back:turn3thecon-

troller.

XTo displayin full-screen or animation: slide

8thecontroller to theleft:.

XTo select information textor savebook-

marks: slide 9thecontroller to the

right ;.

XTo select alink:slide 6thecontroller

down =.

XTo exit acontent page: select the%

symbol ?.

XTo call up themenuof theDigital Opera-

tor's Manual: select Þsymbol A.

XTo switch functions to themultimedia

system using thebuttonson thecenter

console: press the$,%,Õor Ø

button.

The selected menuappears. The Digital Oper-

ator's Manual remainsopen in theback-

ground.

26 Digital Operator's Manual

Protecting the environment

General notes

HEnvironmental note

Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-

hensive environmental protection.

The objectives are for the natural resources

that form the basis of our existence on this

planet to be used sparingly and in a manner

that takes the requirements of both nature

and humanity into account.

You too can help to protect the environment

by operating your vehicle in an environmen-

tally responsible manner.

Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,

transmission, brake and tire wear are affected

by these factors:

Roperating conditions of your vehicle

Ryour personal driving style

You can influence both factors. You should

bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:

Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-

sumption.

Ralways make sure that the tire pressures

are correct.

Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.

Rremove roof racks once you no longer need

them.

Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You should

therefore adhere to the service intervals.

Ralways have service work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.

Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.

Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear

only up to Ôof its maximum engine speed.

Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-

tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-

mendations

Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to

dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-

use them. Observe the relevant environmental

rules and regulations when disposing of materi-

als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-

ronment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

HEnvironmental note

Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major

assemblies and parts which are of the same

quality as new parts. They are covered by the

same Limited Warranty entitlements as new

parts.

!Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-

ces, as well as control units and sensors for

these restraint systems, may be installed in

the following areas of your vehicle:

Rdoors

Rdoor pillars

Rdoor sills

Rseats

Rcockpit

Rinstrument cluster

Rcenter console

Do not install accessories such as audio sys-

tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs

or welding. You could impair the operating

efficiency of the restraint systems.

Have aftermarket accessories installed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of

your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as

well as accessories relevant to safety which

have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This

could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 27

Introduction

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-

ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-

ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that

have been specifically approved for your vehi-

cle.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to

strict quality control. Every part has been spe-

cifically developed, manufactured or selected

for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

should be used.

More than 300,000 different genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts are available for

Mercedes-Benz models.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain

a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for

necessary service and repair work. In addition,

strategically located parts delivery centers pro-

vide quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number

(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz

parts (Ypage 339).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment

iThis Operator's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment of

your vehicle available at the time of publica-

tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-

cific differences are possible. Bear in mind

that your vehicle may not feature all functions

described here. This also applies to safety-

relevant systems and functions. The equip-

ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from

that shown in the descriptions and illustra-

tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-

tems installed in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerning

equipment and operation, please consult an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-

let are important documents and should be kept

in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty

The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

accordance with the warranty terms and condi-

tions in the Service and Warranty Information

booklet.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will

replace and repair all factory-installed parts in

accordance with the following warranty terms

and conditions:

RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty

REmission Performance Warranty

RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-

setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island

and Vermont Emission Control System War-

ranty

RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered

by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories

warranties. These are available at any author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

iShould you lose your Service and Warranty

Information booklet, have an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-

ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-

mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-

nia

Under California law you may be entitled to a

replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the

purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-

able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service

facilities fail to fix one or more substantial

defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are

covered by its express warranty.

During the period of 18 months from original

delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of

18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the

odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,

a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-

sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more

of the following occurs:

(1) the substantial defect or malfunction can

result in death or serious injuries for the

28 Service and vehicle operation

Introduction

vehicle occupants while driving and this

defect has already been repaired at least

twice and Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been

informed in writing of the necessity of a

repair.

(2) the defect or malfunction, though less seri-

ous than (1) above, has already been

repaired at least four times and Mercedes-

Benz has been informed in writing of the

necessity of a repair.

(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than

30 calendar days because of repair work

resulting from this or other substantial

defects or malfunctions.

Please send your written notice to:

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Customer Assistance Center

3 Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance

Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you

when taking the vehicle to an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service

advisor will enter every service into your Main-

tenance Booklet on your behalf.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-

gram offers technical help in the event of a

breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-

tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24

hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

(USA)

1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

For additional information, refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program

brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"

section in the Service and Warranty Booklet

(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-

ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own-

ership

In the event of a change of address, please send

us the "Notification of Address Change" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service Center (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-

ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-

ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the

next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please send us

the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA

and Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe

the following points:

RService facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.

RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuel

can cause damage to the catalytic converter.

RThe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause

engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for

delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-

ery Program. For details, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the

following addresses.

In the USA

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

European Delivery Department

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Service and vehicle operation 29

Introduction

Operating safety

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you do not have the prescribed service/

maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions or

system failures. There is a risk of an accident.

Always have the prescribed service/mainte-

nance work as well as any required repairs

carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

GWARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk

of fire.

When driving off road or on unpaved roads,

check the vehicle's underside regularly. In

particular, remove parts of plants or other

flammable materials which have become

trapped. In the case of damage, contact a

qualified specialist workshop.

GWARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their

software as well as wiring can impair their

function and/or the function of other net-

worked components. In particular, systems

relevant to safety could also be affected. As a

result, these may no longer function as inten-

ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of

the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an

accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-

tronic components or their software. You

should have all work to electrical and elec-

tronic equipment carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

!There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high

curb or an unpaved road

Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road

Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or

parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-

body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be

damaged without the damage being visible.

Components damaged in this way can unex-

pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no

longer withstand the loads they are designed

to.

If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-

bustible materials such as leaves, grass or

twigs can gather between the underbody and

the underbody paneling. If these materials

come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust

system, they can catch fire.

In such situations, have the vehicle checked

and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-

ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,

pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,

paying attention to road and traffic condi-

tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity for wireless

vehicle components

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-

ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the two following two conditions: 1)

These devices may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and 2) These devices must accept any

interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation. Changes

or modifications not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle

comply with Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may

not cause interference, and (2) These devices

must accept any interference, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation of

the device."

30 Operating safety

Introduction

Diagnostics connection

The diagnosticsconnection is only intended for

theconnection of diagnostic equipmentat a

qualified specialistworkshop.

GWARNING

If you connectequipmentto adiagnostics

connection in thevehicle, it may affectthe

operation of vehicle systems.As aresult,the

operatingsafetyof thevehicle could be affec-

ted. There is ariskof an accident.

Only connectequipmentto adiagnosticscon-

nection in thevehicle, whichis approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

GWARNING

Objects in thedriver's footwell can restrictthe

pedaltravelor obstruct adepressed pedal.

The operatingand road safetyof thevehicle is

jeopardized. There is ariskof an accident.

Makesurethat all objects in thevehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannotenter

thedriver's footwell. Install thefloormats

securely and as specifiedin order to ensure

sufficientclearanceforthepedals. Do notuse

loose floormatsand do notplacefloormatson

topof oneanother.

!If theengineis switched offand equipment

on thediagnosticsconnection is used,the

starter battery may discharge.

Connectingequipmentto thediagnosticscon-

nection can lead to emissionsmonitoringinfor-

mation beingreset,forexample. Thismay lead

to thevehicle failingto meettherequirements of

thenext emissionstest duringthemain inspec-

tion.

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-BenzCenteris aquali-

fiedspecialistworkshop.It has thenecessary

specialistknowledge,tools and qualificationsto

correctlycarry out theworkrequiredon your

vehicle. Thisis especially thecaseforworkrel-

evant to safety.

Observethenotesin theMaintenance Booklet.

Always havethefollowingworkcarriedout at an

authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter:

Rworkrelevant to safety

Rserviceand maintenance work

Rrepair work

Ralterations, installation workand modifica-

tions

Rworkon electronic components

Correct use

If you removeany warningstickers,you or oth-

ers could fail to recognizecertain dangers.

Leave warningstickers in position.

Observethefollowinginformation when driving

your vehicle:

Rthesafetynotesin this manual

Rtechnical dataforthevehicle

Rtraffic rulesand regulations

Rlaws and safetystandardspertainingto motor

vehicles

Problemswithyourvehicle

If you should experience aproblem withyour

vehicle, particularly onethat you believe may

affectitssafeoperation,we urgeyou to contact

an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenterimmedi-

ately to havetheproblem diagnosed and recti-

fied. If theproblem is notresolved to your sat-

isfaction,please discusstheproblem again with

an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenteror,if nec-

essary, contact us at oneof thefollowing

addresses.

In theUSA

Customer AssistanceCenter

Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC

3Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Customer RelationsDepartment

Mercedes-BenzCanada, Inc.

98 VanderhoofAvenue

Toronto,Ontario M4G4C9

Reporting safetydefects

USAonly:

Operating safety 31

Introduction

The following text is reproduced as required of

all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.

Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the

National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of

1966.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause injury

or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order

a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://

www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty

!Follow the instructions in this manual about

the proper operation of your vehicle as well as

about possible vehicle damage. Damage to

your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-

ventions against these instructions is not cov-

ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-

ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap

and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the

event of an accident, rescue services can use

the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-

cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue

card contains the most important information

about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the

routing of the electric cables.

You can find more information under

www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storage

A wide range of electronic components in your

vehicle contain data memories.

These data memories temporarily or perma-

nently store technical information about:

Rthe vehicle's operating state

Rincidents

Rmalfunctions

In general, this technical information docu-

ments the state of a component, a module, a

system or the surroundings.

These include, for example:

Roperating conditions of system components,

e.g. fluid levels

Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its

individual components, e.g. number of wheel

revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-

ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal

position

Rmalfunctions and defects in important system

components, e.g. lights, brakes

Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in

special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-

ment, intervention of stability control sys-

tems

Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature

This data is of an exclusively technical nature

and can be used to:

Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-

tions and defects

Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-

dent

Roptimize vehicle functions

The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's

movements.

When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-

mation can be read from the event data memory

and malfunction data memory.

Services include, for example:

Rrepair services

Rservice processes

Rwarranties

Rquality assurance

The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-

vice network (including the manufacturer) using

special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-

mation is obtained from it, if required.

32 Data stored in the vehicle

Introduction

After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-

mation is deleted from the malfunction memory

or is continually overwritten.

When operating the vehicle, situations are con-

ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-

tion with other information (if necessary, under

consultation with an authorized expert), could

be traced to a person.

Examples include:

Raccident reports

Rdamage to the vehicle

Rwitness statements

Further additional functions that have been con-

tractually agreed upon with the customer allow

certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-

cle as well. The additional functions include, for

example, vehicle location in case of an emer-

gency.

COMAND/mbrace

If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or

mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's

operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-

uations, and the location of the vehicle may be

compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-

tem.

For additional information please refer to the

COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's

Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-

tions.

Event data recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-

ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

RHow various systems in your vehicle were

operating

RWhether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened

RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal and

RHow fast the vehicle was traveling

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded

by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-

tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement could combine the EDR data

with the type of personally identifying data rou-

tinely acquired during a crash investigation.

Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed

to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and

special equipment is required. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have

the special equipment, such as law enforce-

ment, can read the information by accessing the

vehicle or the EDR.

EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-

ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-

dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash

Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract

data from the EDR is commercially available,

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly

disclaims any and all liability arising from the

extraction of this information by unauthorized

Mercedes-Benz personnel.

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others

without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if

the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the

lessee. Exceptions to this representation

include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-

ment; by federal, state or local government; in

connection with or arising out of litigation involv-

ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,

as required by law.

Warning: The EDR is a component of the

Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-

ing, modifying or removing the EDR component

may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-

tem Module and other systems.

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that

conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.

This means that in the event of such conflict, the

federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,

13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Data stored in the vehicle 33

Introduction

Information on copyright

Free and open-source software

Information on license for free and open-source

software used in your vehiclecan be foundon

thedatacarrier in your vehicledocumentwallet

and,includingupdates, on thefollowingweb-

site:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks

Registered trademarks:

RBluetooth®is aregisteredtrademark of Blue-

toothSIGInc.

RDTS™ is aregisteredtrademark of DTS, Inc.

RDolby®and MLP™are registeredtrademarks

of DOLBYLaboratories.

RBabySmart™, ESP®and PRE-SAFE®are reg-

isteredtrademarksof Daimler AG.

RHomeLink®is aregisteredtrademark of John-

son Controls.

RiPod®and iTunes®are registeredtrademarks

of Apple Inc.

RBurmester®is aregisteredtrademark of

BurmesterAudiosysteme GmbH.

RMicrosoft®and Windows media®are regis-

tered trademarksof Microsoft Corporation.

RSIRIUS®is aregisteredtrademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc.

RHD Radio™ is aregisteredtrademark of iBiq-

uityDigital Corporation.

RGracenote®is aregisteredtrademark of

Gracenote, Inc.

RZAGATSurvey®and relatedbrands are regis-

tered trademarksof Zagat Survey, LLC.

34 Information on copyright

Introduction

Cockpit

Function Page

:Steering wheel paddle shift-

ers 138

;Combination switch 108

=Horn

?Instrument cluster 36

ADIRECT SELECT lever 133

BClimate control systems 115

COverhead control panel 41

DControl panel for multimedia

system and vehicle functions 38

EIgnition lock 123

Start/Stop button 124

FAdjusts the steering wheel 100

GCruise control lever 152

HElectric parking brake 145

Function Page

IDiagnostics connection 31

JOpens the hood 281

KLight switch 107

LControl panel for:

YActivating Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC with Steer-

ing Pilot 159

ÇSwitching on Active

Lane Keeping Assist 189

cDeactivating Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC 172

ÔSwitching on the 360°

camera 176

Switching on the head-up

display 195

Vehicles without a driver

assistance system: map/

coin holder

Cockpit 35

At a glance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

:Speedometer withsegments 192

Warning and indicator lamps:

åESP®OFF244

÷ESP®244

·Distancewarning 250

ÐPowersteering assis-

tance malfunctioning 252

6Restraintsystem 44

üSeat belt notfastened241

KHigh-beam headlamps 108

LLow-beam headlamps 108

TParking lamps108

RRear fog lamp 108

hTirepressuremonitor 251

;#! Turn signals 108

=Multifunction display 194

?Tachometer 193

Warning and indicator lamps:

!Electric parking brake

(yellow) 247

Function Page

!ABSmalfunctioning 244

;CheckEngine247

Electric parking brake

applied(red) 247

FUSAonly

!Canadaonly

Brakes(red) 243

$USAonly

JCanadaonly

MSPORT handlingmode

(Mercedes-AMGvehicles) 246

ACoolanttemperature gauge 193

Warning and indicator lamps:

?Coolanttoohot/cold 248

BFuellevel indicator

Warning and indicator lamps:

8Reserve fuel withfuel

filler flap location indicator

(right-hand side)247

iInformation on displayingtheoutside tem-

peraturein themultifunction display can be

foundunder "Outside temperature display"

(Ypage 193).

36 Instrument cluster

At a glance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

:Multifunction display 194

;Multimedia system display

=~Rejects or ends a call

6Makes or accepts a call

Further telephone functions 202

WXAdjusts volume

8Mute

óSwitches on voice-

operated control for naviga-

tion or the Voice Control Sys-

tem

Function Page

?òOpens the menu list

9:Selects a menu

aConfirms the selection

%Back

Operates the on-board com-

puter 193

ñSwitches on voice-

operated control for naviga-

tion or the Voice Control Sys-

tem

iVehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys-

tem: you can find further information

Ron the multimedia system in the Digital

Operator's Manual

Ron voice-controlled navigation in the man-

ufacturer's operating instructions

iVehicles with COMAND multimedia sys-

tem: you can find further information

Ron the multimedia system in the Digital

Operator's Manual

Ron the single DVD drive in the Digital Oper-

ator's Manual

Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-

rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 37

At a glance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

:Climate control systems 115

;£Hazard warning lamps 109

=ØVehicle functions/

system settings button (see

Digital Operator's Manual)

?%Telephone button (see

Digital Operator's Manual)

APASSENGER AIRBAG indica-

tor lamps 44

ATA indicator lamp 74

Function Page

BAnalog clock

CÕMedia button (see Dig-

ital Operator's Manual)

D$Radio button (see Digi-

tal Operator's Manual)

EØNavigation button (see

Digital Operator's Manual)

FþInserts or ejects a CD

or DVD (see Digital Opera-

tor's Manual)

38 Center console

At a glance

Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

:Stowage compartment 263

Ashtray 269

Cigarette lighter 270

Socket 270

Cup holder 267

;Adjusts the volume 254

Switches the sound on or off 254

=ÜSwitches the multime-

dia system on/off 254

?Moves the seat-belt extender

forward 47

ATouchpad 255

BOpens and closes the soft

top 88

CAIRCAP 91

Function Page

DOpens stowage compart-

ment with Media Interface 263

EOpening and closing the side

windows 85

FèECO start/stop func-

tion 127

GÉSets the vehicle level 163

cDeactivates Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC 172

HDYNAMIC SELECT switch 130

I%Back button 254

JController 254

KgFavorites button 256

Center console 39

At a glance

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

:Ashtray 269

Cigarette lighter 270

Socket 270

Cup holder 267

;Adjusts the volume 254

Switches the sound on or off 254

Vehicles with AMG Perform-

ance exhaust system:

ÜSwitches the multime-

dia system on/off 254

=AMG performance exhaust

system can be selected 129

ÜSwitches the multime-

dia system on/off 254

?èECO start/stop func-

tion 127

AMoves the seat-belt extender

forward 47

BTouchpad 255

COpens and closes the soft

top 88

Function Page

DAIRCAP 91

EOpens stowage compart-

ment with Media Interface 263

FOpening and closing the side

windows 85

GåActivates/deactivates

ESP®69

MActivates/deactivates

SPORT handling mode 69

HàAMG RIDE CONTROL

(suspension tuning) 165

IManual gearshifting (perma-

nent setting) 138

JDYNAMIC SELECT switch

(selects the drive program) 130

K%Back button 254

LController 254

MgFavorites button 256

40 Center console

At a glance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

:pSwitches the left-hand

reading lamp on/off 110

;cSwitches the front inte-

rior lighting on/off 111

=|Switches the automatic

interior lighting control

on/off 111

?pSwitches the right-

hand reading lamp on/off 110

AEyeglasses compartment 264

Function Page

BRear-view mirror

Automatic anti-glare 104

CButtons for the garage door

opener 278

DFBreakdown assistance

call button (mbrace system) 273

EGSOS button (mbrace

system) 272

FïInfo call button

(mbrace system) 273

Overhead control panel 41

At a glance

Door controlpanel

Function Page

:r45=

Stores settings for the seat,

exterior mirrors and steering

column 105

;Adjusts the seats electrically 96

=cSeat heating 99

?sSeat ventilation 99

AÒAIRSCARF 100

BOpens the door 81

C%&Unlocks/locks

the vehicle 82

DWOpens/closes the left

side window 85

Function Page

E7Zª\

Adjusts and folds the exterior

mirrors in/out electrically 103

FWOpens/closes the right

side window 85

GpOpens the trunk lid 84

HWOpens/closes the rear

right side window 85

IWOpens/closes the rear

left side window 85

42 Door control panel

At a glance

Panic alarm

XTo arm: press and hold !button :for

approximately one second.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed.

XTo disarm: press !button :again.

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function

or KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop but-

ton.

The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system

The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-

cle occupants coming into contact with parts of

the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.

The restraint system can also reduce the forces

to which vehicle occupants are subjected during

an accident.

The restraint system comprises:

RSeat belt system

RAir bags

RChild restraint system

RChild seat securing systems

The components of the restraint system work in

conjunction with each other. They can only

deploy their protective function if, at all times, all

vehicle occupants:

Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly

(Ypage 46)

Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted

properly (Ypage 94)

As the driver, you also have to make sure that

the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.

Observe the information relating to the correct

driver's seat position (Ypage 94).

You also have to make sure that an air bag can

inflate properly if deployed (Ypage 49).

An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat

belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag

increases the level of protection for vehicle

occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-

ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection

offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags

are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only

the air bags that increase protection in that par-

ticular accident situation are deployed. How-

ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not

protect against objects penetrating the vehicle

from the outside.

Information on restraint system operation can

be found under "Triggering of the Emergency

Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Ypage 56).

See "Children in the vehicle" for information on

children traveling with you in the vehicle as well

as on child restraint systems (Ypage 59).

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Modifications to the restraint system may

cause it to no longer work as intended. The

restraint system may then not perform its

intended protective function and may fail in an

accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.

This poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Never modify parts of the restraint system.

Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic

components or their software.

If it is necessary to modify components of the

restraint system to accommodate a person with

disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for details. USA only: for further

information contact our Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use

driving aids which have been approved specifi-

cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are

checked after the ignition is switched on and at

regular intervals while the engine is running.

Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in

good time.

The 6restraint system warning lamp on the

instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-

nents of the restraint system are in operational

readiness.

A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint

system warning lamp:

Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched

Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the

engine running

Rlights up again while the engine is running

GWARNING

If the restraint system is malfunctioning,

restraint system components may be trig-

gered unintentionally or may not deploy as

intended during an accident. This can affect

for example the Emergency Tensioning

Device or the air bag. This poses an increased

risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked and

repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp :and

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ;are

part of the Occupant Classification System

(OCS).

The indicator lamps display the status of the

front-passenger front air bag.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-

onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are

off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the

front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy

in the event of an accident.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-

dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

Depending on the person in the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front air bag must

either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-

lowing points. You must make sure of this both

before and during a journey.

RChildren in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is

enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-

led child restraint system, and the age and

size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe

the notes on the "Occupant Classification

System (OCS)" (Ypage 51) and on "Chil-

dren in the vehicle" (Ypage 59). There you

will also find instructions on rearward and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the

front-passenger seat.

RAll other persons: depending on the classi-

fication of the person in the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-

bled or deactivated (Ypage 51). Be sure to

observe the notes on "Seat

belts“ (Ypage 44) and "Air bags"

(Ypage 48). There you can also find infor-

mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

Introduction

Seat belts are the most effective means of

restricting the movement of vehicle occupants

in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling

over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants

coming into contact with parts of the vehicle

interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-

thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

44 Occupant safety

Safety

occupant in the best position in relation to the

air bag.

The seat belt system comprises:

RSeat belts

REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt

force limiters

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet

quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt

retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-

ted any further.

The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the

seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close

against the body. However it does not pull the

vehicle occupant back in the direction of the

backrest.

The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-

rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of

an incorrectly fastened seat belt.

When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to

reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the

vehicle occupant.

The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are

synchronized with the front air bags, which

absorb part of the deceleration force. This can

reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-

pants during an accident.

!If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,

do not engage the seat belt tongue in the

buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-

wise, the Emergency Tensioning Device and

side impact air bag could be triggered in the

event of an accident and would need to be

replaced.

Important safety notes

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems

is required by law in:

Rall 50 states

Rthe U.S. territories

Rthe District of Columbia

Rall Canadian provinces

Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle

occupants should correctly fasten their seat

belts before starting the journey.

GWARNING

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot

perform its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause

injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-

dent or when braking or changing direction

abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury

or even fatal injury.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have

their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-

ting properly.

The components of the restraint system work in

conjunction with each other. They can only

deploy their protective function if, at all times, all

vehicle occupants:

Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly

(Ypage 46)

Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted

properly (Ypage 94)

GWARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level

of protection if you have not moved the back-

rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could

slide underneath the seat belt and sustain

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the backrest

is in an almost vertical position and that the

shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder.

GWARNING

Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot

wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-

tional and suitable restraint system. If the

seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-

form its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause

injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-

dent or when braking or changing direction

abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury

or even fatal injury.

For this reason, always secure persons under

5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint

systems.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

If a child younger than twelve years old and

under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the

vehicle:

Ralways secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cle. The child restraint system must be appro-

priate to the age, weight and size of the child

Ralways observe the instructions and safety

notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(Ypage 59) in addition to the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation and oper-

ating instructions

Ralways observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant classification system

(OCS)" (Ypage 51)

GWARNING

The seat belts may not perform their intended

protective function if:

Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely

dirty, bleached or dyed

Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirty

Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt

anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-

fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,

although the damage may not be visible, e.g.

due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged

seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.

Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices

could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy

when necessary. This poses an increased risk

of injury or even fatal injury.

Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-

sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia

reels. Make sure that the seat belts are

undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-

ing an accident, have the seat belts checked

immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed

for the standard three-point seat belt. If you

install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or

racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot

provide the best level of protection.

GWARNING

If you feed seat belts through the opening in

the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be

damaged or may even break in the event of an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

Only use the standard three-point seat belt.

Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Ypage 45).

All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat

belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also

make sure that all vehicle occupants are always

wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle

is in motion.

When fastening the seat belt, always make sure

that:

Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only

into the belt buckle belonging to that seat

Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat.

Rthe seat belt is not twisted

Only then can the forces which occur be dis-

tributed over the area of the belt.

Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder

The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck or be routed under your

arm or behind your back.

Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap

as low down as possible

The lap belt must always be routed across

your hip joints and not across your abdomen.

This applies particularly to pregnant women.

If necessary, push the lap belt down to your

hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder

section of the belt.

Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-

ted or fragile objects

If you have such items located on or in your

clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store

these in a suitable place.

Ronly one person is using a seat belt

Infants and children must never travel sitting

on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event

46 Occupant safety

Safety

of an accident, they could be crushed

between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.

Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if

the seat belt is also being used by one of the

vehicle's occupants

Also ensure that there are never objects

between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and

restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the

"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-

gage or loads (Ypage 263).

Fastening seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Ypage 45) and the notes on correct use of seat

belts (Ypage 46).

GWARNING

If the seat-belt extender is extended during

the journey, the seat belt is not fitted properly

on the body. The seat belt can then no longer

perform its intended protective function. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Always make sure that the seat-belt extender

is retracted during a journey.

If the seat-belt extender does not retract auto-

matically, you can return it manually. Press the

seat-belt extender back to the stop before start-

ing the vehicle to do so. Returning the seat-belt

extender requires force.

The seat-belt extender for the driver and front

passenger helps you fasten your seat belt. Seat-

belt extender =is extended when the respec-

tive door is closed.

You can also extend seat-belt extender =with

seat-belt extender button ?.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock.

XPress seat-belt extender button ?.

Seat-belt extender =extends.

Seat-belt extender =is retracted again if:

Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt

buckle

Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt

buckle within 60 seconds

In this case, you can extend seat-belt

extender =again. Press seat-belt extender

button ?again.

Rthe respective door is opened

Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it

forward

Rthe front-passenger seat remains unoccupied

If you then press seat-belt extender but-

ton ?, seat-belt extender =will not extend.

Basic illustration

Occupant safety 47

Safety

XAdjust the seat (Ypage 94).

The seat backrest must be in an almost

upright position.

XPull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt

extender =and engage belt tongue ;into

belt buckle :.

The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the

front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-

matically, see "Belt adjustment"

(Ypage 48).

XIf necessary, pull up on the shoulder section

of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your

body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are

equipped with a special seat belt retractor to

securely fasten child restraint systems in the

vehicle. Further information can be found under

"Special seat belt retractor" (Ypage 60).

Releasing seat belts

!Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.

Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be

trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

This could damage the door, the door trim

panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts

can no longer fulfill their protective function

and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

XPress the release button in the belt buckle,

hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt

back.

Seat belt adjustment

The belt adjustment is a convenience function

integrated into PRE-SAFE®. With this function,

the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are

adjusted to the upper body of the vehicle occu-

pant.

The seat belt strap will slightly tighten if:

Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle and

Rthe ignition is switched on

The seat belt adjustment will apply a certain

tightening force if any slack is detected between

the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not

grab hold of the seat belt.

You can switch the seat belt adjustment on and

off using the multimedia system. Information on

switching the seat belt adjustment on and off

can be found in the Digital Operating Instruc-

tions.

Belt warning for the driver and front

passenger

The 7seat belt warning lamp in the instru-

ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-

pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up

continuously or flash. In addition, there may be

a warning tone.

Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has

already been fastened, the 7seat belt warn-

ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the

engine is started. If the doors are closed and the

driver's or front-passenger seat belt has not

been fastened, the 7seat belt warning lamp

lights up again after the six seconds. As soon as

the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are

fastened or a door is opened again, the 7

seat belt warning lamp goes out.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the

engine is started, an additional warning tone will

sound. The warning tone switches off after six

seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-

tened.

If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-

passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning

tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with

increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

driver or front passenger have fastened their

seat belts.

If the driver or front passenger unfasten their

seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-

ing is activated again.

Air bags

Introduction

The installation point of an air bag can be rec-

ognized by the AIRBAG marking.

An air bag complements the correctly fastened

seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The

air bag provides additional protection in appli-

cable accident situations.

Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The

different air bag systems function independ-

ently from one another (Ypage 56).

However, no system available today can com-

pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury

caused by an air bag due to the high speed at

which the air bag must be deployed.

48 Occupant safety

Safety

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you do notsit in thecorrectseat position,

theair bag cannotprotect as intended and

could evencauseadditional injury when

deployed. This poses an increased riskof

injury or evenfatal injury.

To avoidhazardous situations, always make

surethat all of thevehicle's occupants:

Rhave fastenedtheir seat beltscorrectly,

includingpregnant women

Rare sitting correctlyand maintainthegreat-

est possible distanceto theair bags

Rfollow thefollowinginstructions

Always makesurethat there are no objects

between theair bag and thevehicle's occu-

pants.

RAdjusttheseatsproperly before beginning

your journey. Always makesurethat theseat

is in an almost upright position.The center of

thehead restraintmust support thehead at

about eye level.

RMovethedriver'sand front-passenger seats

as far backas possible.The driver'sseat posi-

tion must allow thevehicleto be driven safely.

ROnly hold thesteering wheelon theoutside.

This allows theair bag to be fully deployed.

RAlways lean against thebackrest while driv-

ing.Do notlean forward or lean against the

door or side window. You may otherwise be in

thedeploymentarea of theair bags.

RAlways keep your feetin thefootwell in front

of theseat.Do notput your feeton thedash-

board, for example. Your feetmay otherwise

be in thedeploymentarea of theair bag.

RForthis reason,always secure personsless

than 5ft (1.50m) tall in suitable restraint sys-

tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot

be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also

observe the following notes:

RAlways secure children under twelve years of

age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable

child restraint systems.

RChild restraint systems should be installed on

the rear seats.

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

when the front-passenger front air bag is

deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated

(Ypage 44).

RAlways observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant Classification System

(OCS)" (Ypage 51) and on "Children in the

vehicle" (Ypage 59)in addition to the child

restraint system manufacturer's installation

and operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent

an air bag from functioning correctly. Before

starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting

from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make

sure that:

Rthere are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an air bag

Rthere are no objects between the seat, door

and B-pillar

Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks

Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are

attached to the vehicle within the deployment

area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,

rear side trim or side walls

Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in

the pockets of your clothing. Store such

objects in a suitable place

GWARNING

If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects

such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer

function correctly. There is an increased risk

of injury.

Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects

to it.

GWARNING

Sensors to control the air bags are located in

the doors. Modifications or work not per-

formed correctly to the doors or door panel-

ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the

function of the sensors being impaired. The air

bags might therefore not function properly

anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot

protect vehicle occupants as they are

Occupant safety 49

Safety

designed to do. There is an increased risk of

injury.

Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

Always have work on the doors or door pan-

eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Front air bags

!Do not place heavy objects on the front-

passenger seat. This could cause the system

to identify the seat as being occupied. In the

event of an accident, the restraint systems on

the front-passenger side may be triggered

and have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag :deploys in front of the steer-

ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;

deploys in front of and above the glove box.

When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-

tional head and thorax protection for the occu-

pants in the front seats.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

informs you about the status of the front-

passenger front air bag (Ypage 44).

The front-passenger front air bag will only

deploy if:

Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor

readings, detects that the front-passenger

seat is occupied (Ypage 51). The

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is

not lit (Ypage 52)

Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a

high accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag :deploys underneath the

steering column and front-passenger knee

bag ;underneath the glove box. The driver's

and front-passenger knee bags are triggered

together with the front air bags.

The driver's and front-passenger knee bags

offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-

tection for the occupants in the front seats.

Side impact air bags

GWARNING

Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-

vent deployment of the air bags integrated

into the seats. Consequently, the air bags

cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are

designed to do. In addition, the operation of

the occupant classification system (OCS)

could be adversely affected. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that have

been approved for the respective seat by

Mercedes-Benz.

50 Occupant safety

Safety

Front side impact air bags :and rear side

impact air bags ;deploy next to the outer bol-

ster of the seat backrest.

When deployed, the side impact air bag offers

additional thorax protection. However, it does

not protect the:

RHead

RNeck

RArms

If the restraint system control unit detects a side

impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on

the side on which the impact occurs.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys under the following conditions:

Rthe OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is occupied or

Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the

belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,

the side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys if an appropriate accident situation

occurs. In this case, deployment is independent

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied

or not.

Head air bags

Head bags :deploy in the area of the side win-

dows at the front.

When deployed, the head bag enhances the

level of protection for the head. However, it does

not protect the:

Rchest

Rarms

If the restraint system control unit detects a side

impact, the head bag is deployed on the side on

which the impact occurs.

If the system determines that they can offer

additional protection to that provided by the

seat belt, a head bag may be deployed in other

accident situations (Ypage 56).

The head bag on the front-passenger side

deploys under the following conditions:

Rthe OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is occupied or

Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the

belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,

the head bag on the front-passenger side

deploys if an appropriate accident situation

occurs. In this case, deployment is independent

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied

or not.

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Introduction

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-

egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.

Depending on that result, the front-passenger

front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are

either enabled or deactivated.

The system does not deactivate:

Rthe side impact air bag

Rthe headbag

Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Requirements

To be classified correctly, the front passenger

must sit:

Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly

Rin an almost upright position with their back

against the seat backrest

Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible

If the front passenger does not observe these

conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-

tion, e.g. because the front passenger:

Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-

selves on a vehicle armrest

Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised

from the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be

sure to observe the correct positioning of the

child restraint system. Never place objects

under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a

Occupant safety 51

Safety

cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length.

The entire base of the child restraint system

must always rest on the seat cushion of the

front-passenger seat. The backrest of the

forward-facing child restraint system must lie as

flat as possible against the backrest of the front-

passenger seat.

The child restraint system must not touch the

roof or be subjected to a load by the head

restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest

and the head restraint position accordingly.

Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function

correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer's installation and operating

instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-

tion (OCS)

:PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

;PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

The indicator lamps inform you whether the

front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or

enabled.

XPress the Start/Stop button once or twice, or

turn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock.

The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER

AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-

taneously for approximately six seconds.

The indicator lamps display the status of the

front-passenger front air bag.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-

onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are

off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the

front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy

in the event of an accident.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-

dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

If the status of the front-passenger front air bag

changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag

display message appears in the instrument clus-

ter (Ypage 222). When the front-passenger

seat is occupied, always pay attention to the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be

aware of the status of the front-passenger front

air bag both before and during the journey.

GWARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is

disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of

an accident and cannot perform its intended

protective function. A person in the front-

passenger seat could then, for example, come

into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-

cially if the person is sitting too close to the

dashboard. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,

always ensure that:

Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-

passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

bled in accordance with the person in the

front-passenger seat

Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved

back as far back as possible.

Rthe person is seated correctly.

Make sure, both before and during the jour-

ney, that the status of the front-passenger

front air bag is correct.

GWARNING

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag

may deploy in the event of an accident. The

52 Occupant safety

Safety

child could be struck by the air bag. This poses

an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger front air

bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

You can find more information on OCS under

"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-

tem" (Ypage 55).

GWARNING

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

and you position the front-passenger seat too

close to the dashboard, in the event of an

accident, the child could:

Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-

rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-

cator lamp is lit, for example

Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Always move the front-passenger seat as far

back as possible and fully retract the seat

cushion length. Always make sure that the

shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from

the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt

guide on the child restraint system. The shoul-

der belt strap must be routed forwards and

downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If

necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and

the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always

observe the child restraint system manufac-

turer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that:

Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up after the system self-test and

remains lit. This indicates that the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a

child of up to twelve months old, in a standard

child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the

system self-test and remains lit. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

deactivated.

But even in the case of a twelve-month-old

child, in a standard child restraint system, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can

go out after the system self-test. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

activated. The result of the classification is

dependent on, among other factors, the child

restraint system and the child's stature. It is

recommended that you install the child

restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-

son with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager or

small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after

the system self-test depending on the result

of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.

-if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat

as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-

son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

-if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature

should not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person of adult stature, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

goes out after the system self-test. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to

observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(Ypage 59).

When the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint

system warning lamp on the instrument cluster

and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp light up simultaneously. The front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated in this

case and does not deploy during an accident.

Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

checked and repaired immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose.

If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the

seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary

repair work carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that

you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

for this purpose.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use seat accessories that

have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not

mean that the front-passenger front air bag will

also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-

tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the

front-passenger seat. Depending on that result,

the front-passenger front air bag is either ena-

bled or deactivated.

System self-test

GDANGER

If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do

not light up during the system self-test, the

system is malfunctioning. The front-

passenger front air bag might be triggered

unintentionally or might not be triggered at all

in the event of an accident with high deceler-

ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

In this case the front-passenger seat may not

be used. Do not install a child restraint system

on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-

pant Classification System (OCS) checked

and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

GWARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the

front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will

not be deployed in the event of an accident. In

this case, the front-passenger front air bag

cannot perform its intended protective func-

tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-

passenger seat.

That person could, for example, come into

contact with the vehicle's interior, especially

if the person is sitting too close to the dash-

board. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,

always ensure that:

Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-

passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

bled in accordance with the person in the

front-passenger seat

Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-

rectly fastened seatbelt

Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-

passenger seat may not be used. Do not

install a child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-

cation System (OCS) checked and repaired

immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

GWARNING

Objects between the seat surface and the

child restraint system could affect OCS oper-

ation. This could result in the front-passenger

air bag not functioning as intended during an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

Do not place any objects between the seat

surface and the child restraint system. The

entire base of the child restraint system must

always rest on the seat cushion of the front-

passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

facing child restraint system must, as far as

possible, be resting on the backrest of the

front-passenger seat. Always comply with the

child restraint system manufacturer's instal-

lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator

lamp displays the status of the front-passenger

front air bag (Ypage 52). If the front-passenger

front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds

and then goes out.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

54 Occupant safety

Safety

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-

lems with the Occupant Classification System"

(Ypage 55).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Ypage 54).

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up and remains lit,

even though the front-

passenger seat is occu-

pied by an adult or a per-

son of a stature corre-

sponding to that of an

adult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-

rect.

XMake sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person

on the front-passenger seat are met (Ypage 51).

XIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-

passenger seat may not be used.

XHave OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp

does not light up and/or

does not stay on.

The front-passenger seat

is:

Runoccupied

Roccupied with the

weight of a child up to

twelve months old in a

child restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.

XMake sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child

seat.

XMake sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on

the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the

forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible

against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,

adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

XMake sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.

XWhen installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat

belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger

seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child

restraint system being pulled too tightly.

XCheck for correct installation of the child restraint system.

Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child

restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-

ingly.

XMake sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the

seat.

XIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or

the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install

a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-

mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear

seat.

XHave OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Roll bar

GDANGER

If the roll bar has developed a malfunction, it

may not function, e.g. in the event of an acci-

dent. The roll bars may then not protect the

vehicle occupants as intended. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Have roll bars checked immediately at a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

GWARNING

Risk of injury if the roll bar is triggered.

Ensure that the movement area of the roll bars

behind the rear head restraints is kept clear.

GWARNING

If you place objects or clothing on the roll bar

covers, these could impair roll bar extension.

The roll bars may then not protect the vehicle

occupants as intended. In addition, objects

could endanger the vehicle occupants when

the roll bar is extending. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Ensure that the movement area of the roll bar

covers is kept clear. Always stow all objects in

the vehicle correctly.

The roll bars are under the covers behind the

rear head restraints. They extend if systems

detect that the vehicle is in danger of rollover.

Once the roll bars are extended, an open soft top

can no longer be closed. In this case, visit the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

Devices and air bags

Important safety notes

GWARNING

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has

been deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a

deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop as soon as possible.

GWARNING

A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-

tection and cannot provide the intended pro-

tection in an accident. There is an increased

risk of injury.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-

ist workshop in order to have a deployed air

bag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of your

passenger to have deployed air bags replaced

and to have any malfunctioning air bags

repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags

continue to perform their protective function for

the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

GWARNING

Emergency Tensioning Devices that have

deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-

tional and are unable to perform their inten-

ded protective function. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency

Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a

qualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE®to trig-

ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous

situations. This procedure is reversible.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered

or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,

and some powder may also be released. The

6restraint system warning lamp lights up.

Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-

ing. The powder that is released generally does

not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause

short-term breathing difficulties in people with

asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided

it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle

immediately or open the window in order to pre-

vent breathing difficulties.

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning

Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,

which may require special handling and regard

for the environment. National guidelines must

be observed during disposal. In California, see

56 Occupant safety

Safety

www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/

Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operation

During thefirst stage of acollision,therestraint

system control unitevaluatesimportant physi-

cal datarelating to vehicledeceleration or accel-

eration,suchas:

Rduration

Rdirection

Rintensity

Based on theevaluation of this data, the

restraintsystem control unittriggers theEmer-

gency Tensioning Devices during afrontal or

rear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Devicecan only be

triggered,if:

Rtheignition is switched on

Rthecomponentsof therestraintsystem are

operational. You can findfurther information

under "Restraintsystem warning lamp"

(Ypage 44)

Rtheseat belt buckletongue has engagedin

thebelt buckleof therespective frontseat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in therear

compartmentare triggered independentlyof the

lockstatus of theseat belts.

If therestraintsystem control unitdetects a

moresevere accident, further componentsof

therestraintsystem are activated independ-

entlyof eachother in certain frontal collision

situations:

RFrontair bags as well as driver's and front-

passenger knee bags

RHeadbag, if thesystem determinesthat

deployment can offer additional protection to

that provided by theseat belt

The front-passenger frontair bag is activated or

deactivated depending on theperson on the

front-passenger seat.The front-passenger front

air bag can only deploy in an accidentif the

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFFindicator lamp is off.

Observetheinformation on thePASSENGER AIR

BAGindicator lamps (Ypage 44).

Your vehiclehas two-stagefrontair bags.In the

first deployment stage, thefrontair bag is filled

withpropellantgas. The frontair bag is fully

deployed withthemaximum amount of propel-

lantgas if aseconddeployment threshold is

reached within afew milliseconds.

The activation threshold of theEmergency Ten-

sioning Devices and theair bags is determined

by evaluating therateof vehicledeceleration or

acceleration whichoccursat various points in

thevehicle. This process is pre-emptive in

nature. Deploymentshould takeplacein good

time at thestart of thecollision.

The rateof vehicledeceleration or acceleration

and thedirection of theforce are essentially

determinedby:

Rthedistribution of forcesduring thecollision

Rthecollision angle

Rthedeformation characteristics of thevehicle

Rthecharacteristics of theobjectwithwhich

thevehiclehas collided

Factors whichcan only be seenand measured

after acollision has occurred do notplay adeci-

siverolein thedeployment of an air bag. Nor do

they providean indication of air bag deploy-

ment.

The vehiclecan be deformed considerably, with-

out an air bag beingdeployed. This is thecaseif

only partswhichare relativelyeasilydeformed

are affectedand therateof deceleration is not

high.Conversely, air bags may be deployed even

though thevehiclesuffersonly minor deforma-

tion.This is thecaseif, for example, veryrigid

vehiclepartssuchas longitudinal body mem-

bersare hit,and sufficientdeceleration occurs

as aresult.

If therestraintsystem control unitdetects aside

impact or if thevehiclerolls over, theapplicable

componentsof therestraintsystem are activa-

tedindependentlyof eachother depending on

theapparenttypeof accident.

RSideimpact air bags on theside of impact,

independentlyof theEmergency Tensioning

Deviceand theuse of theseat belt on the

driver's seat and in therear compartment

seats

The side impact air bag on thefront-

passenger side deploys under thefollowing

conditions:

-theOCS system detects that thefront-

passenger seat is occupied or

-theseat belt buckletongue is engagedin

thebelt buckleof thefront-passenger seat

RHeadbag on theside of impact,independ-

entlyof theuse of theseat belt and inde-

pendentlyof whether thefront-passenger

seat is occupied

Occupant safety 57

Safety

REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system

determines that deployment can offer addi-

tional protection in this situation

RHead bags on the driver's and front-

passenger side in certain situations when the

vehicle rolls over, if the system determines

that deployment can offer additional protec-

tion to that provided by the seat belt

iNot all air bags are deployed in an accident.

The different air bag systems work independ-

ently of each other.

How the air bag system works is determined

by the severity of the accident detected,

especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-

eration and the apparent type of accident:

RFrontal collision

RSide impact

RRollover

PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occupant

protection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®

takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-

cle occupants.

Important safety notes

!Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger

that the seats and/or objects could be dam-

aged when PRE-SAFE®is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with the

PRE-SAFE®system, the possibility of personal

injuries occurring as a result of an accident can-

not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving

style to suit the prevailing road and weather

conditions and maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE®intervenes:

Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when

BAS is activated

Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-

cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-

steers or oversteers severely

Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package:

when a driver assistance system intervenes

powerfully or the radar sensor system detects

an imminent danger of collision in certain sit-

uations

PRE-SAFE®takes the following measures

depending on the hazardous situation detected:

Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.

Rif the vehicle skids, the front side windows are

closed.

Rvehicles with the memory function for the

front-passenger seat: the front-passenger

seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi-

tion.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-

ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE®slackens the belt

pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®

can then be reversed.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:

XMove the seat backrest or seat back slightly

when the vehicle is stationary.

The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and

the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of

the PRE-SAFE®convenience function. Informa-

tion about the convenience function can be

found under "Belt adjustment" (Ypage 48).

PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory occu-

pant protection system PLUS)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE®PLUS is only available in vehicles

with the Driving Assistance package.

Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®

PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end

collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-

uations, PRE-SAFE®PLUS takes pre-emptive

measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

58 Occupant safety

Safety

Important safety notes

The intervention of PRE-SAFE®PLUScannot

preventan imminent collision.

The driver is notwarned about theintervention

of PRE-SAFE®PLUS.

PRE-SAFE®PLUSdoes notinterveneif thevehi-

cle is backingup.

When driving,or when parking or exiting apark-

ing spacewithassistancefrom Parking Pilot,

PRE-SAFE®PLUSwill notapply thebrakes.

Function

PRE-SAFE®PLUSintervenes in certain situa-

tionsif theradar sensor system detects an

imminent head-on or rear-end collision.

PRE-SAFE®PLUStakes thefollowingmeasures

depending on thehazardous situation detected:

Rif theradar sensor system detects that a

head-on collision is imminent,theseat belts

are pre-tensioned.

Rif theradar sensor system detects that arear-

endcollision is imminent:

-thebrakepressureis increased if thedriver

appliesthebrakes when thevehicleis sta-

tionary.

-theseat beltsare pre-tensioned.

The PRE-SAFE®PLUSbraking application is can-

celed:

Rif theacceleratorpedal is depressed when a

gear is engaged

Rif theriskof acollision passes or is no longer

detected

Rif DistancePilot DISTRONICindicates an

intention to pull away

If thehazardous situation passes without result-

ing in an accident, theoriginal settingsare

restored.

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent

Immediately after an accident, thefollowing

measures are implemented, depending on the

typeand severityof theimpact:

Rthehazard warning lampsare switched on

Rtheemergencylighting is activated

Rthevehicledoorsare unlocked

Rthefrontside windows are lowered

Rvehicles with a memory function:theelectri-

callyadjustable steering wheelis raised when

thedriver'sdoor is opened

Rtheengineis switched off and thefuel supply

is cut off

Rvehicles withmbrace:automatic emergency

call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes

Accidentstatistics showthat children secured

in therear seatsare safer than children secured

in thefront-passenger seat.Forthis reason,

Mercedes-Benzstrongly advises that you install

achild restraintsystem on arear seat.Children

are generally betterprotected there.

If achild younger than twelve years old and

under 5ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the

vehicle:

Ralways secure thechild in achild restraint

system suitable for Mercedes-Benzvehicles.

The child restraintsystem must be appropri-

ate to theage, weightand sizeof thechild

Rbe sureto observetheinstructionsand safety

notesin this section in addition to thechild

restraintsystem manufacturer'sinstallation

instructions

Rbe sureto observetheinstructionsand safety

noteson the"Occupant classification system

(OCS)" (Ypage 51)

GWARNING

If you leavechildren unsupervised in thevehi-

cle,they could set it in motion by, for example:

Rrelease theparking brake.

Rshifttheautomatic transmission out of the

parking position P.

Rstart theengine.

In addition,they may operate vehicleequip-

mentand become trapped.Thereis ariskof

an accidentand injury.

When leaving thevehicle, always takethe

SmartKey withyou and lockthevehicle. Never

leavechildren unsupervised in thevehicle.

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

GWARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected

to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or

cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even

fatal. Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

GWARNING

If the child restraint system is subjected to

direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts,

particularly on the metal parts of the child

restraint system. There is a risk of injury.

If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with

you, always ensure that the child restraint

system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-

tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child

restraint system has been exposed to direct

sunlight, let it cool down before securing the

child in it. Never leave children unattended in

the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have

their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting

properly. Particular attention must be paid to

children.

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Ypage 45) and the notes on correct use of seat

belts (Ypage 46).

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve

proper seat belt positioning for children over

41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a

three-point seat belt can be properly fastened

without a booster seat.

Special seatbelt retractor

GWARNING

If the seat belt is released while driving, the

child restraint system will no longer be

secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-

tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a

portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot

be immediately refastened. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate

the special seat belt retractor and secure the

child restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's

seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt

retractor. When activated, the special seat belt

retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot

slacken once the child seat is secured.

Installing a child restraint system:

XMake sure you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions.

XPull the front seat belt smoothly out of the

seat-belt extender and the rear seat belt out

of the belt sash guide.

XEngage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

XPull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again.

While the seat belt is retracting, you should

hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt

retractor is enabled.

XPush the child restraint system down so that

the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing the child restraint system and deac-

tivating the special seat belt retractor:

XMake sure you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions.

XPress the release button of the seat belt

buckle, hold the seat belt tongue and route it

to the seat belt extender in front or the belt

sash guide in the rear compartment.

The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint system

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems

is required by law in:

Rall 50 states

Rthe U.S. territories

Rthe District of Columbia

Rall Canadian provinces

You can obtain further information about the

correct child restraint system from any author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

60 Children in the vehicle

Safety

GWARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incor-

rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as

intended. The child cannot then be restrained

in the event of an accident, heavy braking or

sudden changes of direction. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Make sure that you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,

that the base of the child restraint system is

always resting completely on the seat cush-

ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under

or behind the child restraint system. Only use

child restraint systems with the original cover

designed for them. Only replace damaged

covers with genuine covers.

GWARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incor-

rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in

the event of an accident, heavy braking or a

sudden change in direction. The child

restraint system could be thrown about, strik-

ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased

risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Always install child restraint systems prop-

erly, even if they are not being used. Make

sure that you observe the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowing

objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-

lines" (Ypage 263).

GWARNING

Child restraint systems or their securing sys-

tems which have been damaged or subjected

to a load in an accident can no longer protect

as intended. The child cannot then be

restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

braking or sudden changes of direction. There

is an increased risk of injury, possibly even

fatal.

Replace child restraint systems which have

been damaged or subjected to a load in an

accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-

ing systems on the child restraint system

checked at a qualified specialist workshop,

before you install a child restraint system

again.

The securing systems of child restraint systems

are:

Rthe seat belt system

Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

Rthe Top Tether anchorages

If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on

the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the

information on the "Occupant Classification

System (OCS)" (Ypage 51). There you will also

find information on deactivating the front-

passenger front air bag.

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-

lowing standards:

RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225

RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-

responds to the standards can be found on an

instruction label on the child restraint system.

This confirmation can also be found in the instal-

lation instructions that are included with the

child restraint system.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-

rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-

ing system

GWARNING

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems

do not offer sufficient protection for children

whose weight combined with the child

restraint system is greater than 65 lbs (29 kg)

and who are secured using the safety belt

integrated in the child restraint system. In the

event of an accident, a child might not be

restrained correctly. This poses an increased

risk of injury or even fatal injury.

If the child and the child restraint system

together weigh more than 65 lbs (29 kg), only

use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-

tems with which the child is also secured with

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child

restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if

available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-

lation and operating instructions for the child

restraint system used.

Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-

type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged

correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing

rings

XInstall the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing

rings :.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for

specially designed child restraint systems on

the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing

rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

systems are installed on the left and right of the

rear seats.

Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also

be used and can be installed using the vehicle's

seat belt system. Install the child seat according

to the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

Introduction

Top Tether provides an additional connection

between the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) sys-

tem and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of

injury even further. If the child restraint system

is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should

always be used.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they

could fold forwards in the event of an acci-

dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of

direction. As a result, child restraint systems

cannot perform their intended protective

function. Rear seat backrests that are not

locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.

in the event of an accident. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-

ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-

fication indicator.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and

locked, this will be shown in the multifunction

display in the instrument cluster.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorage points :are located on

the rear side of the backrests on both outer rear

seats.

XPut the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system with Top Tether on the rear seat.

Always comply with the child restraint system

manufacturer's installation instructions when

doing so.

62 Children in the vehicle

Safety

XFold the rear seat backrest forwards

(Ypage 265).

XHook Top Tether hook ;on Top Tether

anchorage :.

XFold back the rear seat backrest

(Ypage 265).

XMake sure that the Top Tether belt =is not

twisted and that the rear seat backrest is

locked.

XSecure the child restraint system with LATCH-

type (ISOFIX) (Ypage 61).

XTension Top Tether belt =from the trunk.

XMake sure there is sufficient belt strap avail-

able to tighten it.

XAlways comply with the child restraint system

manufacturer's installation instructions when

doing so.

Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat

General notes

Accident statistics show that children secured

in the rear seats are safer than children secured

in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,

Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install

the child restraint system on a rear seat.

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat,

always observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant Classification System

(OCS)" (Ypage 51).

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as

a result of:

Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-

passenger seat

Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-

passenger front air bag

Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child

restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-

board

Rearward-facing child restraint system

If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-

facing child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat, always make sure that the

front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is permanently lit (Ypage 44)is the front-

passenger front air bag deactivated.

Always observe the child restraint system man-

ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-

tions.

Forward-facing child restraint system

If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-

facing child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat, always move the front-

passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully

retract the seat cushion length. The entire base

of the child restraint system must always rest on

the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.

The backrest of the child restraint system must

lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the

front-passenger seat. The child restraint system

must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load

by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the

seat backrest and the head restraint position

accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-

der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi-

cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the

child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap

must be routed forward and down from the vehi-

cle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle

belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accord-

ingly.

Always observe the child restraint system man-

ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-

tions.

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Pets in the vehicle

GWARNING

If you leave animals unattended or unsecured

in the vehicle, they could press buttons or

switches, for example.

As a result, they could:

Ractivate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example

Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby

endangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung around

the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-

den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-

cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident

and injury.

Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-

cle. Always secure animals properly during

the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-

port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems

In this section, you will find information about

the following driving safety systems:

RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Ypage 64)

RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Ypage 65)

RActive Brake Assist (Ypage 65)

RESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

(Ypage 67)

REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

(Ypage 71)

RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Ypage 71)

RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

(Ypage 71)

RSTEER CONTROL (Ypage 74)

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are

inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-

ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override

the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are

merely aids designed to assist driving. You are

responsible for maintaining the distance to the

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in

good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt

your driving style to suit the prevailing road and

weather conditions and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

The driving safety systems described only work

as effectively as possible when there is ade-

quate contact between the tires and the road

surface. Pay particular attention to the informa-

tion regarding tires, recommended minimum

tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"

section (Ypage 312).

In wintry driving conditions, always use winter

tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.

Only in this way will the driving safety systems

described in this section work as effectively as

possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that

the wheels do not lock when you brake. This

allows you to continue steering the vehicle when

braking.

The !ABS warning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the ignition is switched

on. It goes out when the engine is running.

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph

(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.

ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you

only brake gently.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

GWARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when

braking. The steerability and braking charac-

teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-

ally, further driving safety systems are deac-

tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-

ding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-

diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

64 Driving safety systems

Safety

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,

including driving safety systems, will also

become inoperative. Observe the information

on the ABS warning lamp (Ypage 244) and dis-

play messages which may be shown in the

instrument cluster (Ypage 213).

Braking

XIf ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-

uation is over.

XTo make a full brake application: depress

the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a

pulsing in the brake pedal.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication

of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a

reminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information

BAS operates in emergency braking situations.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS

automatically boosts the braking force, thus

shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

GWARNING

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance

in an emergency braking situation is

increased. There is a risk of an accident.

In an emergency braking situation, depress

the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents

the wheels from locking.

Braking

XKeep the brake pedal firmly depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you

release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Active Brake Assist

General information

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn-

ing function with an autonomous braking func-

tion and Adaptive Brake Assist.

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the

risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in

front or reduce the effects of such a collision.

If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk

of collision, you will be warned visually and

acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and

audible collision warning, autonomous braking

can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply

the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap-

tive Brake Assist of the Active Brake Assist sys-

tem supports you.

Important safety notes

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rthere is snow or heavy rain

Rthere is interference by other radar sources

Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-

ple in parking garages

Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbike

Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line

Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on

the Active Brake Assist system has just been

carried out

Observe the important safety notes in the

"Breaking-in notes" section (Ypage 122).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,

have the configuration and operation of the

radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist

workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow

speeds where there is no visible damage to the

front of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating

Active Brake Assist is automatically active after

switching on the ignition.

You can activate or deactivate Active Brake

Assist (Ypage 204) in the on-board computer.

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

When deactivated, the distance warning func-

tion and the autonomous braking function are

also deactivated.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ

symbol appears on the assistant display.

Distance warning function

General information

The distance warning function can help you to

minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a

vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a

collision. If the distance warning function

detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will

be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion for driving safety systems (Ypage 64).

GWARNING

The distance warning function does not react:

Rto people or animals

Rto oncoming vehicles

Rto crossing traffic

Rwhen cornering

The distance warning function may not give

warnings in all critical situations. There is a

risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing

road and traffic conditions.

GWARNING

The distance warning function cannot always

clearly identify objects and complex traffic

situations.

In such cases, the distance warning function

may:

Rgive an unnecessary warning

Rnot give a warning

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and do not rely solely on the distance

warning function.

Function

Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph

(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns

you if you are rapidly approaching a vehicle in

front. An intermittent warning tone will then

sound, and the ·distance warning lamp will

light up in the instrument cluster.

XBrake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.

XTake evasive action, provided it is safe to do

so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly

complicated but non-critical driving conditions

may also cause the system to display a warning.

With the help of the radar sensor system, the

distance warning function can detect obstacles

that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-

ded period of time.

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph

(70 km/h), the distance warning function can

also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-

ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function

If the driver does not react to the distance warn-

ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake

Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous

braking function.

Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:

the autonomous braking function is available in

the following speed ranges:

R4–65 mph (7–105 km/h) for moving objects

R4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects

Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the

autonomous braking function is available in the

following speed ranges:

R4–124 mph (7–200 km/h) for moving objects

R4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularly

complicated but non-critical driving conditions

may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-

tion to intervene.

If the autonomous braking function requires a

particularly high braking force, preventative

passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)

are activated simultaneously (Ypage 58).

66 Driving safety systems

Safety

Adaptive Brake Assist

Generalinformation

iObservethe"Importantsafetynotes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

Withthehelp of adaptive Brake Assist, thedis-

tance warning signal can detectobstacles that

are in thepathof your vehiclefor an extended

period of time.

If adaptive Brake Assistdetects ariskof colli-

sion withthevehiclein front, it calculates the

braking force necessaryto avoid a collision.If

you apply thebrakes forcefully, adaptive Brake

Assistwill automatically increasethebraking

force to alevel suitable for thetraffic conditions.

Adaptive Brake Assistprovides braking assis-

tance in hazardous situationsat speeds above

4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology

to assess thetraffic situation.

Up to aspeedof approximately 155mph

(250km/h), Adaptive Brake Assistis capable of

reacting to moving objects that havealready

been detectedas suchat least once overthe

period of observation.

Up to aspeedof approximately 44 mph

(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assistreacts to sta-

tionary obstacles.

If adaptive Brake Assistdemandsparticularly

high braking force,preventative passenger pro-

tection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated

simultaneously (Ypage 58).

XKeepthebrakepedal depressed until the

emergencybraking situation is over.

ABSprevents thewheels from locking.

The brakes will worknormally again if:

Ryou release thebrakepedal.

Rthere is no longer any danger of acollision.

Rno obstacle is detectedin frontof your vehi-

cle.

Adaptive Brake Assistis then deactivated.

Important safety notes

iObservethe"Importantsafetynotes" sec-

tion for drivingsafetysystems (Ypage 64).

GWARNING

Adaptive Brake Assistcannotalways clearly

identify objects and complex traffic situa-

tions.

In suchcases, Adaptive Brake Assistcan:

Rinterveneunnecessarily

Rnotintervene

There is ariskof an accident.

Always pay careful attention to thetraffic sit-

uation and be readyto brake. Terminate the

intervention in anon-critical drivingsituation.

GWARNING

Adaptive Brake Assistdoes notreact:

Rto people or animals

Rto oncomingvehicles

Rto crossing traffic

Rwhen cornering

As aresult,theAdaptive Brake Assistmay not

intervenein all critical conditions. There is a

riskof an accident.

Always pay careful attention to thetraffic sit-

uation and be readyto brake.

Always adapt your speedto suit theprevailing

road and traffic conditions.

Due to thenature of thesystem, particularly

complicated but non-critical drivingconditions

may also causeBrake Assistto intervene.

If adaptive Brake Assistis notavailable due to a

malfunction in theradar sensor system, the

brakesystem remainsavailable withfull brake

boosting effectand BAS.

ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

iObservethe"Importantsafetynotes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

ESP®monitors drivingstabilityand traction,i.e.

powertransmission between thetires and the

road surface.

If ESP®detects that thevehicleis deviating from

thedirection desired by thedriver,oneor more

wheels are braked to stabilizethevehicle. The

engineoutput is also modifiedto keep thevehi-

cle on thedesired coursewithin physical limits.

ESP®assiststhedriver when pullingaway on

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize

the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles

with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.

Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-

vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull

away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for

example if the road surface is slippery on one

side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-

red to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Traction control remains active, even if you

deactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

GWARNING

If ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP®is unable to

stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-

ing safety systems are deactivated. This

increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP®checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

When towing the vehicle with the rear axle

raised, observe the notes on ESP®

(Ypage 307).

If the åESP®OFF warning lamp lights up

continuously, ESP®is deactivated.

If the ÷ESP®warning lamp lights up contin-

uously, ESP®is not available due to a malfunc-

tion.

Observe the information on warning lamps

(Ypage 244) and display messages which may

be shown in the instrument cluster

(Ypage 213).

Only use wheels with the recommended tire

sizes. Only then will ESP®function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General information

If the ÷ESP®warning lamp goes out before

beginning the journey, ESP®is automatically

active.

If ESP®intervenes, the ÷ESP®warning lamp

flashes in the instrument cluster.

If ESP®intervenes:

XDo not deactivate ESP®under any circum-

stances.

XOnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary when pulling away.

XAdapt your driving style to suit the prevailing

road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically when the vehicle stops

moving. The engine starts automatically when

the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®

remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if

ESP®was deactivated before the engine was

automatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP®(except

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

You can select between the following states of

ESP®:

RESP®is activated.

RESP®is deactivated.

GWARNING

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP®no longer sta-

bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk

of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP®in the situations descri-

bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP®in the follow-

ing situations:

Rwhen using snow chains

Rin deep snow

Ron sand or gravel

68 Driving safety systems

Safety

Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action

which provides better grip.

iActivate ESP®as soon as the situations

described above no longer apply. ESP®will

otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if

the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to

spin.

!Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP®deactivated. You

could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP®via the on-

board computer (Ypage 204).

ESP®deactivated:

The åESP®OFF warning lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

ESP®activated:

The åESP®OFF warning lamp in the instru-

ment cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP®is deactivated

If ESP®is deactivated and one or more wheels

start to spin, the ÷ESP®warning lamp in the

instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,

ESP®will not stabilize the vehicle.

If you deactivate ESP®:

RESP®no longer improves driving stability.

REngine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin.

RTraction control is still activated.

RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor

is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-

tance from ESP®.

RPRE-SAFE®is no longer available, nor is it

activated if you brake firmly and ESP®inter-

venes.

RPRE-SAFE®Brake is no longer available, it is

also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®

intervenes.

RESP®still provides support when you brake

firmly.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

You can select between the following states of

ESP®:

RESP®is activated.

RSPORT handling mode is activated.

RESP®is deactivated.

GWARNING

When SPORT handling mode is activated,

there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-

dents.

Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-

uations described in the following.

GWARNING

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP®no longer sta-

bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk

of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP®in the situations descri-

bed in the following.

!Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP®deactivated. You

could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

In the following situations, it may be better to

activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate

ESP®:

Rwhen using snow chains

Rin deep snow

Ron sand or gravel

Ron specially designated roads when the vehi-

cle's own oversteering and understeering

characteristics are desired

Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action

which provides better grip.

Driving in SPORT handling mode or without

ESP®requires an extremely qualified and expe-

rienced driver.

iActivate ESP®as soon as the situations

described above no longer apply. ESP®will

otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to

spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

XTo activate SPORT handling mode: briefly

press button :.

The MSPORT handling mode warning

lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The

SPORT handling mode message appears on

the multifunction display.

XTo deactivate SPORT handling mode:

briefly press button :.

The MSPORT handling mode warning

lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

XTo deactivate ESP®:press button :until

the åESP®OFF warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster.

The ÷OFF message appears on the mul-

tifunction display.

XTo activate ESP®:briefly press button :.

The åESP®OFF warning lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON

message appears on the multifunction dis-

play.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-

dling mode

If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or

more wheels start to spin, the ÷ESP®warn-

ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®

only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.

When SPORT handling mode is activated:

RESP®only improves driving stability to a limi-

ted degree.

RTraction control is still activated.

REngine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin.

RESP®still provides support when you brake

firmly.

Characteristics when ESP®is deactivated

If ESP®is deactivated and one or more wheels

start to spin, the ÷ESP®warning lamp in the

instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-

tions, ESP®will not stabilize the vehicle.

If you deactivate ESP®:

RESP®no longer improves driving stability.

REngine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin.

RTraction control is still activated.

RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor

is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-

tance from ESP®.

RPRE-SAFE®is no longer available, nor is it

activated if you brake firmly and ESP®inter-

venes.

RPRE-SAFE®Brake is no longer available, it is

also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®

intervenes.

RESP®still provides support when you brake

firmly.

ESP®trailer stabilization

General information

ESP®trailer stabilization is not available in

Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to

swerve, ESP®assists you in this situation. ESP®

slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting

the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-

bination has stabilized.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If road and weather conditions are poor,

trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent

the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-

ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can

tip over before ESP®can detect this. There is

a risk of an accident.

Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-

ing road and weather conditions.

70 Driving safetysystems

Safety

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-

bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize

the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing

the brake firmly.

ESP®trailer stabilization is active above speeds

of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).

ESP®trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®

is deactivated or malfunctioning.

Crosswind Assist

General information

Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of

your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-

wind driving assistance function integrated in

ESP®noticeably reduces these impairments.

ESP®intervenes automatically according to the

direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect-

ing your vehicle.

ESP®intervenes with stabilizing braking to

assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.

Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds

above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight

ahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notes

Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP®is

switched off or deactivated because of a mal-

function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-

tion)

General information

EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure

on the rear wheels to improve driving stability

while braking.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

GWARNING

If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can

lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the

risk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style

to the different handling characteristics. Have

the brake system checked at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and

warning lamps (Ypage 244) as well as display

messages (Ypage 215).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and

offers increased braking comfort. In addition to

the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has

the HOLD function (Ypage 161) and hill start

assist (Ypage 127).

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic

function

General information

iObserve the important safety notes in the

"Driving safety systems" section (Ypage 64).

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

can help you to minimize the risk of a collision

with a vehicle in front or a pedestrian and reduce

the effects of such a collision. If the Active Brake

Assist with cross-traffic function detects a risk

of collision, you will be warned visually and

acoustically and, if necessary, your brake appli-

cation will be assisted according to the situa-

tion. If you do not react, the system can also

react by braking automatically. In the event of a

detected risk of collision due to crossing traffic,

you will also be visually and acoustically warned

as well as assisted by the brake boosting effect

according to the situation.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is

only available in vehicles with the Driving Assis-

tance Plus package.

For Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-

tion to assist you when driving, the radar sensor

system and the camera system must be opera-

tional.

If the radar sensor system or the camera system

is malfunctioning, Active Brake Assist with

cross-traffic function is restricted or no longer

available. The brake system is still available with

complete brake boosting effect and BAS.

The radar sensor system and camera system

help Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

tion to detect obstacles that are in the path of

your vehicle for an extended period of time.

In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-

cle can be detected.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

detects pedestrians using typical characteris-

tics such as body contours and the posture of a

person standing upright.

iObserve the restrictions described in the

"Important safety notes" section

(Ypage 72).

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

will initially brake your vehicle by a partial

application of the brakes if a danger of colli-

sion is detected. There may be a collision

unless you brake yourself. Even after subse-

quent full application of the brakes a collision

cannot always be avoided, particularly when

approaching at too high a speed. There is a

risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself and try to

take evasive action, provided it is safe to do

so.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,

the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full

braking pressure.

GWARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

cannot always clearly identify objects and

complex traffic situations.

In such cases, Active Brake Assist with cross-

traffic function might:

Rissue an unnecessary warning or engage

Rneither give a warning nor intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and be prepared to brake, especially

if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-

tion alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a

non-critical driving situation.

GWARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

cannot always clearly identify people, partic-

ularly if they are moving. Active Brake Assist

with cross-traffic function cannot intervene in

these cases. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and be prepared to brake, especially

if Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-

tion alerts you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance to

the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,

you must apply the brakes yourself.

GWARNING

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

does not react:

Rto small people, e.g. children

Rto animals

Rto oncoming vehicles

Rwhen cornering

As a result, Active Brake Assist with cross-

traffic function may not warn you or engage in

all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-

ognition can be impaired.

Recognition by the radar sensor system is also

impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rthere is interference by other radar sources

Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-

ple in parking garages

Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbike

Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line

Rvehicles moving quickly into the radar sensor

system detection range

72 Driving safetysystems

Safety

Recognition by thecamera system is also

impairedin theevent of:

Rdirt on thecamera or if thecamera is covered

Rglareon thecamera system, e.g. from thesun

beinglow in thesky

Rdarkness

Ror if:

-pedestriansmovequickly, e.g. intothepath

of thevehicle

-thecamera system no longer recognizes a

pedestrian as aperson due to special cloth-

ing or other objects

-apedestrian is concealed by other objects

-thetypical outlineof apedestrian is not

distinguishable from thebackground

Followingdamageto thefrontendof thevehicle,

havetheconfiguration and operation of the

radar sensorscheckedat aqualified specialist

workshop. This also appliesto collisionsat slow

speeds wherethere is no visible damageto the

frontof thevehicle.

Followingdamageto thewindshield, havethe

configuration and operation of thecamera sys-

temcheckedat aqualified specialist workshop.

Function

XTo activate or deactivate: activateor deac-

tivateActive Brake Assist withcross-traffic

function usingtheon-board computer

(Ypage 205).

If Active Brake Assist withcross-traffic func-

tion is deactivated, theæsymbol appears

on themultifunction display.

Starting at aspeedof around 4 mph (7 km/h),

this function warnsyou if you are rapidly

approaching a vehiclein front. An intermittent

warning tone will then soundand the·dis-

tance warning lamp will lightup in theinstru-

mentcluster.

XBrake immediately to defuse thesituation.

XTakeevasive action providedit is safeto do

so.

Active Brake Assist withcross-traffic function

can also brakethevehicleautomatically under

thefollowingconditions:

Rthedriver and frontpassenger havetheir seat

beltsfastened

Rthevehiclespeedis between approximately

4mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph

(70 km/h), Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic

function may react to:

Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,

e.g. stopped or parked vehicles

Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

iIf there is an increased risk of a collision,

preventive passenger protection measures

(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Ypage 58).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front

remains and you do not brake, take evasive

action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle

may perform automatic emergency braking, up

to the point of full brake application. Automatic

emergency braking is not performed until imme-

diately prior to an imminent accident.

If you apply the brake yourself in a critical sit-

uation or during autonomous braking, situation-

dependent braking assistance is implemented.

If necessary, this increases the brake pressure

up to full brake application.

To avoid a collision, Active Brake Assist with

cross-traffic function calculates the brake force

necessary if:

Ryou approach an obstacle, and

RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

has detected a risk of a collision

When driving at a speed under 20 mph

(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is

activated. The increase in brake pressure from

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function is

carried out at the last possible moment.

When driving at a speed above 20 mph

(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal

sharply, Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic

function automatically increases the brake pres-

sure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.

Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

provides braking assistance in hazardous situa-

tions with vehicles in front within a speed range

between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph

(250 km/h).

Driving safety systems 73

Safety

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph

(70 km/h) the Active Brake Assist with cross-

traffic function assists you with braking in haz-

ardous situations with:

Rstationary obstacles in the path of the vehicle,

e.g. stopped or parked vehicles

Rstationary pedestrians in the path of the vehi-

cle

Robstacles crossing your path that move in the

detection range of the sensors and are detec-

ted

XKeep the brake pedal depressed until the

emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

You can prevent the intervention of Active Brake

Assist with cross-traffic function at any time by:

Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.

Ractivating kickdown.

Rreleasing the brake pedal

The braking application of Active Brake Assist

with cross-traffic function is ended automati-

cally if:

Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.

Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.

Ran obstacle is no longer detected in front of

your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General information

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a

noticeable steering force to the steering wheel

in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.

This steering assistance is provided in particular

if:

Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a

wet or slippery road surface when you brake

Rthe vehicle begins to skid

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 64).

No steering support is provided from STEER

CONTROL, if:

RESP®is deactivated

RESP®is malfunctioning

Rthe steering is malfunctioning

If ESP®is malfunctioning, you will be assisted

further by the electrical power steering.

Protection against theft

Immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from

being started without the correct SmartKey.

XTo activate with the SmartKey: remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XTo activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-

tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off

and open the driver's door.

XTo deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone

can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been

left inside the vehicle.

iThe immobilizer is always deactivated when

you start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-

tem is not operational. Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or call

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

74 Protection against theft

Safety

XTo arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or

KEYLESS-GO.

Indicator lamp :flashes. The alarm system

is armed after approximately ten seconds.

XTo disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-

Key or KEYLESS-GO.

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function

or KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop but-

ton.

The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:

Ra door

Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key

Rthe trunk lid

Rthe hood

Rthe stowage compartment/telephone com-

partment under the armrest in vehicles with

automatic transmission

XTo stop the alarm with the SmartKey:

press the %or &button on the Smart-

Key.

The alarm is stopped.

XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function

or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-

ton from the ignition lock (Ypage 124).

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

The alarm is stopped.

XTo stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey

must be outside the vehicle.

The alarm is stopped.

XPress the Start/Stop button on the dash-

board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-

cle.

The alarm is stopped.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you close

the open door that triggered it, for example.

iIf the alarm continues for more than

30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-

tem automatically notifies the Customer

Assistance Center. This is done either by text

message or data connection.

The emergency call system sends a message

or establishes a data connection provided

that:

Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.

Rthe mbrace service has been activated

properly.

Rthe necessary mobile phone network is

available.

Protection against theft 75

Safety

SmartKey

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupt traffic.

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

GWARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-

tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could

cause the engine to be switched off. There is a

risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before

inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

!Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-

netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control

function could be affected.

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-

ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another SmartKey.

Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.

Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.

This can affect the functionality of the Smart-

Key.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do

not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-

ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be

detected, e.g. when starting the engine using

the Start/Stop button.

A brief radio connection between the vehicle

and the SmartKey determines whether a valid

SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the

vehicle. This occurs, for example:

Rwhen starting the engine

Rwhile driving

Rwhen the external door handles are touched

Rduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

:&Locks the vehicle

;FOpens the trunk lid

=%Unlocks the vehicle

XTo unlock centrally: press the %button.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-

imately 40 seconds of unlocking:

Rthe vehicle is locked again.

Rprotection against theft is reactivated.

XTo lock centrally: press the &button.

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the

following components:

Rthe doors

Rthe trunk lid

Rthe glove box

Rthe fuel filler flap

The turn signals flash once when unlocking and

three times when locking.

You can also set an audible signal to confirm

that the vehicle has been locked. The audible

signal can be activated and deactivated via the

76 SmartKey

Opening and closing

multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's

Manual.

You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-

firmation if all components were able to be

locked.

When the locator lighting is activated via the

multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark

after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey;

see the Digital Operator's Manual.

XTo open the trunk lid automatically from

outside the vehicle: press and hold the F

button until the trunk lid opens.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by

any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle (Ypage 125).

Locking/unlocking centrally

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the

SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-

tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-

tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using

KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the

&button on the SmartKey.

The driver's door and the door at which the han-

dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey

must be outside the vehicle. When locking or

unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance

between the SmartKey and the corresponding

door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

A brief radio connection between the vehicle

and the SmartKey determines whether a valid

SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the

vehicle. This occurs, for example:

Rwhen starting the engine

Rwhile driving

Rwhen the external door handles are touched

Rduring convenience closing

XTo unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-

face of the door handle.

XTo lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :

or ;.

Make sure that you do not touch the inner

surface of the door handle.

XConvenience closing feature: touch

recessed sensor surface ;for an extended

period.

Deactivating and activating

If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an

extended period of time, you can deactivate the

KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The

SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby

conserving battery power. For the purposes of

activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be

nearby.

XTo deactivate: press the &button on the

SmartKey twice in rapid succession.

The battery check lamp (Ypage 79) of the

SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up

once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

XTo activate: press any button on the Smart-

Key.

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features

are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by

any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle (Ypage 125).

SmartKey 77

Opening and closing

Changing the settings of the locking

system

You can change the settings of the locking sys-

tem. This means that only the driver's door and

the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle

is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel

alone.

XTo change the setting: press and hold down

the %and &buttons simultaneously

for approximately six seconds until the bat-

tery check lamp (Ypage 79) flashes twice.

If the setting of the locking system is changed

within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing

the &or %button:

Rlocks or

Runlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:

XTo unlock: press the %button once.

XTo unlock centrally: press the %button

twice.

XTo lock: press the &button.

XTo restore the factory settings: press and

hold the %and &buttons simultane-

ously for approximately six seconds until the

battery check lamp (Ypage 79) flashes

twice.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as

follows:

XTo unlock the driver's door: touch the inner

surface of the door handle on the driver's

door.

XTo unlock centrally: touch the inner surface

of the front-passenger door handle.

XTo lock centrally: touch the outer sensor

surface on one of the door handles.

Mechanical key

General notes

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or

unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,

use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-

tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm

(Ypage 74).

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical

key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-

matically.

XTo unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

XPush release catch :in the direction of the

arrow and at the same time remove mechan-

ical key ;from the SmartKey.

Further information on locking/unlocking the

driver's door (Ypage 83).

Inserting the mechanical key

XPush mechanical key ;completely into the

SmartKey until it engages and release

catch :is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-

ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in

severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal

injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If

a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention

immediately.

HEnvironmental note

Batteries contain dangerous

substances. It is against the

law to dispose of them with

78 SmartKey

Opening and closing

the household rubbish. They

must be collected separately

and recycled to protect the

environment.

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally friendly

manner. Take discharged

batteries to a qualified spe-

cialist workshop or a special

collection point for used bat-

teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling

and regard for the environment. National guide-

lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-

ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Checking the battery

XPress the &or %button.

The battery is working properly if battery

check lamp :lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if battery check

lamp :does not light up briefly.

XChange the battery (Ypage 79).

If the SmartKey battery is checked within the

signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing

the &or %button:

Rlocks or

Runlocks the vehicle

iYou can get a battery at any qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Replacing the battery

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

XTake the mechanical key out of the SmartKey

(Ypage 78).

XPress mechanical key ;into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-

tery compartment cover :opens. Do not

hold battery compartment cover :closed

while doing so.

XRemove battery compartment cover :.

XRepeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery =falls out.

XInsert the new battery with the positive ter-

minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to

do so.

XMake sure that the surface of the battery is

free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

XInsert the front tabs of battery compartment

cover :into the housing first and then press

to close it.

XInsert mechanical key ;into the SmartKey

(Ypage 78).

XCheck the function of all SmartKey buttons on

the vehicle.

SmartKey 79

Opening and closing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

You can no longer lock or

unlock the vehicle using

the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XCheck the SmartKey battery (Ypage 79) and replace it if necessary

(Ypage 79).

If this does not work:

XLock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 83).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

XLock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 83).

The SmartKey is faulty.

XLock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 83).

XHave the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or

unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

XReactivate KEYLESS-GO (Ypage 77).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XCheck the SmartKey battery (Ypage 79) and replace it if necessary

(Ypage 79).

If this does not work:

XLock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 83).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

XLock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 83).

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.

XLock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the

SmartKey.

XHave the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-

trol function:

XLock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 83).

XHave the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The engine cannot be

started using the Smart-

Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.

XSwitch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:

XCheck the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Ypage 303).

XJump-start the vehicle (Ypage 304).

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

80 SmartKey

Opening and closing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The engine cannot be

started using the Start/

Stop button. The Smart-

Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.

XUnlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XCheck the SmartKey battery (Ypage 79) and replace it if necessary

(Ypage 79).

If this does not work:

XStart your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

XStart your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-

Key.

XHave the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the

mechanical key.

XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupt traffic.

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside

When a door is opened, the side window on that

side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the

side window closes again.

!The side windows will not open/close if the

battery is discharged or if the side windows

have iced up. It will then not be possible to

close the door. Do not attempt to force the

door closed. You could otherwise damage the

door or the side window.

You can open a door from inside the vehicle

even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has been

locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO,

opening a door from the inside will trigger the

anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm

(Ypage 74).

Doors 81

Opening and closing

XPull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob :pops up.

The door is unlocked and opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle

from the inside. The switches are on the driver’s

door.

XTo unlock: press button :.

XTo lock: press button ;.

When the front-passenger door is closed, the

vehicle is locked.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or

the glove box.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the

inside if the vehicle has been locked with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

The doors can be opened from the inside.

If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey

or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the

inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

Switch off the alarm (Ypage 74).

If a locked door is opened from the inside, the

previous unlock status of the vehicle will be

taken into consideration if:

Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-

ton for the central locking, or

Rthe vehicle was locked automatically

The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-

ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's

door had been previously unlocked, only the

door which has been opened from the inside is

unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

XTo deactivate: press and hold button :for

approximately five seconds until a tone

sounds.

XTo activate: press and hold button ;for

approximately five seconds until a tone

sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do not

hear a tone, the relevant setting has already

been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when the

ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-

ing.

You could therefore be locked out if:

Rthe vehicle is being pushed

Rthe vehicle is being towed

Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer.

You can activate and deactivate the automatic

locking mechanism via the multimedia system

(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

82 Doors

Opening and closing

Locking/unlocking the driver's door

with the mechanical key

iIf you want to centrally lock the vehicle using

the mechanical key, begin by pressing the

locking button for the interior locking mech-

anism while the driver's door is open. Then

lock the driver's door using the mechanical

key.

XInsert the mechanical key into opening :in

the protective cap.

XPull and hold the door handle.

XPull the protective cap on the mechanical key

as straight as possible away from the vehicle

until it releases.

XRelease the door handle.

XTo lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as

far as it will go to position 1.

XTo unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-

clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-

tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm

(Ypage 74).

Trunk

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

gases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open when the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a

risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid

open.

GWARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or

not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-

den change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be

flung around. Secure objects, luggage or

loads against slipping or tipping before the

journey.

!The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient

clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be

found in the "Vehicle data" section

(Ypage 345).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You

could otherwise lock yourself out.

You should preferably place luggage or loads in

the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines

(Ypage 263).

Opening and closing manually

Opening

XPress the Fbutton on the SmartKey.

The trunk lid opens.

Trunk 83

Opening and closing

Closing

XPull the trunk lid down using recess :and

push it closed.

XLock the vehicle if necessary with the &

button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO

(Ypage 77).

Opening automatically from outside

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

gases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open when the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a

risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid

open.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be

found in the "Vehicle data" section

(Ypage 345).

Opening automatically

You can open the trunk lid automatically using

the SmartKey.

XPress and hold the Fbutton on the Smart-

Key until the trunk lid opens.

Opening automatically from inside

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

gases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open when the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a

risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid

open.

!The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient

clearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be

found in the "Vehicle data" section

(Ypage 345).

Opening

You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat

when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.

XPull remote operating switch :for the trunk

lid until the trunk lid opens.

Locking the trunk separately

You can lock the trunk separately. If you then

unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains

locked and cannot be opened.

84 Trunk

Opening and closing

XTo activate: close the trunk lid.

XOpen the glove box.

XSlide the switch to position 1.

If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk

remains locked.

iYou can also lock the glove box

(Ypage 264).

XTo deactivate: open the glove box.

XSlide the switch to position 2.

If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk

will also be unlocked.

Emergency release for the trunk

You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with

the emergency release button.

XPress emergency release button :briefly.

The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid

emergency release when the vehicle is station-

ary or while driving.

The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock

the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or

discharged.

Trunk lid emergency release light:

Remergency release button :flashes for

30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened

Remergency release button :flashes for

60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

GWARNING

While opening the side windows, body parts

could become trapped between the side win-

dow and the door frame as the side window

moves. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody touches the side win-

dow during the opening procedure. If some-

body becomes trapped, release the switch or

pull the switch to close the side window again.

GWARNING

While closing the side windows, body parts in

the closing area could become trapped. There

is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the

body are in the closing area. If somebody

becomes trapped, release the switch or press

the switch to open the side window again.

Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an auto-

matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks

or restricts a side window from traveling

upwards during the automatic closing process,

the side window opens again automatically. Dur-

ing the manual closing process, the side window

only opens again automatically after the corre-

sponding switch is released. The automatic

reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-

tute for your attention when closing a side win-

dow.

Side windows 85

Opening and closing

GWARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gers

Rwhile resetting

This means that the reversing feature cannot

prevent someone being trapped in these sit-

uations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close

proximity during the closing procedure. If

someone becomes trapped, press the switch

to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-

dows

The switches for the side windows are located

on the driver's door. There is also a switch for

the front-passenger side window on the front-

passenger door.

The switches on the driver's door take prece-

dence.

:Front left

;Front right

=Rear right

?Rear left

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock.

XTo open manually: press and hold the cor-

responding switch.

XTo open fully: press the switch beyond the

pressure point and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

XTo close manually: pull the corresponding

switch and hold it.

XTo close fully: pull the switch beyond the

pressure point and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

XTo interrupt automatic operation: press/

pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the pressure

point and release, automatic operation is star-

ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop

automatic operation by pressing/pulling the

switch again.

You can continue to operate the side windows

after you switch off the engine or remove the

SmartKey. This function is available for up to five

minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger

door is opened.

Opening and closing all side windows

Using the switch on the center console

GWARNING

While closing the side windows, body parts in

the closing area could become trapped. There

is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the

body are in the closing area. If somebody

becomes trapped, release the switch or press

the switch to open the side window again.

You can use button :to open or close all side

windows simultaneously.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock.

XTo open all side windows: press and hold

button :to the point of resistance.

86 Side windows

Opening and closing

XTo open all side windows fully: press

switch :beyond the pressure point.

XTo close all side windows: pull and hold

button :.

Using KEYLESS-GO

GWARNING

When using the convenience closing feature,

parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-

ing area when a side window is being closed.

There is a risk of injury.

Observe the complete closing procedure

when the convenience closing feature is oper-

ating. Make sure that no body parts are in

close proximity during the closing procedure.

The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. All

the doors must be closed.

XConvenience closing feature: touch

recessed sensor surface :on the door han-

dle until the side windows are fully closed.

iMake sure you only touch recessed sensor

surface :.

XTo interrupt convenience closing: release

recessed sensor surface :on the door han-

dle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,

you must reset it.

XClose all the doors.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock.

XClose the soft top (Ypage 89).

XPull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window is com-

pletely closed (Ypage 86).

XHold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

XImmediately pull the corresponding switch on

the door control panel until the side window is

completely closed (Ypage 86).

XHold the switch for an additional second.

XIf the respective side window remains closed

after the button is released, then it has been

set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the

steps above.

Problems with the side windows

GWARNING

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window

closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the

body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

Side windows 87

Opening and closing

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

A side window cannot be

closed because it is

blocked by objects, e.g.

leaves in the window

guide.

XRemove the objects.

XClose the side window.

A side window cannot be

closed and you cannot

see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again

slightly:

XImmediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch

again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again

slightly:

XImmediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch

again until the side window has closed.

The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing fea-

ture.

Soft top

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the

soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short

time. This causes the soft top to lower unex-

pectedly and may cause you or others to be

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Always open or close the soft top completely.

!Never sit on the soft-top compartment

cover or stow heavy objects there. You will

otherwise damage the soft top and soft-top

compartment cover of the vehicle.

!When opening and closing the soft top,

make sure that:

Rthere is sufficient clearance above it, as the

soft top swings upwards.

Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the trunk

partition.

Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by the

load.

Rthe trunk lid is closed.

Rthere are no objects on the soft-top com-

partment cover

Rthe fabric is not dirty, wet or frozen.

You could otherwise damage the soft top,

trunk and other parts of the vehicle.

Take the height of the vehicle into account when

opening and closing the soft top (Ypage 345).

Make sure that the soft top is dry and clean

before opening it. Otherwise, water or dirt could

enter the vehicle interior or trunk.

You can open or close the soft top:

Rwhen the vehicle is stationary or

Rwhen you are not exceeding a speed of

30 mph (50 km/h) (Max. 35 mph (60 km/h),

to avoid interrupting the closing process while

slightly exceeding the speed limit).

If there is a strong head wind, it may not be pos-

sible to close the soft top fully. In this case,

reduce speed or stop in order to close the soft

top fully.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only open or close the soft top

when the vehicle is stationary.

88 Soft top

Opening and closing

If the soft top does not open or close fully, the

soft-top hydraulics are depressurized and the

soft top is lowered:

Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the igni-

tion is switched on

Rafter about

20 seconds if the ignition is switched off

Opening/closing with the soft top

switch

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When opening or closing the soft top, there is

a risk that parts of the body could become

trapped by moving parts such as the roof

mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-

dows. There is a risk of injury.

When opening or closing the roof, make sure

that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of

moving parts. Release the switch if somebody

becomes trapped.

GWARNING

If the vehicle speed exceeds 35 mph

(60 km/h), the soft top stops during the open-

ing or closing process. This impairs your view

to the rear. There is a risk of an accident.

Reduce your speed to below 35 mph

(60 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance

with the traffic conditions. Press or pull the

soft-top switch again in order to open or close

the soft top fully.

Opening and closing

XMake sure that the trunk partition is closed

(Ypage 90).

XClose the trunk lid.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock.

XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.

XTo open: pull and hold soft top switch :until

the entire soft top is stowed away in the trunk.

The multifunction display shows the opening

process of the soft top.

If, when opening, you drive at speeds above

35 mph (60 km/h), the opening process is

stopped. The Open/Close Convertible

Top Completely message is shown in the

multifunction display. In order to open the

soft top fully, reduce your speed again to

below 35 mph (60 km/h) and pull the soft-top

switch again.

XTo close: pull and hold soft top switch :until

the soft top is completely closed.

The multifunction display shows the closing

process of the soft top.

If, when closing, you drive at speeds above

35 mph (60 km/h), the closing process is

stopped. The Open/Close Convertible

Top Completely message is shown on the

multifunction display. In order to close the

soft top fully, reduce your speed again to

below 35 mph (60 km/h) and press the soft-

top switch again.

Opening/closing using the SmartKey

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When opening or closing the soft top, there is

a risk that parts of the body could become

trapped by moving parts such as the roof

mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-

dows. There is a risk of injury.

When opening or closing the roof, make sure

that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of

Soft top 89

Opening and closing

moving parts. Release the switch if somebody

becomes trapped.

Opening and closing

The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the

vehicle.

XClose the trunk partition (Ypage 90).

Otherwise only the side windows open.

XTo open: press and hold the %button in

the SmartKey until the soft top is completely

open.

The multifunction display shows the opening

process of the soft top. The seat ventilation is

switched on.

XTo close: press and hold the &button in

the SmartKey until the soft top is completely

closed.

The multifunction display shows the closing

process of the soft top.

Relocking the soft top

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the

soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short

time. This causes the soft top to lower unex-

pectedly and may cause you or others to be

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Always open or close the soft top completely.

The soft top is not locked if:

RtheOpen/Close Convertible Top Com‐

pletely message is shown in the multifunc-

tion display

Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten seconds

when pulling away or while driving

Locking

You can lock the soft top again if it is not locked

fully.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon

as possible, paying attention to road and traf-

fic conditions.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock.

XPress the soft-top switch (Ypage 89).

Trunk partition

General notes

The trunk partition can be used to cover luggage

and loads in the trunk.

The soft top can be opened only when the man-

ual trunk partition is closed. In vehicles with a

partially electrical trunk partition, this automat-

ically closes when the soft top is opened.

!In order to avoid damaging the soft top or

stowed loads, please adhere to the following

while the soft top is open:

Rwhen the trunk partition is open, do not

place any objects in or behind the net on

the side that are too long. These objects

could obstruct the trunk partition or cause

damage to the open soft top.

Rmake sure that the cargo does not push the

trunk partition upwards.

Opening and closing

Depending on the vehicle equipment, your vehi-

cle is installed with a partially electrical or a

manual trunk partition.

90 Soft top

Opening and closing

To open:

XAll vehicles: push trunk partition ;using

the handle against the direction of the arrow

to its upper end position.

To close:

XVehicles with a partially electrical trunk

partition: press button :.

Trunk partition ;closes automatically.

iIf the system fails, the partially electrical

trunk partition can be closed manually.

XVehicles with a manual trunk partition:

pull trunk partition ;by the handle in the

direction of the arrow until it rests on the

sides of the trunk.

AIRCAP

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When retracting the AIRCAP, persons could

become caught in the moving mechanism.

There is a risk of injury.

Ensure that persons do not hold onto the

upper frame of the windshield and do not

touch the AIRCAP wind deflector.

With AIRCAP, four people can travel comfortably

with the soft top open. AIRCAP reduces the draft

for the driver and passengers in both the front

and the rear compartment in a vehicle with the

soft top down.

In particularly turbulent air, e.g. when following

a vehicle or in a crosswind, AIRCAP's effect may

be reduced.

AIRCAP has the following components:

Ra wind deflector above the windshield

Ra wind screen behind the two rear-seat head

restraints

When AIRCAP has been activated, the wind

screen extends up between the two rear-seat

head restraints. At the same time, the wind

deflector extends out along the front wind-

shield.

AIRCAP can be activated or deactivated up to

speeds of approximately 100 mph (160 km/h).

Activating and deactivating AIRCAP

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock.

XTo activate: pull switch :.

The wind screen behind the rear-seat headr-

ests and the wind deflector in the roof frame

extend simultaneously. The indicator lamp in

switch :lights up.

XTo deactivate: press switch :.

The wind screen behind the rear-seat headr-

ests and the wind deflector in the roof frame

retract simultaneously. The indicator lamp in

switch :goes out.

If you park your vehicle with the soft top down

and remove the SmartKey, the wind deflector

and the wind screen retract automatically.

When you restart your engine after having been

parked, the wind deflector and the wind screen

extend again automatically.

AIRCAP cannot be extended or retracted if the

vehicle speed exceeds approximately 100 mph

(160 km/h).

Folding wind screen

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you use the wind screen in darkness or in

other conditions offering poor visibility, your

view to the rear is further impaired. There is a

risk of an accident.

Only use the wind screen when visibility con-

ditions are good.

Soft top 91

Opening and closing

GWARNING

If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it

could detach itself during a journey and

endanger other road users. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

Install the wind screen as described.

!Install or remove the wind screen only when

the soft top is open. You could otherwise

damage the wind screen or the vehicle inte-

rior.

!Observe the backrest position of the front

seats if the wind screen is installed, since the

backrest could collide with the wind screen

here.

!Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only

use wind screens which have been tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This

helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.

The folding wind screen protects against wind

when driving with the soft top open. It is secured

above the rear bench seats. For this reason, only

the driver and the front passenger can travel in

the vehicle when the folding wind screen is

installed.

The folding wind screen can be installed or

removed from the driver's side or passenger

side.

For operations involving the folding wind screen,

it is preferable to be positioned on the side of the

vehicle facing away from the traffic, after stop-

ping the vehicle in accordance with the traffic

conditions.

Installing/removing the folding wind

screen

Installing

The folding wind screen is stowed in a bag. The

bag is attached with a lashing strap to the

through-loading facility behind the rear seats.

If you wish to use the through-loading facility,

loosen the lashing strap attached to the

through-loading facility and stow the folding

wind screen in the trunk. Use the lashing strap

to fasten the bag to one of the luggage hooks in

the trunk.

XOpen all side windows and the soft top.

XFold the rear seats forward (Ypage 265) and

remove the bag containing the folding wind

screen.

XRemove the folding wind screen from the bag.

XFold out folding wind screen :as shown.

XFold out the two brackets ;to the left and

right.

XAlign brackets ;of folding wind screen :

with both rear fixtures =on the vehicle.

92 Soft top

Opening and closing

Perform the following steps in sequence on both

sides of the vehicle:

XPull the handle ?in the direction of the

arrow.

XAlign folding wind screen :with side fixture

Aon the vehicle from above and insert.

XPush handle ?on folding wind screen :

back as far as it will go.

Folding wind screen :is locked.

Removing

XPull handles ?on the left and right one after

the other and slide folding wind screen :out

of fixture Afrom above.

Folding wind screen :is unlocked.

XPull folding wind screen :out of both rear

fixtures =.

XFold in both brackets ;on folding wind

screen :.

XFold folding wind screen :together and

stow it in the bag.

XUse the lashing strap to attach the bag con-

taining the folding wind screen to the through-

loading facility behind the rear seats.

Problems with the soft top

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The soft top will not open

or close.

The ignition is not switched on.

XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

The trunk lid is open.

XClose the trunk lid (Ypage 83).

The trunk partition is not closed.

XClose the trunk partition (Ypage 90).

The roll bars have been deployed.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. The

soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safety reasons.

You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten

minutes.

XSwitch off the ignition and turn it back on.

XRepeat the opening or closing procedure.

Soft top 93

Opening and closing

Correct driver's seat position

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steering

wheel :, seat belt ;and driver's seat =:

Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as

possible

Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position

Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion

Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you

can depress the pedals properly

Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level

by the center of the head restraint

Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent

Ryou can move your legs freely

Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument

cluster clearly

Ryou should have a good overview of traffic

conditions

Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body

and is routed across the center of your shoul-

der and across your hips in the pelvic area

Further related subjects:

RAdjusting the seats electrically (Ypage 96).

RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically

(Ypage 101).

RFastening the seat belt correctly (Ypage 47).

RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior

mirrors (Ypage 103).

RStoring the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir-

ror and head-up display settings with the

memory function (Ypage 106).

Seats

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust

the seats, particularly when unattended.

There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

GWARNING

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle

occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the

seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one

has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"

(Ypage 49) and "Children in the Vehicle"

(Ypage 59).

GWARNING

If the head restraints are not installed or not

adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-

tection as intended. There is an increased risk

of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the

event of an accident or when braking.

94 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Always drive with the head restraints instal-

led. Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head

restraint supports the back of the head at

about eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and

rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the

height and angle of the head restraints cor-

rectly.

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the

head restraint so that it is as close as possible to

your head.

GWARNING

If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could

move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in

motion. This could cause you to lose control of

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Always make sure that the driver's seat is

engaged before starting the vehicle.

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

GWARNING

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or

other vehicle occupants could be trapped and

thereby injured. Children in particular could

accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-

ment buttons and become trapped. There is a

risk of injury.

While moving the seats, make sure that your

hands or other body parts do not get under the

lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-

tem.

GWARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level

of protection if you have not moved the back-

rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could

slide underneath the seat belt and sustain

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the backrest

is in an almost vertical position and that the

shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder.

!To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information:

Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as

soon as possible.

Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-

ing should also not be used to dry the seats.

Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see "Interior care".

Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.

Do not place sharp objects on the seat

cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The

seats should only be occupied by passen-

gers, if possible.

Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulating materi-

als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,

child seats or booster seats.

!Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell under or behind the seats when mov-

ing the seats back. There is a risk that the

seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

iFor more information, contact a qualified

specialist workshop.

iRelated topic:

RRear bench seat through-loading feature

(Ypage 265)

Seats 95

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the seats electrically

:Headrestraintheight

;Backrest angle

=Seat height

?Seat cushion length

ASeat cushion angle

BSeat fore-and-aftadjustment

iFurther relatedsubjects:

RYou can store theseat settingsusingthe

memory function (Ypage 106).

RIf PRE-SAFE®is triggered,thefront-

passenger seat will be moved to abetter

position if it was previously in an unfavora-

ble position (Ypage 58).

RWhen theseat is moved forward or back,

theheadrestis moved up or down auto-

matically.

Vehicles withAMGPerformance seat:theheight

of thehead restraints cannotbe adjusted.

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicleif you do

thefollowingwhile driving:

Radjust thedriver's seat,head restraint,

steering wheelor mirrors

Rfastentheseat belt

There is ariskof an accident.

Adjustthedriver's seat,head restraint, steer-

ing wheeland mirror and fastenyour seat belt

before starting theengine.

GWARNING

If thehead restraints are notinstalled or not

adjusted correctly, they cannotprovidepro-

tection as intended. There is an increased risk

of injury in thehead and neck area, e.g. in the

event of an accidentor when braking.

Always drive withthehead restraints instal-

led. Beforedrivingoff,makesurefor every

vehicleoccupant that thecenter of thehead

restraintsupportsthebackof thehead at

about eye level.

General notes

Pay attention to theimportant safetynotes

(Ypage 94).

Do notrotate thehead restraints of thefrontand

rear seats. Otherwise,you cannotadjust the

height and angle of thehead restraints to the

correctposition.

The rear seat head restraints are notheight-

adjustable.

Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-

aft position manually

Withthis function you can adjust thedistance

between thehead restraintand thebackof the

seat occupant's head.

XTo moveforward: pull thehead restraint

forward in thedirection of thearrow until it

engagesin thedesired position.

XTo moveback:press and hold therelease

catch :.

XPush thehead restraintback.

96 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

XReleasetherelease buttononce thehead

restraintis in thedesired position.

XEnsurethat thehead restrainthas engaged

properly.

Using thefore-and-aftadjustment, adjust the

head restraintso that it is as close as possibleto

your head.

Adjusting the height of the head

restraints electrically

XTo adjust theheadrestraintheight:slide

theswitch for thehead restraintadjustment

(Ypage 96) up or down in thedirection of the

arrow.

Vehicles withAMGPerformance seat:theheight

of thehead restraints cannotbe adjusted.

Installing and removing rear head

restraints

XReleasetherear seat backrest and foldit

slightly forward (Ypage 265).

XTo remove: press thecatch :in thedirec-

tion of thearrow and keep depressed.

XRemove thehead restraintfrom theguides

and release thecatch :.

XTo install:insert thehead restraintintothe

guide so that thenotches on thebar appear

on theleft-handside when viewed in the

direction of travel.

XPush thehead restraintall theway down until

it engages.

XEnsurethat thehead restrainthas engaged

properly.

XFold backtherear backrest until it engages.

Folding the front seat backrests

forward/back

Important safety notes

GWARNING

The seat belt does notoffer theintended level

of protection if you havenotmoved theback-

restto an almost vertical position.When brak-

ing or in theevent of an accident, you could

slideunderneaththeseat belt and sustain

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased riskof injury or evenfatal

injury.

Adjusttheseat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensurethat thebackrest

is in an almost vertical position and that the

shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

across thecenter of your shoulder.

GWARNING

When you adjust aseat,you or other vehicle

occupantscould become trapped,e.g. on the

seat guide rail. There is ariskof injury.

Makesurewhen adjusting aseat that no one

has any body partsin thesweepof theseat.

Observethesafetynoteson "Airbags"

(Ypage 49)and "Children in thevehicle"

(Ypage 59).

Folding the seat backrest forward

EASY-ENTRY System:theseat moves forwards

as soonas you foldthebackrest forwards and

pull theseat forwards horizontally. This makes it

easierfor passengersto get intoand out of the

rear compartment.

Seats 97

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

The head restraint also lowers on vehicles with

electric seat adjustment.

XPull the seat release handle :and fold the

backrest forwards as far as it will go.

The seat moves automatically to the foremost

position.

Folding the seat backrest back

XSwing back the seat backrest.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this

will be shown in the multifunction display in

the instrument cluster. A warning tone also

sounds.

The seat moves automatically to the stored

position.

If the previous position can no longer be set, e.g.

because of luggage in the rear-compartment

footwell or after occupants have entered the

rear-compartment:

XPull seat release handle :again and return

the seat backrest to an upright position.

The seat locks in the new seat fore-and-aft

adjustment position.

GWARNING

If the backrest is not engaged, it could fold

forwards during a braking maneuver or in the

event of an accident, for example. The seat

backrest will then push the vehicle occupant

against the seat belt. The seat belt can no

longer offer the intended level of protection

and could even cause injuries. There is an

increased risk of injury.

Before each journey, make sure that the back-

rest engages fully as described.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

:Raises the backrest contour

;Softens the backrest contour

=Lowers the backrest contour

?Hardens the backrest contour

You can adjust the contour of the front seat

backrests individually to provide optimum sup-

port for your back.

Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat

To adjust the contour of the seat and for

improved lateral support, you can individually

adjust the front seats.

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush-

ion

XTo set narrower: press button :.

XTo set wider: press button ;.

To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-

rest

XTo set narrower: press button =.

XTo set wider: press button ?.

98 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

GWARNING

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can

cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to

become very hot. The health of persons with

limited temperature sensitivity or a limited

ability to react to high temperatures may be

affected or they may even suffer burn-like

injuries. There is a risk of injury.

Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on

repeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-

cate the heating level you have selected.

The system automatically switches down from

level 3to level 2after approximately eight

minutes.

The system automatically switches down from

level 2to level 1after approximately ten

minutes.

The system automatically switches off approx-

imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XTo switch on: press button :repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.

XTo switch off: press button :repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

iIf the battery voltage is too low, the seat

heating may switch off.

iIf drive program Eis selected, the power of

the seat heating is reduced.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

The blue indicator lamps in the button indicate

the ventilation level you have selected.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XTo switch on: press button :repeatedly

until the desired ventilation level is set.

XTo switch off: press button :repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

iIf the battery voltage is too low, the seat

ventilation may switch off.

iYou can open the side windows and the soft

top with the SmartKey (Ypage 90). The seat

ventilation of the driver's seat automatically

switches to the highest level.

iWhen the vehicle is stationary, the fan

speed can be reduced automatically. This

reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Seats 99

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Problems with the seat heating / seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The seat heating or seat

ventilation has switched

off prematurely or can-

not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-

ers are switched on.

XSwitch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the

rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat

ventilation can be switched back on manually.

AIRSCARF

Switching on/off

GWARNING

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air

can flow from the vents in the head restraints.

This could result in burns in the immediate

vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.

Reduce the heater output before it becomes

too hot.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head and

neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.

The warm air flows out of the holes in the head

restraints.

The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-

cate the heating level you have selected.

XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position 1

or 2in the ignition lock.

XTo switch on: press button :.

Three red indicator lamps in the button light

up. The blower starts up after a preheating

phase of seven seconds.

XPress button :repeatedly until the desired

heating level is set.

XTo switch off: press button :repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

Adjust the height of the current of air blown out

according to your height while adjusting the

height of the head restraint.

Make sure that there are no objects covering the

intake grille on the back of the driver's seat head

restraint.

iThe blower continues running for seven sec-

onds to cool down the heating elements.

iIf the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF

may switch off.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

GWARNING

Children could injure themselves if they

adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of

injury.

100 Steering wheel

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can

still be adjusted when there is no key in the igni-

tion lock.

Adjusts the steering wheel electri-

cally

:Adjusts the steering wheel height

;Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

iFurther related subjects:

REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Ypage 101)

RStoring settings (Ypage 106)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-

tion of arrow :or ;.

Indicator lamp =lights up or goes out.

If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheel

heating is deactivated.

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The steering wheel heat-

ing has switched off pre-

maturely or cannot be

switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-

ers are switched on.

XSwitch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the

rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts

the steering wheel, you and other vehicle

occupants – particularly children – could

become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-

ing adjustments, make sure that no one has

any body parts in the sweep of the steering

wheel.

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if

there is a risk of entrapment by the steering

wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Steering wheel 101

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

You can stop the adjustment process by press-

ing one of the memory function's position but-

tons. This function is only available on vehicles

with memory function.

GWARNING

If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-

ture, they can become trapped, particularly

when unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

GWARNING

If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT

feature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Always wait until the adjustment process is

complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in

and out of your vehicle easier.

You can activate and deactivate the EASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-

tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual)

Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active

The steering wheel swings up when you:

Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

Rwith KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start

function: open the driver's door; the voltage

supply must be switched on

Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door;

the SmartKey must be in position gor 1in

the ignition lock (Ypage 123)

Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is

switched off

iThe steering wheel only tilts up if the driving

position is stored after the steering column

adjustment has been adjusted (Ypage 106).

The most recent driving position of the steering

wheel is stored if:

Rthe ignition is switched off

Rthe setting is stored using the memory func-

tion (Ypage 106)

iThe steering wheel only moves up if it has

not already reached the upper steering lim-

iter.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing

The steering wheel is moved to the last selected

position when:

Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock

Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition

is switched on

Ryou press the Start/Stop button once in vehi-

cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO

start function

iThe steering wheel only returns to the last

set position if the driving position is stored

after the seat or steering column has been

adjusted (Ypage 106).

The most recent driving position of the steering

wheel is stored if:

Rthe ignition is switched off

Rthe setting is stored using the memory func-

tion (Ypage 106)

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-

gered in an accident, the steering column will

move up when the driver's door is opened or the

SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This

makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the

occupants.

The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is

operational only if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-

ture is activated in the multimedia system (see

Digital Operator's Manual).

102 Steering wheel

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

GWARNING

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side reduces the size of the image. Visible

objects are actually closer than they appear.

This means that you could misjudge the dis-

tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.

when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

For this reason, always make sure of the

actual distance from the road users traveling

behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XExterior mirror on the front-passenger side:

press button ;.

Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-

ton =.

The indicator lamp lights up in the button that

has been pressed.

The indicator lamp goes out again after some

time. You can adjust the selected exterior

mirror using button :as long as the indicator

lamp is lit.

XPress button :up, down, or to the left or

right until you have adjusted the exterior mir-

ror to the correct position. You should have a

good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field

of vision.

After the engine has been started, the exterior

mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-

dow defroster is switched on and the outside

temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XBriefly press :.

Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

iMake sure that the exterior mirrors are

always folded out fully while driving. They

could otherwise vibrate.

iIf you are driving faster than 30 mph

(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-

rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-

pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be

reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not

fold in if you have activated the Automatic

Mirrors 103

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Mirror Folding function in the multimedia

system.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XBriefly press :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

automatically

When the Automatic Mirror Folding func-

tion is activated in the multimedia system (see

Digital Operator's Manual):

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.

Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-

cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

iIf the exterior mirrors have been folded in

manually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of

position, proceed as follows:

XVehicles without electrically folding exte-

rior mirrors: manually move the exterior mir-

ror into the correct position.

XVehicles with electrically folding exterior

mirrors: press and hold button :until you

hear a click and then the mirror engaging in

position (Ypage 103).

The mirror housing is engaged again and you

can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual

(Ypage 103).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

GWARNING

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-

matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte

is harmful and causes irritation. It must not

come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-

piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the electrolyte,

observe the following:

RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin

immediately with water.

RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of

your eyes thoroughly with clean water.

RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not

induce vomiting.

RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your

skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with electrolyte.

RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the

rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glare

mode if:

Rthe ignition is switched on

Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-

sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if

reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting

is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-

ror on the front-passenger side

Storing the parking position

You can set the front-passenger side exterior

mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on

that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.

You can store this position.

104 Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Storing using reverse gear

:Memory button M

;Button for the exterior mirror setting

=Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror

?Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

XStart the engine.

XPress button =.

XEngage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the preset parking position.

XUse button ;to adjust the exterior mirror to

a position that allows you to see the rear

wheel and the curb.

The parking position is stored.

iIf you shift the transmission to another posi-

tion, the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side returns to the driving position.

Saving using the memory button

You can store the parking position of the exte-

rior mirror on the front-passenger side using

memory button M:. The reverse gear must not

be engaged.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress button =.

XUse button ;to adjust the exterior mirror to

a position that allows you to see the rear

wheel and the curb.

XPress memory button M:and one of the

arrows on button ;within three seconds.

The parking position is stored if the exterior

mirror does not move.

XIf the mirror moves out of position, repeat the

steps.

XAfter successfully storing, reset the driving

position of the exterior mirror.

Calling up a stored parking position set-

ting

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XAdjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side using button =.

XEngage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side

moves back to its original position:

Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)

Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged

reverse gear

Rwhen you use button ?to select the exterior

mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you use the memory function on the driver's

side while driving, you could lose control of

the vehicle as a result of the adjustments

being made. There is a risk of an accident.

Only use the memory function on the driver's

side when the vehicle is stationary.

GWARNING

When the memory function adjusts the seat or

steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-

pants – particularly children – could become

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the memory function is making adjust-

ments, make sure that no one has any body

parts in the sweep of the seat or steering

wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-

diately release the memory function position

button. The adjustment process is stopped.

GWARNING

Children could become trapped if they acti-

vate the memory function, particularly when

unattended. There is a risk of injury.

Memory function 105

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,

e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-

tion lock.

Storing settings

With the memory function, you can store up to

three different settings, e.g. for three different

people.

The following settings are stored as a single

memory preset:

Rposition of the seat, backrest and head

restraint

Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors

on the driver's and front-passenger sides

Rposition of the head-up display

XAdjust the seat accordingly (Ypage 96).

XOn the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel

(Ypage 101) and the exterior mirrors

(Ypage 103).

XPress memory button Mand then press one of

the memory position buttons 1,2or 3within

three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected preset

position. A tone sounds when the settings

have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

XPress and hold the relevant memory position

button 1,2or 3until the following compo-

nents are in the saved position:

RSeat

RSteering wheel

RExterior mirrors

iIf you release the memory position switch,

the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting

functions stop immediately. The head-up dis-

play continues to be adjusted.

106 Memory function

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Exterior lighting

General notes

USA only: if you wish to drive during the daytime

without lights, switch off the Daytime Run‐

ning Lights function via the on-board com-

puter (Ypage 207).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options

Exterior lighting can be set using the:

Rlight switch (Ypage 107)

Rcombination switch (Ypage 108)

Ron-board computer (Ypage 207)

Light switch

Operation

1WLeft-hand standing lamps

2XRight-hand standing lamps

3TParking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting

4ÃAutomatic headlamp mode, controlled

by the light sensor

5LLow-beam/high-beam headlamps

BRRear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the

vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

XTurn the light switch to the Ãposition.

The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-

ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:

Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in

position u

Automatic headlamp mode

GWARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-

beam headlamps may not be switched on

automatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weather

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an

accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-

ing at all times.

Ãis the favored light switch setting.

The light setting is automatically selected

according to the brightness of the ambient light,

but not in the event of poor visibility due to

weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.

RWith the SmartKey in position 1in the igni-

tion lock, the parking lamps are switched on

or off automatically depending on the bright-

ness of the ambient light.

RUSA only: if you have switched on the Day‐

time Running Lights function via the on-

board computer, and the engine is running,

the daytime running lamps or the parking

lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched

on or off automatically depending on the

ambient light.

RCanada only: depending on the ambient light,

the daytime running lamps or the parking and

low-beam headlamps are switched on/off

automatically when the engine is running.

XTo switch on the automatic headlamps:

turn the light switch to the Ãposition.

USA only: The daytime running lamps improve

the visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here,

the Daytime Running Lights function must

be switched on via the on-board computer

(Ypage 207).

If the engine is running and you turn the light

switch to the Tor Lposition, the manual

settings take precedence over the daytime run-

ning lamps.

Canada only: The daytime running lamps

improve the visibility of your vehicle during the

day. The daytime running lamps function is

required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore

be deactivated.

Exterior lighting 107

Lights and windshield wipers

When the engine is running and the vehicle is

stationary: if you move the selector lever from a

driving position to P, the daytime running lamps

and low-beam headlamps go out after three

minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-

tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the

light switch to the Tposition, the daytime

running lamps and parking lamps switch on.

If the engine is running and you turn the light

switch to the Lposition, the manual settings

take precedence over the daytime running

lamps.

Low-beam headlamps

GWARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-

beam headlamps may not be switched on

automatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weather

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an

accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is

dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-

lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on

and the light switch is set to the Lposition.

This is a particularly useful function in the event

of rain and fog.

XTo switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock or start the engine.

XTurn the light switch to the Lposition.

The green Lindicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your

vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick

fog. You must observe the legal requirements

for the country in which you are currently driving

when operating the rear fog lamp.

XTo switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or

start the engine.

XTurn the light switch to the Lor Ã

position.

XPress the Rbutton.

The yellow Rindicator lamp on the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps

!If the battery charge is very low, the parking

lamps or standing lamps are automatically

switched off to enable the next engine start.

Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit

area, in accordance with the relevant legal

stipulations. Avoid using the Tparking

lamps over a period of several hours. If pos-

sible, switch on the right-hand Xor left-

hand Wstanding lamps.

XTo switch on the parking lamps: turn the

light switch to the Tposition.

The green Tindicator lamp on the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the

corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

XTo switch on the standing lamps: turn the

SmartKey to position uin the ignition lock or

remove the SmartKey.

XTurn the light switch to the W(left-hand

side of the vehicle) or X(right-hand side of

the vehicle) position.

Combination switch

:High-beam headlamps

;Turn signal, right

108 Exterior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

=High-beam flasher

?Turn signal, left

XTo indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in the

direction of arrow ;or ?.

The corresponding turn signal flashes three

times.

XTo indicate: press the combination switch

beyond the pressure point in the direction of

arrow ;or ?.

XTo switch on the high-beam headlamps:

turn the light switch to the Lor Ã

position.

XPress the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

In the Ãposition, the high-beam head-

lamps are switched on only when it is dark and

the engine is running.

The blue Kindicator lamp on the instru-

ment cluster lights up when the high-beam

headlamps are switched on.

XTo switch off the high-beam headlamps:

move the combination switch back to its nor-

mal position.

The blue Kindicator lamp on the instru-

ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it auto-

matically controls activation and deactivation of

the high-beam headlamps (Ypage 109).

XHigh-beam flasher: pull the combination

switch in the direction of arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps

XTo switch the hazard warning lamps on or

off: press button :.

The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard

warning lamps are switched on. If you now

switch on a turn signal lamp using the com-

bination switch, only the turn signal lamp on

the corresponding side of the vehicle will

flash.

The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-

cally if an air bag is deployed.

The hazard warning lamps still operate if the

ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-

mination of the road over a wide angle in the

direction you are turning, enabling better visi-

bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be

activated when the low-beam headlamps are

switched on.

Active:

Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph

(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or

turn the steering wheel

Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph

(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn

the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short

time, but is automatically switched off after no

more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the headlamps

to change between low beam and high beam

automatically. The system recognizes vehicles

with their lights on, either approaching from the

opposite direction or traveling in front of your

vehicle, and consequently switches the head-

lamps from high beam to low beam.

The system automatically adapts the low-beam

headlamp range depending on the distance to

the other vehicle. Once the system no longer

detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the

high-beam headlamps.

The system's optical sensor is located behind

the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Exterior lighting 109

Lights and windshield wipers

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does notrecognize

road users:

Rwho have no lights,e.g. pedestrians

Rwho havepoor lighting,e.g. cyclists

Rwhoselighting is blocked, e.g. by abarrier

On veryrareoccasions, Adaptive Highbeam

Assist may fail to recognize other road users

that have lights,or may recognize them too

late. In this, or in similar situations, theauto-

matic high-beam headlamps will notbe deac-

tivated or will be activated regardless.Thereis

ariskof an accident.

Always carefully observethetraffic conditions

and switch off thehigh-beam headlamps in

goodtime.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannottakeinto

accountroad,weather or traffic conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are

responsible for adjusting thevehicle's lighting

to theprevailing light, visibilityand traffic con-

ditions.

In particular, thedetection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy

rain or snow

Rthere is dirt on thesensorsor anythingelse

covering thesensors

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist

on/off

XTo switch on: turnthelightswitch to the

Ãposition.

XPress thecombination switch forwards

beyondthepressurepoint (Ypage 108).

The _indicator lamp on themultifunction

display lights up when it is dark and thelight

sensor switches on thelow-beam headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds aboveapprox-

imately 16 mph (25 km/h):

The headlamp range is set automatically

depending on the distance between the vehi-

cle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above approx-

imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road

users are detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched on

automatically. The Kindicator lamp on the

instrument cluster also lights up.

If you are driving at speeds below approx-

imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users

are detected or the roads are adequately lit:

The high-beam headlamps are switched off

automatically. The Kindicator lamp on the

instrument cluster goes out. The _indi-

cator lamp on the multifunction display

remains lit.

XTo switch off: move the combination switch

back to its normal position or move the light

switch to another position.

The Kindicator lamp on the instrument

cluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may

cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This

moisture does not affect the functionality of the

headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

:pLeft-hand front reading lamp

;cFront interior lighting

=|Automatic interior lighting control

?pRight-hand front reading lamp

110 Interior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

Interior lighting control

General notes

In order to preventthevehicle's battery from

discharging,theinteriorlighting functionsare

automatically deactivated after sometime

except for when theSmartKey is in position 2

in theignition lock.

The color and brightness of theambientlighting

are set usingthemultimedia system (see Digital

Operator's Manual).

Automatic interior lighting control

XTo switch on or off:press the|button.

When theautomatic interiorlighting control is

activated, thebuttonis flushwiththeover-

head control panel.

The interiorlighting automatically switches on if

you:

Runlock thevehicle

Ropen adoor

Rremove theSmartKey from theignition lock

The interiorlighting is switched on for aset time

when theSmartKey is removedfrom theignition

lock. This delayedswitch-off can be adjusted via

themultimedia system (see Digital Operator's

Manual).

Replacing bulbs

General notes

The frontand rear lightclusters of your vehicle

are equipped withLEDlightbulbs.Do not

replace theLEDlightsourcesof your vehicle

yourself.Contact a qualified specialist work-

shopwhichhas thenecessaryspecialist knowl-

edge and tools to carry out theworkrequired.

Lamps are an important aspect of vehiclesafety.

You must thereforemakesurethat these func-

tion correctlyat all times.Havetheheadlamp

setting checkedregularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers

on/off

!Do notoperate thewindshield wiperswhen

thewindshield is dry, as this could damage

thewiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-

lectedon thewindshield can scratch theglass

if wipingtakes placewhen thewindshield is

dry.

If it is necessaryto switch on thewindshield

wipersin dry weather conditions, always use

washerfluid when operating thewindshield

wipers.

!If thewindshield wipersleavesmears on the

windshield after thevehiclehas been washed

in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-

dues may be thereason for this. Clean the

windshield usingwasherfluid after washing

thevehiclein an automatic car wash.

!Intermittent wipingwithrain sensor:due to

optical influencesand thewindshield becom-

ing dirtyin dry weather conditions, thewind-

shield wipersmay be activated inadvertently.

This could then damagethewindshield wiper

bladesor scratch thewindshield.

Forthis reason,you should always switch off

thewindshield wipersin dry weather.

1$Windshield wiper off

2ÄIntermittent wipe, normal

3ÅIntermittent wipe, frequent

4°Continuous wipe, slow

5¯Continuous wipe, fast

BíSingle wipe

îWipe withwasherfluid

XSwitchon theignition.

XTurn thecombination switch to thecorre-

sponding position.

Windshield wipers 111

Lights and windshield wipers

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Åor

Äposition, the appropriate wipe frequency

is automatically set according to the intensity of

the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is

more sensitive than in the Äposition, caus-

ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-

quently.

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will

no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent

you from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the windshield wipers begin to move while

you are changing the wiper blades, you could

be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of

injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

ignition before changing the wiper blades.

!Never open the hood if a windshield wiper

arm has been folded away from the wind-

shield.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a

wiper blade back onto the windshield.

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when

you change the wiper blade. If you release the

windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade

and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield

may be damaged by the force of the impact.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

!To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make

sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the

wiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-

tion

On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-

LESS‑GO start function:

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XSet the windshield wipers to the °posi-

tion on the combination switch.

XWhen the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,

turn the SmartKey to position uin the igni-

tion lock and remove SmartKey.

XFold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY-

LESS‑GO start function:

XSwitch off the engine.

XRemove your foot from the brake pedal.

XSet the windshield wiper to the °position

on the combination switch.

XPress the Start/Stop button repeatedly until

the windshield wiper starts.

XWhen the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,

press the Start/Stop button.

XFold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

XHold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With

the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the

direction of arrow :away from the wiper arm

as far as it will go.

XSlide the catch ;in the direction of arrow =

until it engages in the removal position with a

noticeable click.

112 Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers

XRemove thewiper blade in thedirection of

arrow ?away from thewiper arm.

Installing thewiper blades

XInsertthenewwiper blade intothewiper arm

in thedirection of arrow :.

XSlide thecatch ;in thedirection of arrow =

until it engagesin thelockingposition with a

noticeable click.

XMakesurethat thewiper blade is seated cor-

rectly.

XFold thewiper arm backonto thewindshield.

XRemove theprotective film :from theser-

viceindicator on thetipof thewiper blade.

If thecolor of theserviceindicator changes from

blackto yellow,thewiper bladesshould be

replaced.

iThe duration of thecolor changevaries

depending on theusage conditions.

Windshield wipers 113

Lights and windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The windshield wipers

are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move-

ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.

XSwitch off the engine.

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS‑GO start function:

XOpen the driver's door.

The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This means: "Key

removed".

XRemove the cause of the obstruction.

XSwitch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers

fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

XSelect another wiper speed on the combination switch.

XHave the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The windshield washer

fluid from the spray noz-

zles no longer hits the

center of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.

XHave the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

114 Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notes

Observe the settings recommended on the fol-

lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog

up.

To prevent the windows from fogging up:

Rswitch off climate control only briefly

Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly

Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion function

Ractivate the "Windshield defrosting" function

briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and

air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior

filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior

climate.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

is only available when the engine is running.

Optimum climate control is only achieved with

the side windows and roof closed.

If you start the engine using your smartphone,

the last selected climate control setting is reac-

tivated (Ypage 126).

The integrated filter filters out most particles of

dust and soot and completely filters out pollen.

It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A

clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied

to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you

should always observe the interval for replacing

the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance

Booklet. As it depends on environmental condi-

tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may

be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-

let.

iVentilate the vehicle for a brief period during

warm weather, e.g. using the convenience

opening feature (Ypage 90). This will speed

up the cooling process and the desired inte-

rior temperature will be reached more

quickly.

iIt is possible that the blower may be activa-

ted automatically 60 minutes after the Smart-

Key has been removed depending on various

factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The

vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry

the automatic climate control.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Example: control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

:Sets the temperature, left (Ypage 118)

;Sets the air distribution (Ypage 118)

=Sets the airflow (Ypage 118)

Switches off climate control (Ypage 116)

Overview of climate control systems 115

Climate control

?Sets climate control to automatic (Ypage 117)

ADefrosts the windshield (Ypage 118)

BCalls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Ypage 258)

CSwitches the rear window defroster on/off (Ypage 119)

DActivates or deactivates synchronization (Ypage 118)

ESwitches air-recirculation mode manually on/off (Ypage 120)

FSwitches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Ypage 117)

GSets the temperature, right (Ypage 118)

Optimum use of automatic climate

control

Optimum use of the automatic climate

control

The following contains notes and recommenda-

tions on optimum use of dual-zone automatic

climate control.

XActivate climate control using the Ã

rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the

Ãrocker switch lights up. The "Cooling

with dehumidification" function is activated in

automatic mode.

XSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

iOnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-

tion briefly until the windshield is clear again.

iOnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

if there are unpleasant outside odors or when

in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog

up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle

in air-recirculation mode.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch (except

Mercedes-AMG C 63 /C 63 S)

You can choose between various drive programs

with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

(Ypage 130).

If you have selected drive program E:

Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is

deactivated and heat output is reduced as a

result

Rthe rear window defroster running time is

reduced

If you have selected drive program C,Sor S+,

the current climate settings are maintained.

ECO start/stop function

During automatic engine switch-off, the climate

control system only operates at a reduced capa-

city. If you require the full climate control output,

you can switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button (Ypage 128).

Operating the climate control sys-

tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-

trol

General notes

When the climate control is switched off, the air

supply and air circulation are also switched off.

The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off

climate control only briefly

Switch on climate control primarily using the

Ãrocker switch (Ypage 117).

Activating/deactivating

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo switch on: set the airflow to level 1or

higher using the Hrocker switch.

XTo switch off: set the airflow to level 0using

the Hrocker switch.

116 Operating the climate control systems

Climate control

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notes

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not

be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more

quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air

inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal

and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivating

XPress the ¿rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The indicator lamp above

the ¿rocker switch

remains off. The cooling

with air dehumidification

function cannot be acti-

vated via the multimedia

system any longer

(Ypage 258).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-

function.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes

In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-

tained automatically at a constant level. The

system automatically regulates the temperature

of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-

tribution.

During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with

air dehumidification" function is activated.

The system automatically detects whether the

soft top is open or closed and automatically

adjusts the air settings depending on the soft

top status.

Automatic control

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo activate: press the Ãrocker switch up

or down.

The indicator lamp above the Ãrocker

switch lights up.

XSet the desired temperature using the w

rocker switch on the front control unit.

XTo switch to manual operation: press the

Hrocker switch up or down.

XPress the _rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the Ãrocker

switch goes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or

air distribution manually, the indicator lamp

above the Ãrocker switch goes out. The

function which has not been changed manually,

however, continues to be controlled automati-

cally. When the manually set function switches

Operating the climate control systems 117

Climate control

back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp

above the Ãrocker switch lights up again.

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate control: different

temperatures can be set for the driver's and

front-passenger sides.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo increase or reduce: press the w

rocker switch up or down.

Only change the temperature setting in small

increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings

¯Directs air through the defroster vents

PDirects air through the center and side air

vents

ODirects air through the footwell air vents

SDirects air through the center, side and

footwell vents

aDirects air through the defroster and

footwell vents

_Directs air through the defroster, center,

side and footwell vents

bDirects air through the defroster, center

and side air vents

WSets the air distribution to automatic

Setting

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2

(Ypage 123).

XPress the _rocker switch up or down.

The various air distribution settings appear in

the multimedia system.

Setting the airflow

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo increase or reduce: press the H

rocker switch up or down.

Activating or deactivating the syn-

chronization function

General notes

Climate control can be set centrally using the

synchronization function. The temperature set-

ting is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Activating/deactivating

XPress the 0rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the 0rocker

switch lights up or goes out.

XActivate or deactivate the "Synchronization"

function using the multimedia system

(Ypage 118).

The synchronization function deactivates if the

settings for the front-passenger side are

changed.

Defrosting the windshield

General notes

You can use this function to defrost the wind-

shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front

side windows on the inside.

Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function

as soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching the "Windshield defrosting"

function on or off

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo switch on: press rocker switch ¬on

the front control unit up or down.

The indicator lamp above the ¬rocker

switch lights up. The current climate control

settings are deactivated.

The climate control system switches to the

following functions:

Rhigh airflow

Rhigh temperature

Rair distribution to the windshield and front

side windows

Rair-recirculation mode off

iIf necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid-

ification" function is activated. In this case,

118 Operating the climate control systems

Climate control

the indicator lamp above the ¿rocker

switch remains switched off.

XTo switch off: press rocker switch ¬up or

down.

The indicator lamp above the ¬rocker

switch goes out. The previously selected set-

tings are restored. Air-recirculation mode

remains deactivated.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

XActivate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion" function with the ¿rocker switch.

XSwitch on automatic mode using the Ã

rocker switch.

XIf the windows continue to fog up, activate the

"Windshield defrosting" function using the

¬rocker switch.

iYou should only select this setting until the

windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside

XActivate the windshield wipers.

XSwitch on automatic mode using the Ã

rocker switch.

iIf you clean the windows regularly, they do

not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notes

The rear window defroster has a high current

draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon

as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear

window defroster switches off automatically

after several minutes.

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window

defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivating

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress rocker switch ¤up or down.

The indicator lamp above rocker switch ¤

lights up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The rear window

defroster has deactiva-

ted prematurely or can-

not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.

XSwitch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,

interior lighting or the seat heating.

When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster

can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off

General notes

You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of

fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-

ing the vehicle from outside. The air already

inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.

If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-

dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at

low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation

mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-

ging up.

Operating the climate control systems 119

Climate control

Activating/deactivating

XTurn theSmartKey to position 2in theigni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo activate: press thegrockerswitch up

or down.

The indicator lamp abovethegrocker

switch lights up.

Air-recirculation modeswitches on automati-

cally:

Rat high outside temperatures

Rin atunnel(vehicles with a navigation system

only)

The indicator lamp abovethegrocker

switch is notlit when automatic air-recirculation

modeis activated. Outside air is added after

about 30 minutes.

XTo deactivate: press thegrockerswitch

up or down.

The indicator lamp abovethegrocker

switch goesout.

Air-recirculation modedeactivates automati-

cally:

Rafter approximately fiveminutesat outside

temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡

(5 †)

Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling

with air dehumidification is deactivated

Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside

temperatures above approximately 41 ‡

(5 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidification"

function is activated

Ionization

Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle

interior and attain an improved interior climate.

The ionization of the interior air is odorless and

cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-

rior.

You can switch ionization on/off using the mul-

timedia system (Ypage 258).

Ionization can only be operated when the auto-

matic climate control is switched on. The side air

vent on the driver's side must be open.

Air vents

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air

vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in

the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There

is a risk of injury.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always

maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-

lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to

another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,

please observe the following notes:

Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and

the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow

or leaves.

Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in

the vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents

Air vents are located:

Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash-

board

Rin the middle of the dashboard

Rin the front head restraints

Rin the rear center console, depending on the

equipment installed

Side air vent (example)

:Side window defroster vent

;Side air vent, left

=Control for left side air vent

120 Air vents

Climate control

XTo open or close: turn control =to the

counter-clockwise or clockwise as far as it will

go.

XTo adjust the air direction: hold side air

vent ;by control =and move it up or down

or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents (see the Digital

Operator's Manual).

Setting the blower output of the AIR-

SCARF vents

GWARNING

When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air

can flow from the vents in the head restraints.

This could result in burns in the immediate

vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.

Reduce the heater output before it becomes

too hot.

You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF

vents :using the AIRSCARF button

(Ypage 100).

Air vents 121

Climate control

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notes

The sensor system of some driving and driving

safety systems adjusts automatically while a

certain distance is being driven after the vehicle

has been delivered or after repairs. Full system

effectiveness is not reached until the end of this

teach-in procedure.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only

reach their optimum braking effect after several

hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for

this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

The more you look after the engine when it is

new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-

formance in the future.

RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle

and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles

(1500 km).

RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,

during this period.

RWhen changing gears manually, change up in

good time, before the tachometer needle rea-

ches Ôof the way to the red area of the tach-

ometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake

the vehicle.

RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal

beyond the pressure point (kickdown).

RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles

(1,500 km), drive in drive program E.

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG

vehicles:

RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)

for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).

ROnly briefly allow the engine to reach a max-

imum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.

RChange gear in good time.

RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),

drive in program C.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase

the engine speed gradually and accelerate the

vehicle to full speed.

You should also observe these notes on break-

ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on

your vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the maximum permissible

speed.

Locking rear axle differential

(Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63 S)

Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-

ferential on the rear axle.

Change the oil to improve protection of the rear

axle differential:

Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles

(3,000 km)

Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years

These oil changes prolong the service life of the

differential. Have the oil change carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Driving

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict

the clearance around the pedals or block a

depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-

ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a

risk of an accident.

Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that

they do not get into the driver's footwell.

When using floormats or carpets, make sure

that they are properly secured so that they do

not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place

several floormats or carpets on top of one

another.

GWARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage

of the pedals, e.g.:

Rshoes with thick soles

Rshoes with high heels

Rslippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct

usage of the pedals.

122 Driving

Driving and parking

GWARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

GWARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully

released when driving, the parking brake can:

Roverheat and cause a fire

Rlose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release

the parking brake fully before driving off.

!Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle

stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high

engine speeds and driving at full throttle until

the engine has reached its operating temper-

ature.

Only shift the automatic transmission to the

desired drive position when the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive

wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.

You could otherwise damage the drive train.

!Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil

temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-

imum engine speed is restricted in order to

protect the engine. To protect the engine and

maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-

ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.

Key positions

SmartKey

gTo remove the SmartKey

1Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers

2Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position

3To start the engine

iThe SmartKey can be turned in the ignition

lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for

the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.

The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notes

When you insert the Start/Stop button into the

ignition lock, the system needs approximately

two seconds recognition time. You can then use

the Start/Stop button.

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in

succession corresponds to the different Smart-

Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the

case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-

ately.

A check which periodically establishes a radio

connection between the vehicle and the Smart-

Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when

starting the engine.

Driving 123

Driving and parking

To start the vehicle without actively using the

SmartKey:

Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the

ignition lock.

Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. (Ypage 77)

Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another SmartKey.

Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.

Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.

This can affect the functionality of the Smart-

Key.

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote

control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:

Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition

with the Start/Stop button.

Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine

with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is

unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button

on the front door (Ypage 82), you can continue

to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.

The engine can be switched off while the vehicle

is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/

Stop button for three seconds. This function

operates independently of the ECO start/stop

automatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

:Start/Stop button

;Ignition lock

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the

indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light

up. Warning and indicator lamps: see

(Ypage 241).

If Start/Stop button :has not yet been

pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey

being removed from the ignition.

XTo switch on the power supply: press

Start/Stop button :once.

The power supply is switched on. You can now

activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:

Rthe driver's door is opened and

Ryou press Start/Stop button :twice when in

this position

XTo switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop

button :twice.

The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off again if:

Ryou do not start the engine from this position

within 15 minutes

Ryou press Start/Stop button :once when in

this position

The power supply is switched off again if:

Rthe driver's door is opened and

Ryou press Start/Stop button :once when in

this position

Removing the Start/Stop button

You can remove the Start/Stop button from the

ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal

using the SmartKey.

It is possible to switch between Start/Stop but-

ton mode and key operation only when the

transmission is in position j.

XRemove Start/Stop button :from ignition

lock ;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-

ton from the ignition lock when you leave the

vehicle. You should, however, always take the

SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As

long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:

Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/

Stop button

Rthe electrically powered equipment can be

operated

124 Driving

Driving and parking

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupt traffic.

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with-

out sufficient ventilation.

GWARNING

Flammable materials introduced through

environmental influence or by animals can

ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or

parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk

of fire.

Carry out regular checks to make sure that

there are no flammable foreign materials in

the engine compartment or in the exhaust

system.

General notes

The catalytic converter is preheated for up to

30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the

engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmission

XShift the transmission to position j

(Ypage 133).

The transmission position indicator on the

multifunction display shows j

(Ypage 134).

iYou can start the engine in transmission

position jand i.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

To start the engine using the SmartKey instead

of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop

button out of the ignition lock.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 3in the igni-

tion lock and release it as soon as the engine

is running.

If the engine will not start:

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XReinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock

after a short waiting period.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

light up (Ypage 241).

XTurn the SmartKey to position 3

(Ypage 123) in the ignition lock and release it

as soon as the engine is running.

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop

button

The Start/Stop button is only available on vehi-

cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start

function.

The Start/Stop button can be used to start the

vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey

into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button

must be inserted in the ignition lock and the

SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for

starting the engine operates independently of

the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-

tion.

You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always

Driving 125

Driving and parking

take the SmartKey with you when leaving the

vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.

Pay attention to the important safety notes.

XDepress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

XPress the Start/Stop button once

(Ypage 124).

The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphone

Observe the important safety notes on starting

the engine (Ypage 125).

You can also start your engine via your smart-

phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the

previously selected climate control setting is

activated. In this way you can cool or heat the

interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-

ney.

Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is

safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-

cle is parked.

Observe the legal stipulations in the area where

your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-

phone may be limited to certain countries or

regions.

You can execute a maximum of two consecutive

starting attempts via your smartphone. If you

press the start/stop button or insert the Smart-

Key into the ignition lock, you can carry out two

more starting attempts with your smartphone.

The engine runs for ten minutes when starting

with the smartphone.

Once you have started the engine, you can

switch the engine off via your smartphone at any

time.

You can only start the engine via your smart-

phone if:

Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock

Rpark position jis selected

Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed

Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated

Rthe panic alarm is not activated

Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off

Rthe hood is closed

Rthe doors are closed and locked

Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed

Also make sure that:

Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled

Rthe starter battery has been sufficiently

charged

GWARNING

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the

engine is started unintentionally during ser-

vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of

injury.

Always secure the engine against uninten-

tional starting before carrying out mainte-

nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started via

your smartphone before carrying out mainte-

nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine

start via your smartphone, for example, if you:

Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps

Rdo not lock the doors

Ropen a side window

Pulling away

General notes

GWARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position Dor R,

the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is

a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position Dor R,

always firmly depress the brake pedal and do

not simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling

away.

The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled

away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.

You can open the doors from the inside at any

time.

You can also deactivate the automatic locking

feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual.

It is possible to shift the transmission from posi-

tion jto the desired position only if you

depress the brake pedal. Only then is the park-

ing lock released. If you do not depress the

brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still

126 Driving

Driving and parking

be moved but the parking lock remains

engaged.

iUpshifts take place at higher engine speeds

after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-

verter to reach its operating temperature

more quickly.

Information on the automatic release of the

electric parking brake (Ypage 146).

Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away

forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It

holds the vehicle for a short time after you have

removed your foot from the brake pedal. This

gives you enough time to move your foot from

the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to

depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

GWARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-

ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from the

brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never

leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start

assist.

Hill start assist is not active if:

Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a

downhill gradient.

Rthe transmission is in position i

Rthe electric parking brake is applied.

RESP®is malfunctioning

ECO start/stop function

Introduction

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped

under certain conditions.

The engine starts automatically when the driver

wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop

function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel

consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and

you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

the ignition and secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

General notes

:ECO start/stop display

The ECO start/stop function is activated when-

ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or

the Start/Stop button.

If the engine has been switched off automati-

cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è

ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-

play.

Mercedes-AMG C 63 and Mercedes-AMG

C 63 S: the ECO start/stop function is auto-

matically switched on only in drive program C.

Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC: the ECO start/

stop function is automatically switched on only

in drive programs S,Cand E.

Automatic engine switch-off

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the

transmission in hor i, the ECO start/stop

function switches off the engine automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is operational

when:

Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green

Rthe outside temperature and the atmospheric

air pressure is within the range that is suitable

for the system

Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature

Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached

Driving 127

Driving and parking

Rthe battery is sufficiently charged

Rthe system detects that the windshield is not

fogged up when the air-conditioning system is

switched on

Rthe hood is closed

Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened

All of the vehicle's systems remain active when

the engine is stopped automatically.

The HOLD function can also be activated if the

engine has been switched off automatically. It is

then not necessary to continue applying the

brakes during the automatic stop phase. When

you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine

starts automatically and the braking effect of

the HOLD function is deactivated.

Mercedes-AMG C 63 and Mercedes-

AMG C 63 S: the number of consecutive auto-

matic engine switch-offs is unlimited.

All other models: automatic engine switch-off

can take place a maximum of four times in a row

(initial switch-off, then three subsequent switch-

offs).

Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:

Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by

pressing the ECO button

RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you permanently

activate manual gearshifting (Ypage 138)

Rin transmission position hor i, the brake

pedal is released and the HOLD function is not

active

Ryou depress the accelerator pedal

Ryou engage reverse gear k

Ryou move the transmission out of position j

Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-

er's door

Rthe vehicle starts to roll

Rthe brake system requires this

Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-

ates from the set range

Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-

shield when the air-conditioning system is

switched on

Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too

low

Shifting the transmission to position jdoes

not start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECO

start/stop function

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

XTo deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ;goes out.

XTo activate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ;lights up.

If indicator lamp ;is off, the ECO start/stop

function has been deactivated manually or as

the result of a malfunction. The engine will then

not be switched off automatically when the vehi-

cle stops.

The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:

RMercedes-AMG C 63 and Mercedes-AMG

C 63 S: you switch to drive program RACE

(S‑MODEL), S+ or S(Ypage 130)

RMercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC: you switch to

drive program S+ (Ypage 130)

Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting

(Ypage 138)

If you have permanently activated manual gear-

shifting and then press ECO button :, the ECO

start/stop function is activated.

All other models

128 Driving

Driving and parking

XTo deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ;goes out.

XTo activate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ;lights up.

If indicator lamp ;is off, the ECO start/stop

function has been deactivated manually or as

the result of a malfunction. The engine will then

not be switched off automatically when the vehi-

cle stops.

Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO

start/stop function. If you press ECO button :,

the ECO start/stop function is activated.

AMG performance adjustable exhaust

system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The volume of the AMG Performance adjustable

exhaust system changes depending on the posi-

tion of the switchable exhaust flap. The exhaust

flap is adjusted automatically according to the

selected drive program (Ypage 130).

You can also adjust the position of the exhaust

flap and therefore the volume of the exhaust

system manually.

The automatic adjustment of the exhaust flap is

always active when you change drive program,

regardless of the manual setting.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-

ting is activated.

Setting the volume:

XPress button :.

If you select the loudest setting, indicator

lamp lights up ;.

Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63 S: you can preset

the volume of the exhaust system for drive pro-

gram I(Individual). Information on DYNAMIC

SELECT and on configuring drive program Iwith

the multimedia system (see the Digital Opera-

tor's Manual).

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The engine does not

start.

The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.

XDeactivate the HOLD function (Ypage 162) or Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC (Ypage 158).

XTry to start the engine again (Ypage 125).

The engine does not

start. The starter motor

can be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.

Before attempting to start the engine again:

XTurn the SmartKey back to position uin the ignition lock.

XPress the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in

the instrument cluster go out.

XTry to start the engine again (Ypage 125). Avoid excessively long

and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the

battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 129

Driving and parking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The engine does not

start. The starter motor

can be heard. The

reserve fuel warning

lamp is lit and the fuel

gauge display is at the

reserve level.

The fuel tank is empty.

XRefuel the vehicle.

The engine does not

start. You cannot hear

the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or

discharged.

XJump-start the vehicle (Ypage 304).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.

XTry to start the engine again (Ypage 125).

If the engine still does not start:

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not running

smoothly and is misfir-

ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

component of the engine management system.

XOnly depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter

and damage it.

XHave the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The coolant temperature

display is pointing to the

red mark.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no

longer being cooled sufficiently.

XStop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to

cool down.

XCheck the coolant level (Ypage 284). Observe the warning notes

as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

General information

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to select the

drive program.

Available drive programs for Mercedes-

AMG C 43 4MATIC:

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving

characteristics

SSport Sporty driving characteris-

tics

CComfort Comfortable and economi-

cal driving characteristics

EEconomy Particularly economical

driving characteristics

IIndividual Individual settings

130 DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Driving and parking

Available drive programs for Mercedes-

AMG C 63/C 63 S:

RACE

(S‑MODEL)

Driving characteristics suit-

able for a race circuit

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving

characteristics

SSport Sporty driving characteris-

tics

CComfort Comfortable and economi-

cal driving characteristics

IIndividual Individual settings

Depending on the drive program selected the

following vehicle characteristics will change:

Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-

ment)

Rthe suspension

Rthe steering

Rthe driver assistance systems

RESP®(Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63 S)

Rthe position of the exhaust flap (Mercedes-

AMG C 63/C 63 S)

Rthe setting of the ECO start/stop function

Rthe availability of gliding mode

Rthe climate control:

Further information for automatic drive program

characteristics (Ypage 136).

Additionally, in drive program Iyou can config-

ure the respective vehicle characteristics using

the multimedia system. You can find informa-

tion about this under "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the

vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program Cis

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Ypage 125).

Selecting the drive program

XPush DYNAMIC SELECT switch :forwards

or back until the desired drive program is

selected.

The status icon of the selected drive program

is shown in the multifunction display.

In addition, the current drive program settings

are displayed briefly in the multimedia system

display.

You can also change gear yourself using the

steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-

mation on the manual drive program

(Ypage 138).

Additional settings

:Position of the exhaust flap (Ypage 129)

;ECO start/stop function (Ypage 127)

=ESP®(Ypage 67)

?Suspension (Ypage 164)

APermanently activates manual gearshifting

(Ypage 138)

When you press buttons :-Athe corre-

sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC

SELECT switch setting is overwritten.

If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-

acteristics will be accepted. This is also the case

DYNAMIC SELECT switch 131

Driving and parking

if you have previously pressed one of buttons :

-A.

iMercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC In a few

countries, the ECO start/stop function is

deactivated at the factory due to the fuel

grade available. In this case, the ECO start/

stop function is not available in any drive pro-

gram, regardless of the display in the multi-

media system display.

All other models

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the

drive program.

Depending on the drive program selected the

following vehicle characteristics will change:

Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-

ment)

Rthe suspension

Rthe steering

Rthe ECO start/stop function

Rthe climate control:

-the climate control settings

-the rear window defroster operation period

-the performance of the seat heating

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program Cis

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Ypage 125).

XPush DYNAMIC SELECT switch :forward or

back until the desired drive program is selec-

ted.

The status icon of the selected drive program

is shown in the multifunction display.

In addition, the current drive program settings

are displayed briefly in the multimedia system

display.

iIn a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-

tion is deactivated at the factory due to the

available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO

start/stop function is not available in any

drive program, regardless of the display in the

multimedia system display.

Available drive programs:

IIndividual Individual settings

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving

characteristics

SSport Sporty driving characteris-

tics

CComfort Comfortable and economi-

cal driving characteristics

EEconomy Particularly economical

driving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs

(Ypage 136).

You can also change gear yourself using the

steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-

mation on the manual drive program

(Ypage 138).

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position Dor R,

the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is

a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position Dor R,

always firmly depress the brake pedal and do

not simultaneously accelerate.

GWARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neu-

tral position Nwhen you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an

accident.

132 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking

After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parking

brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

jPark position with parking lock

kReverse gear

iNeutral

hDrive

The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the

steering column.

The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its

original position. The current transmission posi-

tion j,k,ior his shown on the trans-

mission position display on the multifunction

display (Ypage 134).

Selects park position

!If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle

is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-

mission directly from hto k, from kto h

or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic

transmission may be damaged.

XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the

direction of arrow j.

Engaging park position automatically

Park position jis automatically engaged if:

Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey

and remove the SmartKey

Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey

or using the Start/Stop button and open the

driver's door or front-passenger door

Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is

stationary or when driving at a very low speed

and the transmission is in position hor k

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-

mission shifts to transmission position jauto-

matically if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the informa-

tion on the HOLD function (Ypage 162) and

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Ypage 156).

Engaging reverse gear

!Only move the automatic transmission to

kwhen the vehicle is stationary.

XDepress the brake pedal.

XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the

first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not available

when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-

tion on the ECO start/stop function

(Ypage 127).

Engaging neutral

GWARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupt traffic.

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

Automatic transmission 133

Driving and parking

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

XIf the transmission is in position hor k:

push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to

the first point of resistance.

XIf the transmission is in position j: depress

the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT

lever up or down to the first point of resist-

ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-

sion in position kor h, the automatic trans-

mission shifts to iautomatically.

With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-

er's door or the front-passenger door or remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the auto-

matic transmission shifts to jautomatically.

With the Start/Stop button: if you then open

the driver's door or the front-passenger door,

the automatic transmission shifts to jauto-

matically.

If you want the automatic transmission to

remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-

cle cleaned in an automatic, tow-through car

wash:

XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-

GO start function: remove the Start/Stop

button from the ignition lock.

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

XAll vehicles: switch the ignition on.

XDepress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

XEngage neutral i.

XRelease the brake pedal.

XRelease the electric parking brake.

XSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey

in the ignition lock.

Engaging the drive position

XIf the transmission is in position kor i:

push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the

first point of resistance.

XIf the transmission is in position j: depress

the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT

lever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display

The current transmission position and drive pro-

gram appear in the multifunction display.

:Status symbol drive program

;Transmission position

=Gear

The arrows in the transmission position display

show how and into which transmission positions

you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

If the transmission position display in the mul-

tifunction display is not working, you should pull

away carefully to check whether the desired

transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you

should select transmission position hand

drive program E(for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

drive program C) or S.

134 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking

Transmission positions

BPark position

This prevents the vehicle from rolling

away when stopped.

Only shift the transmission into posi-

tion j(Ypage 133) when the vehi-

cle is stationary. The parking lock

should not be used as a brake when

parking. Always apply the electronic

parking brake in addition to the park-

ing lock in order to secure the vehi-

cle.

Park position jis automatically

engaged if:

Ryou switch off the engine using the

SmartKey and remove the Smart-

Key

Ryou switch off the engine using the

SmartKey or using the Start/Stop

button and open the driver's door

or front-passenger door

Ryou open the driver's door when

the vehicle is stationary or when

driving at a very low speed and the

transmission is in position hor

In the event of a malfunction of the

vehicle's electronics, the transmis-

sion may lock in position j. Have

the vehicle electronics checked

immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.

CReverse gear

You can only shift the transmission

into position kwhen the vehicle is

stationary (Ypage 133).

ANeutral

Do not shift the transmission to i

while driving. Otherwise, the auto-

matic transmission could be dam-

aged.

No power is transmitted from the

engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brake pedal will allow

you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to

push it or tow it.

If ESP®is deactivated or faulty: shift

the transmission to position iif the

vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.

on icy roads.

If you switch the engine off with the

transmission in position kor h,

the automatic transmission shifts to

iautomatically.

!Coasting in neutral imay

cause damage to the drive train.

7Drive

The automatic transmission changes

gear automatically. All forward gears

are available.

Driving tips

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts through the

individual gears automatically when it is in trans-

mission position h. This automatic gear shift-

ing behavior is determined by:

Rthe selected drive program

Rthe position of the accelerator pedal

Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-

matic transmission shifts gear:

Rlittle throttle: early upshifts

Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Double-clutch function

When shifting down, the double-clutch function

is active regardless of the currently selected

drive program. The double-clutch function

Automatic transmission 135

Driving and parking

reduces load change reactions and is conducive

to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by

the double-clutch function depends on the drive

program selected.

Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.

XDepress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.

The automatic transmission shifts to a lower

gear depending on the engine speed.

XEase off the accelerator pedal once the

desired speed is reached.

The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Gliding mode

Gliding mode is available depending on equip-

ment.

Gliding mode is characterized by the following:

RThe combustion engine is disconnected from

the drive train.

RThe engine speed corresponds to the idling

speed.

RThe multifunction display hides the gear indi-

cator and displays transmission position h

in green (Ypage 134)

RMercedes-AMG vehicles: the multifunction

display shows status icon :for the drive

program's status icon

In drive program Eor in drive program C

(Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63 S), you can activate

and deactivate glide mode using the ECO button

(Ypage 128).

Gliding mode can be activated under the follow-

ing conditions:

RThe speed is within a suitable range.

RThe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there

are no steep up or downhill gradients.

RYou are no longer depressing the accelerator

pedal.

Gliding mode is deactivated under the following

conditions:

RYou depress the accelerator pedal.

RYou depress the brake pedal.

RYou change the transmission position

(Ypage 133).

Ryou switch to drive program RACE

(Mercedes-AMG C 63 S), S+ or S

(Ypage 130).

Ryou activate manual gearshifting

(Ypage 138).

Ryou leave the suitable speed range.

iIf you have selected the "Eco" or "Comfort"

setting (Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63 S) for the

drive (engine and transmission management)

in drive program I, you can also activate glide

mode. Information on DYNAMIC SELECT and

on configuring drive program Ivia the multi-

media system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

Drive programs

All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG

C 63/C 63 S

Drive program I (Individual)

In drive program Ithe following properties of the

drive program can be selected:

Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-

ment)

and therefore indirectly the availability of glid-

ing mode and the properties of the driver

assistance systems

Rthe suspension

Rthe steering

Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function

Rthe climate control:

To permanently shift the gears manually in drive

program Iusing the steering wheel paddle shift-

ers, select the M(Manual) setting for the drive

(except Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC).

Information about configuring drive program I

with the multimedia system can be found under

"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital

Operator's Manual.

136 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking

Drive program S+ (SportPlus)

Drive programS+ is characterized by thefol-

lowing:

Rthevehicleexhibits particularlysportydriving

characteristics.

Rthevehiclepulls away in first gear.

Rtheautomatictransmissionshiftsup later.

thefuelconsumption possiblybeinghigher as

aresult of thelater automatictransmission

shift points.

Rthesuspensionexhibits particularlystiff

springingand dampingsettings(vehicles with

AIRMATIC).

Rglidingmodeis notavailable.

RtheECO start/stopfunction is switched off

(Ypage 127).

Drive program S(Sport)

Drive programSis characterized by thefollow-

ing:

Rthevehicleexhibits sportydrivingcharacter-

istics.

Rthevehiclepulls away in first gear.

Rtheautomatictransmissionshiftsup later.

thefuelconsumption possiblybeinghigher as

aresult of thelater automatictransmission

shift points.

Rthesuspensionexhibits hardspringingand

dampingsettings(vehicles withAIRMATIC).

Rglidingmodeis notavailable.

RtheECO start/stopfunction is switched on

(Ypage 127).

Drive program C(Comfort)

Drive programCis characterized by thefollow-

ing:

Rthevehicledeliverscomfortable, economical

handlingcharacteristics.

Rthevehiclepulls away moregentlyin forward

and reversegears, unless theaccelerator

pedalis depressed fully.

Rthevehiclehas improved drivingstability, for

exampleon slipperyroadsurfaces.

Roptimal fuelconsumption resultingfrom the

automatictransmissionshiftingup sooner.

The vehicleis driven in thelow enginespeed

range and thewheels are less likely to spin.

Rglidingmodeis notavailable.

RtheECO start/stopfunction is switched on

(Ypage 127).

Drive program E(Economy)

Drive programEis characterized by thefollow-

ing:

Rthevehicleexhibits comfortable, economical

handlingcharacteristics.

Rthevehiclepulls away moregentlyin forward

and reversegears, unless theaccelerator

pedalis depressed fully.

Rthevehiclehas improved drivingstability, for

exampleon slipperyroadsurfaces.

Roptimal fuelconsumption resultingfrom the

automatictransmissionshiftingup sooner.

The vehicleis driven in thelow enginespeed

range and thewheels are less likely to spin.

Rduring deceleration,theengineis disconnec-

tedfrom thedrive train.The vehicleuses

kineticenergyand consumes less fuel.

Rthecoolingand heatingoutput of theclimate

control system has been reduced.

Rglidingmodeis available.

RtheECO start/stopfunction is switched on

(Ypage 127).

Mercedes-AMG C63/C63 S

Drive program RACE (S‑MODEL)

The RACE drive programis characterized by the

following:

Rthevehicleexhibits drivingcharacteristics

suitable fortheracetrack.

Rall vehiclesystems are set formaximum

sportiness.

Rthegearshift recommendation gives you

information forslowly warmingup thedrive

assemblies and foradopting afuel-efficient

drivingstyle (Ypage 138). You can follow the

gearshift recommendationsat all times and

shift gear accordingly usingthesteering

wheelpaddleshifters.On thebasisof the

gearshift recommendation,usingthesteering

wheelpaddleshifters,you can optimizethe

drive train and engineoperatingmodeat any

time.

Rif you haveselected agear manually, this will

be maintaineduntil thevehiclespeed increa-

ses or decreases dramatically.

Rthevehiclepulls away in first gear.

Rtheautomatictransmissionshiftsup later.

thefuelconsumption possiblybeinghigher as

aresult of thelater automatictransmission

shift points.

Automatic transmission 137

Driving and parking

Rthe suspension exhibits particularly hard

springing and damping settings.

Rgliding mode is not available.

Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched off

(Ypage 127).

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)

Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-

lowing:

Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving

characteristics.

Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.

Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.

the fuel consumption possibly being higher as

a result of the later automatic transmission

shift points.

Rthe suspension exhibits particularly hard

springing and damping settings.

Rgliding mode is not available.

Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched off

(Ypage 127).

Drive program S (Sport)

Drive program Sis characterized by the follow-

ing:

Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-

istics.

Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.

Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.

the fuel consumption possibly being higher as

a result of the later automatic transmission

shift points.

Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and

damping settings.

Rgliding mode is not available.

Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched off

(Ypage 127).

Drive program C (Comfort)

Drive program Cis characterized by the follow-

ing:

Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical

handling characteristics.

Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward

and reverse gears, unless the accelerator

pedal is depressed fully.

Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for

example on slippery road surfaces.

Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the

automatic transmission shifting up sooner.

The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed

range and the wheels are less likely to spin.

Rgliding mode is available.

Rthe ECO start/stop function is switched on

(Ypage 127).

Drive program I (Individual)

In drive program Ithe following properties of the

drive program can be selected:

Rthe drive (engine management)

Rthe transmission management

RESP®(Ypage 67)

Rthe suspension

Ractivation of the exhaust flap

To permanently shift the gears manually in drive

program Iusing the steering wheel paddle shift-

ers, select the M(Manual) setting for the trans-

mission management.

Information about configuring drive program I

with the multimedia system can be found under

"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital

Operator's Manual.

Manual gear shifting

General notes

You can change gear yourself using the steering

wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be

in position hfor this.

Depending on which steering wheel paddle

shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission

immediately shifts into the next gear down or

up, if permitted.

To use manual shifting, you have two options:

Rtemporary setting

Rpermanent setting

If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-

function display will show the current gear and

pinstead of transmission position h.

If you deactivate manual gearshifting, the gears

will be shifted automatically again.

138 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking

Temporary setting

XTo activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to

position h.

XPull steering wheel paddle shifter :or ;.

Temporary setting will be active for a certain

amount of time. In certain conditions, the mini-

mum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the

case of lateral acceleration, overrun mode or

driving on steep terrain.

XTo deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle

shifter ;and hold it in place.

XUse the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the

transmission position.

XUse the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change

the drive program.

Permanent setting (except Mercedes-

AMG vehicles)

When configuring drive program I, select the M

(Manual) setting for the drive. When driving in

drive program I, you permanently shift the gears

manually using the steering wheel paddle shift-

ers.

Information about configuring drive program I

with the multimedia system can be found under

"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital

Operator's Manual.

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles)

!In manual mode, the automatic transmis-

sion does not shift up automatically even

when the engine limiting speed for the current

gear is reached. When the engine limiting

speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to

prevent the engine from overrevving. Always

make sure that the engine speed does not

reach the red area of the tachometer. There is

otherwise a risk of engine damage.

XTo activate/deactivate: shift the DIRECT

SELECT lever to position h.

XPress button :.

When the indicator lamp ;lights up, auto-

matic transmission manual mode is activated.

You then permanently shift the gears man-

ually using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

The manual mode activated with button :

remains activated when the drive program is

changed.

Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63 S: only if the D

(Automatic) setting has been preselected for

the transmission is manual mode deactivated

when you change to drive program I.

Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63 S: you can also

preset manual mode for drive program I. To do

so, select the M(Manual) setting when config-

uring the transmission. When driving in drive

program I, you permanently shift the gears man-

ually using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

Information about configuring drive program I

with the multimedia system can be found under

"DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital

Operator's Manual.

Automatic transmission 139

Driving and parking

Shifting gears

XTo shift up: pull steering wheel paddle

shifter ;.

The automatic transmission shifts up to the

next gear.

If the maximum engine speed in the gear cur-

rently engaged is reached and you continue to

accelerate, the automatic transmission auto-

matically shifts up in order to prevent engine

damage (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if the temporary

setting has been activated and you continue

to accelerate when the maximum engine

speed has been reached, the automatic trans-

mission automatically shifts up. If the perma-

nent setting is activated, the automatic trans-

mission does not shift up automatically even

when the engine limiting speed for the current

gear is reached. Observe the protection

against reaching the overrevving range on the

multifunction display. Always make sure that

the engine speed does not reach the red area

of the tachometer.

XTo shift down: pull steering wheel paddle

shifter :.

The automatic transmission shifts down to

the next gear.

Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-

ing.

If the engine exceeds the maximum engine

speed when shifting down, the automatic

transmission protects against engine damage

by not shifting down.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in

adopting an economical driving style. The rec-

ommended gear is shown in the multifunction

display.

XWhen the corresponding gearshift recom-

mendation :appears in the multifunction

display of the instrument cluster, shift to rec-

ommended gear ;.

Protection against reaching the over-

revving range (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

!In manual mode, the automatic transmis-

sion does not shift up automatically even

when the engine limiting speed for the current

gear is reached. When the engine limiting

speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to

prevent the engine from overrevving. Always

make sure that the engine speed does not

reach the red area of the tachometer. There is

otherwise a risk of engine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,

an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-

function display.

XWhen message :appears in the multifunc-

tion display, pull on the right-hand steering

wheel paddle shifter.

140 Automatic transmission

Driving and parking

Kickdown

XFormaximum acceleration,depress the

acceleratorpedal beyondthepressurepoint.

The automatic transmission shiftsto alower

gear depending on theenginespeed.

XShift backup once thedesiredspeedis

reached.

If you apply full throttle, theautomatic trans-

mission shiftsup to thenext gear when the

maximum enginespeed is reached. This pre-

vents theenginefrom overrevving.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only

possiblein thetemporarysetting.

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The transmission has

problemsshifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.

XHavethetransmission checkedat aqualified specialist workshop

immediately.

The acceleration ability

is deteriorating.

The transmission no lon-

ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergencymode.

It is possibleto shift to agear and reversegear only.

XStop thevehicle.

XShift thetransmission to position j.

XSwitchoff theengine.

XWait at least tenseconds before restarting theengine.

XShift thetransmission to position hor k.

If his selected, thetransmission only shiftsto onegear;if kis

selected, thetransmission shiftsto reversegear.

XHavethetransmission checkedat aqualified specialist workshop

immediately.

Transfer case

This section is only valid for vehicles with4-

wheeldrive (4MATIC). Poweris always trans-

mittedto bothaxles.

!Performance testsmay only be carriedout

on a2-axledynamometer. The brakesystem

or transfer casecould otherwise be damaged.

Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a

performance test.

!Since ESP®engagesautomatically, theigni-

tion mustbe switched off (the SmartKey or

Start/Stopbuttonmustbe in position gor

1)if

Rtheelectrical parking brakeis beingtested

using a dynamometer

Rthevehicleis beingtowed withonly one

axleraised (not permittedfor vehicles with

4MATIC)

Otherwise,thebrakesystem can be dam-

aged.

!Vehicles with4MATIC mustnotbe towed

witheither thefrontor therear axleraised, as

doingso will damagethetransmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Fuelis highly flammable. If you handle fuel

incorrectly, there is ariskof fireand explo-

sion.

You mustavoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking.Switchoff theengine

and,if applicable, theauxiliary heating before

refueling.

Refueling 141

Driving and parking

GWARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.

There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:

RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-

out delay.

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-

ing.

RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

GWARNING

Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and

ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and

explosion.

Always touch the vehicle body before opening

the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump

nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is

thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-

eling process. otherwise electrostatic charge

could build up again.

!Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition

if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.

Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could

result in damage to the fuel system and the

engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop

and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained

completely.

!Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the

fuel system.

!Take care not to spill any fuel on painted

surfaces. You could otherwise damage the

paintwork.

!Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.

The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system

could otherwise be blocked by particles from

the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out

when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality

(Ypage 340).

Refueling

General information

Pay attention to the important safety notes

(Ypage 141).

If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,

the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.

The position of the 8fuel filler cap is dis-

played on the instrument cluster. The arrow next

to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-

cle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

:To open the fuel filler flap

;To insert the fuel filler cap

=Tire pressure table

?Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled

XSwitch off the engine.

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function

or KEYLESS‑GO

XOpen the driver's door.

The vehicle electronics are now in setting u.

This is the same as "SmartKey removed".

XPress the fuel filler flap in the direction of

arrow :.

The fuel filler flap swings up.

142 Refueling

Driving and parking

XTurn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and

remove it.

XInsert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the

inside of fuel filler flap ;.

XCompletely insert the filler neck of the fuel

pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and

refuel.

XOnly fill the tank until the pump nozzle

switches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops

filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak

out.

Closing the fuel filler flap

XReplace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly.

XClose the fuel filler flap.

Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-

cle.

If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the

8reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display

(Ypage 227).

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Fuel is leaking from the

vehicle. GWARNING

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

Risk of explosion or fire.

XApply the electric parking brake.

XSwitch off the engine.

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO

XOpen the driver's door.

The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This is the same as

the key having been removed.

XDo not restart the engine under any circumstances.

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot

be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

XUnlock the vehicle (Ypage 76).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XUnlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 78).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust

gas flow. There is a risk of fire.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-

rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-

cle which are hot. Take particular care not to

park on dry grassland or harvested grain

fields.

Parking 143

Driving and parking

GWARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.

Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

!Always secure the vehicle correctly against

rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-

etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

rolling away unintentionally:

Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.

Rthe transmission must be in position jand

the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-

tion lock.

Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the

curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.

Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the

front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for

example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Ron uphill or downhill gradients the laden vehi-

cle must also be secured at the rear axle, for

example with a wheel chock or similar object.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

GWARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neu-

tral position Nwhen you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an

accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parking

brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

XApply the electric parking brake.

XShift the transmission to position j.

XWith the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to

position uin the ignition lock and remove it.

The immobilizer is activated.

XWith the Start/Stop button: press the

Start/Stop button (Ypage 124).

The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in

the instrument cluster go out.

When the driver's door is closed, this corre-

sponds to key position 1. When the driver's

door is open, this corresponds to key position

u, "Key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-

sion in position kor hthe automatic trans-

mission shifts to iautomatically.

With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-

er's door or the front-passenger door or remove

the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic

transmission shifts to jautomatically.

With the Start/Stop button: if you then open

the driver's door or the front-passenger door,

the automatic transmission shifts to jauto-

matically.

If you want the automatic transmission to

remain in neutral i, for example, when having

the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash

with a towing system:

XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-

GO start function: remove the Start/Stop

button from the ignition lock.

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

XAll vehicles: switch the ignition on.

XDepress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

XEngage neutral i.

XRelease the brake pedal.

XRelease the electric parking brake.

XSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey

in the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in an emergency

while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and

holding the Start/Stop button for three sec-

onds. This function operates independently of

the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off

function.

144 Parking

Driving and parking

Electric parking brake

General notes

GWARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.

Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake is

depending on the on-board voltage. If the on-

board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in

the system, it may not be possible to apply the

released parking brake.

XIf this happens, park the vehicle on level

ground only and secure it to prevent it from

rolling away.

XShift the transmission to position j.

It may not be possible to release an applied

parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or

there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a

qualified specialist workshop.

The electric parking brake performs a function

test at regular intervals while the engine is

switched off. The sounds that can be heard while

this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

XTo apply: push handle :.

When the electric parking brake is applied,

the red F(USA only) or !(Canada

only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-

ment cluster.

The electric parking brake can also be applied

when the SmartKey is removed.

XTo release: pull handle :.

The red F(USA only) or !(Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

goes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released:

Rif the SmartKey is in position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123) or

Rif the ignition was switched on using the

Start/Stop button

Applying automatically

The electric parking brake is automatically

applied when the transmission is in position j

and:

Rthe engine is switched off or

Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the

driver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from being

automatically applied, pull handle :.

The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-

matically if:

RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle

to a standstill or

Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-

tionary

RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary

In addition, at least one of the following condi-

tions must be fulfilled:

Rthe engine is switched off

Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the

driver's door is opened

Rthere is a system malfunction

Rthe power supply is insufficient

Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period

The red F(USA only) or !(Canada only)

indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes

out.

The electric parking brake is not automatically

engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO

start/stop function.

Parking 145

Driving and parking

Releasing automatically

Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-

matically released if all of the following condi-

tions are met:

Rthe seat belt has been fastened

Rthe engine is running

Rthe transmission is in position hor kand

you accelerate.

you shift from transmission position jto

position hor k. On steep inclines, you have

to press the accelerator as well.

If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid

must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following

conditions must be fulfilled to automatically

release the electric parking brake:

Rthe driver's door is closed

RYou have shifted out of transmission position

jor you have previously driven faster than

2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator

pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking

brake will be released and the vehicle will start

to move.

Emergency braking

The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-

gency by using the electric parking brake.

XWhile driving, push handle :of the electric

parking brake (Ypage 145).

The vehicle is braked as long as you keep

handle :of the electric parking brake

depressed. The longer electric parking brake

handle :is depressed, the greater the brak-

ing force.

During braking:

Ra warning tone sounds

Rthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-

sage appears

Rthe red F(USA only) or !(Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-

still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than

four weeks, the battery may be damaged by

exhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six

weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a

result of lack of use.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and seek

advice.

iYou can obtain information about trickle

chargers from a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

GWARNING

If you operate mobile communication equip-

ment when driving, you may be distracted

from the traffic situation. You could also lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Only operate this equipment when the vehicle

is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country

in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-

hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while

driving a vehicle.

If you make a call while driving, always use

hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone

when the traffic situation permits. If you are

unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop

before operating the telephone.

146 Driving tips

Driving and parking

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a

distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-

ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuel

Observe the following tips to save fuel:

XThe tires should always be inflated to the rec-

ommended tire pressure.

XRemove unnecessary loads.

XRemove roof racks when they are not needed.

XWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.

XAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.

XHave all maintenance work carried out as

indicated by the service intervals in the Main-

tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-

play.

Fuel consumption also increases when driving in

cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-

rain.

Drinking and driving

GWARNING

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and

driving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can

affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-

ment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-

dent is greatly increased when you drink or

take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow

anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-

ing drugs.

Emission control

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with-

out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep

the level of poisonous components in exhaust

fumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency if

they are serviced exactly in accordance with the

manufacturer's specifications. Always have

work on the engine carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work

relevant to safety or on safety-related systems

must be carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The engine settings must not be changed under

any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific

service work must be carried out at regular

intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-

Benz service requirements. Details can be found

in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display shows you how economical

your driving style is. The ECO display assists you

in achieving the most economical driving style

for the selected settings and prevailing condi-

tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-

ence the vehicle's consumption.

:Acceleration

;Coasting

=Constant

?Additional range achieved

Range ?is shown under Bonus fr. Start and

represents the additional range achieved since

the beginning of the journey as a result of an

adapted driving style.

If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve

range, the Reserve Fuel display message is

shown instead of range ?in the multifunction

Driving tips 147

Driving and parking

display. The 8warning lamp in the instru-

ment cluster also lights up (Ypage 247).

The ECO display consists of three sections, with

an inner and outer area. The sections corre-

spond to the following three categories:

:Acceleration (evaluation of all accel-

eration processes):

Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: moderate

acceleration, especially at higher

speeds

Rthe outer area empties and the

inner area is gray: sporty acceler-

ation

;Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-

tion processes):

Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: anticipatory

driving, keeping your distance and

early release of the accelerator.

The vehicle can coast without use

of the brakes.

Rthe outer area empties and the

inner area is gray: frequent heavy

braking

=Constant (continuous evaluation

over the entire journey):

Rthe outer area fills up and the inner

area lights up green: constant

speed and avoidance of unneces-

sary acceleration and deceleration

Rthe outer area empties and the

inner area is gray: fluctuations in

speed

The three inner areas display the current driving

style and light up green as a result of a particu-

larly economical driving style. Depending on the

driving situation, up to two areas may light up

simultaneously.

At the beginning of the journey, the three outer

areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-

nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more

economical driving style. If the three outer areas

are completely filled at the same time, the driver

has adopted the most economical driving style

for the selected settings and prevailing condi-

tions. The ECO display border lights up.

The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel

consumption. The additionally achieved range

displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not

indicate a fixed consumption reduction.

In addition to driving style, the actual consump-

tion is affected by other factors, such as:

Rload

RTire pressure

RCold start

RChoice of route

RActive electrical consumers

These factors are not included in the ECO dis-

play.

An economical driving style specially requires

driving at moderate engine speeds.

Achieving a higher value in the categories

"Acceleration" and "Constant":

Robserve the gearshift recommendations

Rdrive using drive program E

On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the

highway, only the outer area for "constant" will

change.

The ECO display summarizes the driving style

from the start of the journey to its completion.

Therefore, there are more marked changes in

the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-

ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more

marked changes, perform a manual rest

(Ypage 198).

For further information on the ECO display, see

(Ypage 197).

Braking

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in

an attempt to increase the engine's braking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-

ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

!On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a

lower gear in good time. This allows you to

take advantage of the engine's braking effect.

148 Driving tips

Driving and parking

This helps you to avoid overheating the

brakes and wearing them out excessively.

When you take advantage of engine braking, a

drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.

on a slippery road surface. This could cause

damage to the drive train. This type of damage

is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-

ranty.

Heavy and light loads

GWARNING

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, the braking system can overheat. This

increases the stopping distance and can even

cause the braking system to fail. There is a

risk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never

depress the brake pedal and the accelerator

pedal at the same time.

!Depressing the brake pedal constantly

results in excessive and premature wear to

the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy

load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive

on for a short while. This allows the airflow to

cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain

without braking, there may be a delayed reac-

tion from the brakes when braking for the first

time. This may also occur after the vehicle has

been washed or driven through deep water.

You have to depress the brake pedal more

firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the

vehicle in front.

After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle

washed, brake firmly while paying attention to

the traffic conditions. This will warm up the

brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly

and protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-

treated roads

If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-

due may form on the brake discs and brake

pads. This can result in a significantly longer

braking distance.

RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the

brakes occasionally while paying attention to

the traffic conditions.

RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.

RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes

!The brake fluid level may be too low, if:

Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster and

Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is

running

Observe additional warning messages in the

multifunction display.

The brake fluid level may be too low due to

brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked immediately.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop to

arrange this.

!Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-

formance tests may only be carried out on a 2-

axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the

vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-

sult a qualified specialist workshop in

advance. You could otherwise damage the

drive train or the brake system.

!Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP®system

operates automatically. If the electric parking

brake is tested on a brake dynamometer, the

engine and ignition must be switched off: turn

the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position

uor 1or press the Start/Stop button

repeatedly in accordance with the given

SmartKey positions.

Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may

cause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake

system must be carried out at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Have brake pads installed and brake fluid

replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake system has only been subject to

moderate loads, you should test the functional-

ity of your brakes at regular intervals.

Information on BAS (Brake Assist System)

(Ypage 65) and Active Brake Assist with cross-

traffic function (Ypage 71).

Driving tips 149

Driving and parking

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends only installing the following brake disks

and brake pads/linings:

Rbrake disks that have been approved by

Mercedes-Benz

Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent

standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can

compromise the safety of your vehicle.

Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/

linings on an axle at the same time. Always

install new brake pads/linings when replacing

brake disks.

The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake

disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and

threaded connection is matched.

The use of brake disks other than those

approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the

track width and is subject to approval, if appli-

cable.

Shock-type loads when handling the brake

discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead

to a reduction in comfort when driving with light-

weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on

the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the

brake plate.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use

brake fluid that has been specially approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-

sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake

fluid which has not been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an

equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's

operating safety.

High-performance and ceramic brakes

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy

loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This

will depend on:

RSpeed

RBraking force

REnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-

ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake

system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake

discs, depends on the individual driving style

and operating conditions.

For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-

age that will be valid under all circumstances. An

aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.

You can obtain more information on this from a

qualified specialist workshop.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only

reach their optimum braking effect after several

hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for

this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and

braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-

ingly high brake wear. If the brake pads/linings

have reached their wear limit, the multifunction

display shows a corresponding message. Espe-

cially for high performance driving, it is impor-

tant to maintain and have the brake system

checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

If water has accumulated to a certain depth on

the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-

planing occurring, even if:

Ryou drive at low speeds

Rthe tires have adequate tread depth

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in

conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,

you must drive in the following manner:

Rlower your speed

Ravoid ruts

Ravoid sudden steering movements

Rbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads

!Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front

or in the opposite direction create waves. This

may cause the maximum permissible water

depth to be exceeded.

Failure to observe these notes may result in

damage to the engine, electrical systems and

transmission.

If you have to drive on stretches of road on which

water has collected, please bear in mind that:

Rin the case of standing water, the water level

may be no higher than the lower edge of the

vehicle body

Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace

150 Driving tips

Driving and parking

Winter driving

GWARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in

an attempt to increase the engine's braking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-

ing on a slippery road surface.

GDANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate

ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the

vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating

running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area

around the vehicle are clear of snow. To

ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a

window on the side of the vehicle that is not

facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-

faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and

braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be

stopped when moving at low speed:

XShift the transmission to position i.

The outside temperature indicator is not

designed to serve as an ice-warning device and

is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing

point do not guarantee that the road surface is

free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in

wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could

skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always

adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to

suit the prevailing weather conditions.

You should pay special attention to road condi-

tions when temperatures are around freezing

point.

For more information on driving with snow

chains, see (Ypage 315).

For more information on driving with summer

tires, see (Ypage 314).

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-

tion (Ypage 314).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-

vative driver assistance and safety systems

which enhance comfort and support the driver in

critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-

nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-

stone on the path towards autonomous driving.

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all

elements of active and passive safety in one well

thought out system – for the safety of the vehi-

cle occupants and that of other road users.

Further information on driving safety systems

(Ypage 64).

Cruise control

General notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road speed

for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid

exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower

gear in good time on long and steep downhill

gradients. This is especially important if the

vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use

of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves

the load on the brake system and prevents the

brakes from overheating and wearing too

quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-

ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady

speed for a prolonged period. You can store any

road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes

Cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an

accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor

override the laws of physics. Cruise control can-

not take into account the road, traffic and

weather conditions. Cruise control is only an

aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe

distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle

Driving systems 151

Driving and parking

speed, for braking in good time and for staying in

lane.

Do not use cruise control:

Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in

heavy traffic or on winding roads

Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-

erating could cause the drive wheels to lose

traction and the vehicle could then skid

Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new

driver of the speed stored.

iThe speed indicated in the speedometer

may differ slightly from the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

:Activates or increases speed

;Activates or reduces speed

=Deactivates cruise control

?Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed

When you activate cruise control, the stored

speed is shown in the multifunction display for

five seconds. The ésymbol appears on the

multifunction display.

Speedometer with segments: when cruise

control is activated, the segments from the

stored speed to the end of the scale light up.

Storing and maintaining the current

speed

You can store the current speed if you are driv-

ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

XAccelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

XBriefly press the cruise control lever up :or

down ;.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-

matically maintains the stored speed.

iCruise control may be unable to maintain

the stored speed on uphill gradients. The

stored speed is resumed when the gradient

evens out. Cruise control maintains the

stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-

matically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up

the last stored speed

GWARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it is lower

than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-

ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the

vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There

is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-

tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The first time cruise control is activated, it

stores the current speed or regulates the

speed of the vehicle to the previously stored

speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment

until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to

the speed set.

XPress the cruise control lever up :for a

higher speed or down ;for a lower speed.

XTo adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-

ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press

152 Driving systems

Driving and parking

the cruise control lever up :or down ;to

the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

XTo adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-

ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up :or down ;

beyond the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

iCruise control is not deactivated if you

depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-

ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the

vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after

you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-

trol:

XBriefly press the cruise control lever forward

XBrake.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

Ryou engage the electric parking brake

Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)

RESP®intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Ryou shift the transmission to position i

while driving

If cruise control is deactivated, a warning tone

sounds. You will see the Cruise Control Off

message in the multifunction display for approx-

imately five seconds. The message on the mul-

tifunction display disappears and the segments

on the speedometer go out.

iWhen you switch off the engine, the last

speed stored is cleared.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

General notes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed

and automatically helps you maintain the dis-

tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles

are detected with the aid of the radar sensor

system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-

matically so that the set speed is not exceeded.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long

and steep downhill gradients. This is especially

important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you

will make use of the braking effect of the engine.

This relieves the load on the brake system and

prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-

ing too quickly.

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is

a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually

and acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis-

tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli-

sion. An intermittent warning tone will then

sound and the distance warning lamp will light

up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately

in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in

front or take evasive action provided it is safe to

do so.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range

between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph

(200 km/h).

Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC while driv-

ing on roads with steep gradients.

Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar

waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of

the responsible authorities. You can refer to the

relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if

questions are asked about this.

iUSA only: This device has been approved by

the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The

radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-

motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-

ing, or altering of the device will void any war-

ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do

not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

iCanada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device

will void any warranties, and is not permitted.

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Driving systems153

Driving and parking

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to:

Rpeople or animals

Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped

or parked vehicles

Roncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may

neither give warnings nor intervene in such

situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

GWARNING

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always

clearly identify other road users and complex

traffic situations.

In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:

Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicle

Rneither give a warning nor intervene

Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly

There is a risk of an accident.

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to

brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

warns you.

GWARNING

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle

with up to 50% of the maximum possible

deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi-

cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you

with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a

risk of an accident.

Apply the brakes yourself in these situations

and try to take evasive action.

!When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

HOLD function are activated, the vehicle

brakes automatically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

these systems in the following or similar sit-

uations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce

the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your

driving style nor override the laws of physics.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis-

tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are

responsible for maintaining a safe distance to

the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak-

ing in good time and for staying in lane.

Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:

Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in

heavy traffic or on winding roads

Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-

erating could cause the drive wheels to lose

traction and the vehicle could then skid

Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-

row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or

vehicles driving on a different line.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rthere is snow or heavy rain

Rthere is interference by other radar sources

Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-

ple in parking garages

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a

vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate

to the speed stored.

This speed may:

Rbe too high if you are driving in a turning lane

or an exit lane

Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving on the left (in countries where

they drive on the right)

Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving on the right (in countries where

they drive on the left)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new

driver of the speed stored.

154 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Cruise control lever

:Activates or increases speed

;Activates or reduces speed

=Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

?Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed

ASets a specified minimum distance

When you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,

the stored speed will appear on the multifunc-

tion display for five seconds.

Speedometer with segments: when Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, the segments of

the stored speed light up to the end of the scale

or to a permanently set speed limit.

Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

Activation conditions

To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol-

lowing conditions must be fulfilled:

Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to

two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC is ready for use.

Rthe electric parking brake must be released.

RESP®must be activated, but not intervening

at present.

RParking Pilot must not be activated.

Rthe transmission must be in position h.

Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift the transmission from position jto h

or your seat belt must be fastened.

Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must

be closed.

Rthe vehicle must not slide.

Activating

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?or push it up :or down ;.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the

vehicle in front, but only up to the desired

stored speed.

If you do not fully release the accelerator

pedal, the Distance Pilot Suspended mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in

front will then not be maintained. You will be

driving at the speed you determine by the

position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

when stationary. The lowest speed that can be

set is 20 mph (30 km/h).

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?or push it up :or down ;.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.

Activating at the current speed/last

stored speed

GWARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it differs

from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates. If you do not know the

stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or

brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-

tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is

activated, it stores the current speed or reg-

ulates the speed of the vehicle to the previ-

ously stored speed.

Driving systems 155

Driving and parking

DrivingwithDistance PilotDISTRONIC

Pullingawayanddriving

XTo pull awaywithDistance Pilot

DISTRONIC: removeyour foot from thebrake

pedal.

XBriefly pull thecruise controllever towards

you ?.

XAcceleratebriefly.

The vehicle pulls away and adaptsitsspeed to

that of thevehicle in front. If no vehicle is

detectedin front, your vehicle accelerates to

thestored speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing

an unidentifiedobstacleor is drivingon adiffer-

entlinefrom another vehicle. The vehicle then

brakesautomatically.

If DistancePilotDISTRONIC doesnotdetect a

vehicle in front, thesystemoperates likecruise

control.

If DistancePilotDISTRONIC detects that the

vehicle in fronthas slowed down,it brakesthe

vehicle. In this way, thespecifiedminimum dis-

tanceyou haveselectedis maintained.

If DistancePilotDISTRONIC detects afaster-

movingvehicle in front, it increasesthedriving

speed to theset speed.

Selecting thedrive program

DistancePilotDISTRONIC supports asporty

drivingstyle when you haveselectedtheSor S+

drive program (Ypage 136). Acceleration

behindthevehicle in frontor to theset speed is

then noticeably more dynamic.If you have

selectedtheCor Edrivingprogram, thevehicle

accelerates more gently. Thissetting is recom-

mended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changinglanes

If you changeto theovertakinglane, Distance

PilotDISTRONIC supports you if:

Ryou are drivingfasterthan 45 mph (70 km/h)

Ryou switch on theappropriateturnsignal

RDistancePilotDISTRONICdoes notcurrently

detect a danger of collision

If these conditionsare fulfilled,your vehicleis

accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if

changinglanes takes toolongor if thedistance

between your vehicleand thevehiclein front

becomestoosmall.

Whenyou changelanes, DistancePilot

DISTRONICmonitors theleftlane(on left-hand-

drive vehicles) or theright lane(on right-hand-

drive vehicles).

Stopping

GWARNING

If you leavethevehiclewhen it is only being

braked by DistancePilotDISTRONIC, it could

rollaway if:

Rthere is amalfunction in thesystem or in

thevoltagesupply.

RDistancePilotDISTRONICis switched off

usingthecruise control lever, e.g. by avehi-

cle occupant or from outside thevehicle

Rtheelectricalsystem in theenginecom-

partment, thebattery or thefuses are tam-

pered with.

Rthebattery is disconnected

Rthevehicleis accelerated, e.g. by avehicle

occupant.

There is ariskof an accident.

Beforeleavingthevehicle, always deactivate

DistancePilotDISTRONICand secure the

vehicleagainst rollingaway.

Further information on deactivatingDistance

PilotDISTRONIC (Ypage 158).

If DistancePilotDISTRONICdetects that the

vehiclein frontis stopping,it brakes your vehicle

to astop.

Once your vehicleis stationary, it remainssta-

tionary and you do notneed to depress the

brake.

After a time, theelectric parkingbrakesecures

thevehicleand relieves theservicebrake.

Dependingon thespecified minimum distance,

your vehiclewill come to astandstill at asuffi-

cient distancebehind thevehiclein front. The

specified minimum distanceis set usingthe

control on thecruise control lever.

156 Driving systems

Driving and parking

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,

the transmission shifts automatically to position

jif:

Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the

driver's door is open.

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle

automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is

activated when the vehicle is stationary and:

Ra system malfunction occurs.

Rthe power supply is insufficient.

If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may

also be shifted to position jautomatically.

Setting a speed

XPush cruise control lever up :for a higher

speed or down ;for a lower speed.

XTo adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-

ments (1 km/h increments): briefly push

the cruise control lever up :or down ;to

the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

XTo adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-

ments (10 km/h increments): briefly push

the cruise control lever up :or down ;

beyond the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;, the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

iIf you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the

last speed stored after you have finished over-

taking.

Setting a specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distance for

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time

span between one and two seconds. With this

function you can set the minimum distance that

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi-

cle in front, depending on vehicle speed. You

can see this distance in the multifunction dis-

play (Ypage 158).

Make sure that you maintain the minimum dis-

tance to the vehicle in front as required by law.

Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if nec-

essary.

XTo increase: turn control ;in direction =.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a

greater distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front.

XTo decrease: turn control ;in direction :.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a

shorter distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in

front, segments between speed of the vehicle in

front :and stored speed ;light up.

Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus

package: the segments likewise light up if a

vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane.

For design reasons, the speed displayed in the

speedometer may differ slightly from the speed

set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.

Driving systems 157

Driving and parking

Displaysin theassistancegraphic

Display when DistancePilotDISTRONIC

is deactivated

:Vehiclein front, if detected

;Distanceindicator, currentdistanceto the

vehiclein front

=Specified minimum distanceto thevehicle

in front; adjustable

?Your vehicle

Display when DistancePilotDISTRONIC

is activated

:DistancePilotDISTRONIC active (textonly

appears when thecruise control lever is

actuated)

;Vehiclein front, if detected

=Specified minimum distanceto thevehicle

in front; adjustable

?Your vehicle

XTo call up theassistancegraphic: select

theAssistanceGraphicfunction usingthe

on-boardcomputer (Ypage 203).

The multifunction display shows thestored

speed forapproximately fiveseconds when

you activateDistancePilotDISTRONIC.

Deactivating DistancePilot DISTRONIC

There are severalways to deactivateDistance

PilotDISTRONIC:

XBriefly push cruise control lever forward:.

XBrake,unless thevehicleis stationary

Whenyou deactivateDistancePilotDISTRONIC,

theDistance Pilot Off message will appear

on themultifunction display forapproximately

fiveseconds.

The last speed storedremainsstoreduntil you

switch offtheengine.

DistancePilotDISTRONIC is notdeactivated if

you depress theacceleratorpedal.

DistancePilotDISTRONIC is automatically deac-

tivated if:

Ryou engage theelectric parkingbrakeor if the

vehicleis automatically secured withtheelec-

tric parkingbrake

RESP®intervenes or you deactivateESP®

Ryou shift thetransmissionto position j,k

or i

Ryou pull thecruise control lever towardsyou

in order to pull away and thefront-passenger

dooror oneof thereardoors is open

Rthevehicleslips

Ryou activateParking Pilot

If,in these cases, DistancePilotDISTRONIC is

deactivated, awarningtone sounds. The Dis‐

tance Pilot Off message will then be shown

on themultifunction display forapproximately

fiveseconds.

158 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Tips for driving with Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC

Pay particular attention in the following traffic

situations:

RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the

ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect

vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi-

cle may brake unexpectedly or late.

RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are

not driving in the middle of their lane. The dis-

tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-

ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be

too short.

RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

has not yet detected the vehicle in front on

the edge of the road because of its narrow

width. The distance to the vehicle in front will

be too short.

RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles

or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the

detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta-

cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis-

tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for

them.

RCrossing traffic: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

may mistakenly detect vehicles that are

crossing your lane. Activating Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with

crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to

pull away at the wrong time.

In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance

Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering

Pilot

General notes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot

aids you in keeping the vehicle in the middle of

the lane by means of moderate steering inter-

ventions in a speed range from 0 – 125 mph

(0 - 200 km/h).

It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by

means of multifunction camera :, fixed at the

top of the windshield.

In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),

Steering Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,

taking into account lane markings, e.g. when

following vehicles in a traffic jam.

At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),

Steering Pilot focuses on clear lane markings

(left and right), focusing on the vehicle in front

only if clear lane markings are not present.

If these conditions are not present, Steering

Pilot cannot provide assistance.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be active in

order for the function to be available.

Important safety notes

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and Steering Pilot can

neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail

to adapt your driving style nor override the laws

of physics. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with

Steering Pilot cannot take into account road,

weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot is only an aid.

You are responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,

for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot

does not detect road and traffic conditions and

does not detect all road users. If you are follow-

ing a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of

the road, your vehicle could come into contact

Driving systems159

Driving and parking

with the curb or other road boundaries. Be par-

ticularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists,

that are directly next to your vehicle.

Obstacles such as traffic markers on a con-

struction site that are on the lane or projecting

out into the lane are not detected.

An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after

intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be

corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the

opposite direction.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Pilot cannot

continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some

cases, steering intervention is not sufficient to

bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases,

you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure

that it does not leave the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function

if:

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient

illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,

fog or spray

Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the

sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if

the road surface is wet)

Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-

ity of the camera

Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings

for one lane, e.g. roadworks

Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-

ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short

and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-

ted

Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes

branch off, cross one another or merge

Rthe road is narrow and winding

Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on

the roadway

The system is switched to passive and no longer

assists you by performing steering interventions

if:

Ryou actively change lane

Ryou switch on the turn signal

Ryou take your hands off the steering wheel or

do not steer for a prolonged period of time

After you have finished changing lanes, Steering

Pilot is automatically active once more.

Steering Pilot cannot provide assistance:

Ron very sharp corners

Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire

has been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notes

on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Ypage 154).

The steering interventions are carried out with a

limited steering moment. The system requires

the driver to keep his hands on the steering

wheel and to steer himself.

If you do not steer yourself or if you take your

hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged

period of time, the system will first alert you with

a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol

appears in the multifunction display. If you have

still not started to steer and have not taken hold

of the steering wheel, a warning tone also

sounds to remind you to take control of the

vehicle after five seconds at the latest. Steering

Pilot is then switched to passive. Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC remains active.

Activating Steering Pilot

XPress button ;.

Indicator lamp :lights up. The Steering

Pilot On message appears on the multifunc-

tion display. Steering Pilot is activated.

160 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Pilot is activated but not ready for a

steering intervention, steering wheel symbol :

appears in gray. If the system provides you with

support by means of steering interventions,

symbol :is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Pilot

XPress button ;.

Indicator lamp :goes out. The Steering

Pilot Off message appears on the multi-

function display. Steering pilot is deactivated.

When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated

or not available, Steering Pilot is deactivated

automatically.

HOLD function

General notes

The HOLD function can assist the driver in the

following situations:

Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes

Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes

Rwhen waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver

having to depress the brake pedal.

The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD

function deactivated when you depress the

accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away

despite being braked by the HOLD function if:

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.

Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by

pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake

pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses have

been tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected

There is a risk of an accident.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

the HOLD function and secure the vehicle

against rolling away.

!When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-

tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-

ically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in

the following or similar situations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (Ypage 162).

Activation conditions

You can activate the HOLD function if all of the

following conditions are fulfilled:

Rthe vehicle is stationary.

Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function.

Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is

fastened.

Rthe electric parking brake is released.

Rthe transmission is in position h,kor i.

RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Driving systems 161

Driving and parking

Activating the HOLD function

XMakesurethat theactivation conditionsare

met.

XDepress thebrakepedal.

XQuicklydepress thebrakepedal further

until :appearsin themultifunction display.

The HOLD function is activated. You can

release thebrakepedal.

If depressing thebrakepedal thefirst time does

notactivatetheHOLD function,wait brieflyand

then tryagain.

Deactivating the HOLD function

The HOLD function is deactivated automatically

if:

Ryou depress theacceleratorand thetrans-

mission is in position hor k

Rthetransmission is in position j

Ryou depress thebrakepedal again with a cer-

tainamount of pressureuntil display ë

disappearsfrom themultifunction display

Ryou secure thevehicleusingtheelectric park-

ing brake.

Ryou activateDISTRONICPLUS

After a time, theelectric parking brakesecures

thevehicleand relieves theservicebrake.

When theHOLD function is activated, thetrans-

mission is shiftedautomatically to position j

if:

Rthedriver's seat belt is notfastenedand the

driver's door is open.

Rtheengineis switched off,unless it is auto-

matically switched off by theECO start/stop

function.

The electric parking brakesecures thevehicle

automatically if theHOLD function is activated

when thevehicleis stationary and:

Rasystem malfunction occurs.

Rthepowersupply is insufficient.

If amalfunction occurs, thetransmission may

also be shiftedto position jautomatically.

RACE START

Important safety notes

iRACE START mustnotbe used on normal

roads. RACE START mustonly be activated

and used on dedicated road circuits, outside

of public road use.

iRACE START is only available for Mercedes-

AMGvehicles except Mercedes-AMG C 43

4MATIC.

RACE START enables optimal acceleration from

astanding start.Forthis, asuitably high-grip

road surfaceis requiredand thevehicleand tires

mustbe in goodworking order.

GWARNING

If you use RACE START,individual tires may

start to spin and thevehiclecould skid.

Dependingon theselected ESP®mode, there

is an increased riskof skiddingand having an

accident. Makesurethat no persons, animals

or obstacles are within range of thevehicle.

iObservethesafetynoteson drivingsafety

systems (Ypage 64).

Be sureto read thesafetynotesand informa-

tion on ESP®(Ypage 67).

Conditions for activation

You can activateRACE START if:

Rthedoorsare closed.

Rtheengineis runningand it has reached an

operating temperature of approximately

160 ‡ (71 †). This is thecasewhen theoil

temperature gauge in themultifunction dis-

play is shown in white.

Rthedrive program S,S+ or Race is selected.

(Ypage 130)

Rthesteering wheelis in thestraight-ahead

position.

162 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is

depressed (left foot).

Rthe transmission is in position h

Activating RACE START

iWhen manual mode (Ypage 138) is active,

the transmission automatically shifts up to

RACE START in the drive program. This func-

tion supports maximum acceleration with

RACE START. After going through an acceler-

ating process once from a stationary position,

this function is automatically deactivated.

XDepress the brake pedal with your left foot

and keep it depressed.

XPull and hold both steering wheel paddle shift-

ers (Ypage 138).

The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP

Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in

the multifunction display.

XRelease both steering wheel paddle shifters

(Ypage 138).

iIf the activation conditions are no longer ful-

filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE

START Canceled message appears in the

multifunction display.

XTo cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle

shifter (Ypage 138).

XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-

dle shifter (Ypage 138).

The RACE START Available Depress gas

pedal. message appears in the multifunction

display.

iIf you do not depress the accelerator pedal

fully within two seconds, RACE START is can-

celed. The RACE START Not Possible See

Operator's Manual message appears in the

multifunction display.

XDepress the accelerator pedal completely,

until the engine speed stops increasing.

The RACE START Release brake to start

message appears in the multifunction display.

iIf you do not release the brake pedal within

five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The

RACE START Canceled message appears in

the multifunction display.

XTake your foot off the brake, but keep the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-

ation.

The RACE START Active message appears in

the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle

reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-

ada: 50 km/h).

RACE START is deactivated immediately if you

release the accelerator pedal during RACE

START or if any of the activation conditions are

no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐

sible See Operator's Manual or RACE

START Canceled message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

iIf RACE START is used repeatedly within a

short period of time, it is only available again

after the vehicle has been driven a certain

distance.

AIRMATIC

General notes

AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable

damping for improved driving comfort. All-round

level control ensures the best possible suspen-

sion and constant ground clearance, even with a

laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is

lowered automatically to improve driving safety

and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also

the option to manually adjust the vehicle level.

AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control

and ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with

continuous damping adjustment).

The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC

SELECT switch (Ypage 130) or the level button

(Ypage 164). The setting always corresponds

to the last selected function.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When the vehicle is being lowered, people

could become trapped if their limbs are

between the vehicle body and the wheels or

underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of

injury.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or

in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches

when the vehicle is being lowered.

iIf one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not

lowered.

Driving systems163

Driving and parking

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal"

and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of

50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting

for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving

with snow chains or on particularly poor road

surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if

you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XStart the engine.

If indicator lamp ;is not lit:

XPress button :.

Indicator lamp ;lights up. The vehicle is

raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the

normal level.

The Vehicle Rising message appears on

the multifunction display.

iThe message disappears after ten seconds,

irrespective of the level reached. If necessary,

the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:

Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h).

Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a

speed over 50 mph (80 km/h).

The "Raised level" remains active when you are

not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal vehicle level

XStart the engine.

If indicator lamp ;is lit:

XPress button :.

Indicator lamp ;goes out. The vehicle is

adjusted to the height of the currently selec-

ted drive program (Ypage 130).

Suspension tuning

General notes

The Adaptive Damping System with continuous

damping adjustment (ADS PLUS) automatically

controls the calibration of the dampers.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel

and depends on:

Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty

Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps

Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-

fort

Your selection remains stored even if you

remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

In the S(Sport) and S+ (Sport Plus) drive pro-

grams, the firmer suspension tuning ensures

even better contact with the road. Select this

mode when employing a sporty driving style,

e.g. on winding country roads.

XSelect the Sor S+ drive program with the

DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Ypage 130).

The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) com-

pared to the normal level.

Comfort tuning

In the Eand Cdrive programs, the driving char-

acteristics of your vehicle are more comforta-

ble. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a

164 Driving systems

Driving and parking

more comfortable driving style. Select comfort

mode also when driving fast on straight roads,

e.g. on straight stretches of highway.

XSelect the Eor Cdrive program with the

DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Ypage 130).

The vehicle is raised to the normal level.

When driving at speeds above 78 mph

(125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low-

ered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the Eand Cdrive pro-

grams. When driving at speeds below 50 mph

(80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-

tem

General notes

The electronically controlled damping system

works continuously. This improves driving

safety and ride comfort.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel

and depends on:

Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty

Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps

Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or

Comfort

The suspension setting is adjusted using the

corresponding button in the center console.

iThe mode can also be set using the

DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Ypage 130).

This is only possible if:

Rusing the AMG adaptive sport suspension

system button on the center console, and

Rusing the DYNAMIC SELECT switch, the

same mode is selected for the chassis. This

is the case, for example, when both are set

to Comfort mode.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Ypage 125).

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in

Sport mode ensures even better contact with

the road. Select this mode when employing a

sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country

roads.

XPress button :.

Indicator lamp =lights up. You have selected

Sport mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display.

Sport + mode

The very firm setting of the suspension setting in

Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact

with the road. Select this mode only when driv-

ing on race circuits.

If indicator lamps ;and =are off:

XPress button :twice.

Indicator lamps ;and =light up. You have

selected Sport + mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp =lights up:

XPress button :once.

Second indicator lamp ;lights up. You have

selected Sport + mode.

The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort mode

In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of

your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this

mode if you favor a comfortable driving style.

This mode is also suitable if you are driving fast

on straight roads, such as on straight stretches

of a highway.

Driving systems 165

Driving and parking

XPress button :repeatedly until indicator

lamps ;and =go out.

You have selected Comfort mode.

The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all four

wheels. Together with ESP®, it improves the

traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel

spins due to insufficient grip.

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are

inattentive, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk

of an accident nor override the laws of physics.

4MATIC does not take into account

Rthe road and weather conditions

Rthe traffic situation

4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for

the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle

speed, for braking in good time and for staying in

your lane.

If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:

ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary when pulling away.

RAccelerate less when driving.

!Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.

This may damage the transfer case. Damage

of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must

remain either on the ground or be fully raised.

Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-

cle with all wheels in full contact with the

ground.

iIn wintry driving conditions, the maximum

effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you

use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains

if necessary.

Parking Pilot

General notes

Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with

ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides

of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit-

able parking space. Active steering intervention

and brake application can assist you during

parking and when exiting a parking space. You

can also still use Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

(Ypage 170).

Important safety notes

Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replace-

ment for your attention to your immediate sur-

roundings. You are always responsible for safe

maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking

space. Make sure that no persons, animals or

objects are in the maneuvering range.

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-

ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.

GWARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking

space, the vehicle swings out and can drive

onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could

result in a collision with another road user.

There is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to other road users. Stop the

vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot

parking procedure.

!If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-

cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp

angle. Otherwise, you may damage the

wheels or tires.

Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suita-

ble for parking, e.g.:

Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited

Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits

Ron unsuitable surfaces

Parking tips:

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking

space as possible.

RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown

might be identified or measured incorrectly.

RParking spaces that are partially occupied by

trailer drawbars might not be identified as

such or be measured incorrectly.

RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking

space being measured inaccurately.

RPay attention to the warning messages of

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the park-

ing procedure (Ypage 171).

RYou can intervene in the steering procedure

to correct it at any time. Parking Pilot is then

canceled.

166 Driving systems

Driving and parking

RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from

your vehicle, you should not use Parking Pilot

RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are

installed.

RAlways pay attention to the specified tire

pressure for your vehicle. This has a direct

influence on the parking characteristics of the

vehicle.

Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:

Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of

travel

Ron straight roads, not bends

Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the

pavement

Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the detection range of

Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park-

ing space is measured. These are not taken into

account when the parking procedure is calcula-

ted, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or load-

ing ramps of trucks.

GWARNING

If there are objects above the detection range:

RParking Pilot may steer in too early

Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these

objects

You may cause a collision as a result. There is

a risk of an accident.

If objects are located above the detection

range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.

For further information on the detection range

(Ypage 170).

Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in

spaces at a right angle to the direction of travel

if:

Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next

to one another

Rthe parking space is directly next to a low

obstacle such as a low curb

Ryou forward-park

Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in

spaces parallel with or at a right angle to the

direction of travel if:

Rthe parking space is on a curb

Rthe system reads the parking space as being

blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-

ing blocks

Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-

ver into

Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,

e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

:Detected parking space on the left

;Parking symbol

=Detected parking space on the right

Parking Pilot is activated automatically when

driving forward. The system is operational at

speeds of up to approximately 22 mph

(35 km/h). While in operation, the system inde-

pendently locates and measures parking spaces

on both sides of the vehicle.

Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces

which are:

Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of

travel

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and

at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and

at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-

cle

Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at

least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle

iNote that Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC cannot

measure the depth of parking spaces if they

are at right angles to the direction of travel.

You will need to judge whether your vehicle

will fit into the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph

(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ;as a

Driving systems 167

Driving and parking

status indicator on the instrument cluster. When

a parking space has been detected, an arrow

towards the right or the left also appears. Park-

ing Pilot only displays parking spaces on the

front-passenger side as standard. Parking

spaces on the driver's side are displayed as

soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is

activated. When parking on the driver's side,

this must remain activated until you confirm the

use of Parking Pilot by pressing the abutton

on the multifunction steering wheel. The system

automatically determines whether the parking

space is parallel or at right angles to the direc-

tion of travel.

A parking space is displayed while you are driv-

ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft

(15 m) away from it.

Parking

GWARNING

If you leave the vehicle when it is only being

braked by Parking Pilot, it could roll away if:

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.

Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-

pered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected.

Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle

occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.

Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it

against rolling away.

iIf Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects

obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically

whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are

responsible for braking in good time.

XStop the vehicle when the parking space sym-

bol shows the desired parking space in the

instrument cluster.

XShift the transmission to position k.

The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:

%message appears on the multifunction

display.

XTo cancel the procedure: press the %

button on the multifunction steering wheel or

pull away.

XParking using Parking Pilot: press button

aon the multifunction steering wheel.

The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate

and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.

XBack up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all

times. When backing up, drive at a speed

below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-

erwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.

Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill

when the vehicle approaches the rear border

of the parking space.

Maneuvering may be required in tight parking

spaces.

The Parking Pilot Active Select D

Observe Surroundings message appears on

the multifunction display.

XShift the transmission to position hwhen

the vehicle is stationary.

Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other

direction.

The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate

and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

iYou will achieve the best results by waiting

for the steering procedure to complete before

pulling away.

XDrive forwards and be ready to brake at all

times.

Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill

when the vehicle approaches the front border

of the parking space.

Maneuvering may be required in tight parking

spaces.

The Parking Pilot Active Select R

Observe Surroundings message appears on

the multifunction display.

As soon as the parking procedure is complete,

the Parking Pilot Finished message

appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle

is now parked.

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver

having to depress the brake pedal. The braking

effect is canceled when you depress the accel-

erator pedal.

168 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer-

ing interventions and brake applications. When

Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and

brake again yourself. Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is still available.

Parking tips:

RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-

ing space after parking is dependent on vari-

ous factors. These include the position and

shape of the vehicles parked in front and

behind it and the conditions of the location. It

may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you

too far into a parking space, or not far enough

into it. In some cases, it may also lead you

across or onto the curb. Cancel the parking

procedure with Parking Pilot if necessary.

RYou can also prematurely select transmission

position h. The vehicle redirects and does

not drive as far into the parking space. Should

the transmission change take place too early,

the parking procedure is canceled. A sensible

parking position can no longer be achieved

from this position.

Exiting a parking space

In order for Parking Pilot to support you when

exiting the parking space:

Rthe border of the parking space must be high

enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too

small, for example.

Rthe border of the parking space must not be

too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered

into a position at a maximum of 45° to the

starting position in the parking space.

Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft

(1.0 m) must be available.

Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park-

ing space only if you have parked the vehicle

parallel to the direction of travel using the Park-

ing Pilot.

iIf Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects

obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically

whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.

You are responsible for braking in good time.

XStart the engine.

XRelease the electric parking brake.

XSwitch on the turn signal in the direction you

are pulling away.

XShift the transmission to position hor k.

The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:

%message appears on the multifunction

display.

XTo cancel the procedure: press the %

button on the multifunction steering wheel or

pull away.

XTo exit a parking space using Parking

Pilot: press the abutton on the multi-

function steering wheel.

The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate

and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-

sage appears on the multifunction display.

XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.

XPull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do

not exceed a maximum speed of approx-

imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-

ing space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is can-

celed immediately.

XDepending on the message or as required,

shift the transmission to position hor k.

Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other

direction. The Parking Pilot Active

Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐

roundings message appears on the multi-

function display.

iYou will achieve the best results by waiting

for the steering procedure to complete before

pulling away.

If you back up after activation, the steering

wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-

tion.

XDrive forwards and reverse as prompted by

the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-

plays, several times if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-

pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the

straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the

Parking Pilot Finished message appears

on the multifunction display. You will then have

to steer and merge into traffic on your own.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available.

You can take over the steering before the vehi-

cle has exited the parking space completely.

This is useful if you recognize that it is already

possible to pull out of the parking space.

Driving systems 169

Driving and parking

Canceling Active Parking Pilot

XStop the movement of the multifunction

steering wheel or steer yourself.

Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The

Parking Pilot Canceled message appears

on the multifunction display.

XPress the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC button

(Ypage 172).

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off

and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.

The Parking Pilot Canceled message

appears on the multifunction display.

Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when:

Rthe electric parking brake is engaged

Rtransmission position jis selected

Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos-

sible

Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)

Ra wheel spins, ESP®intervenes or fails. In

such cases the ÷warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-

appears and the multifunction display shows the

Parking Pilot Canceled message.

When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer

and brake again yourself.

If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is

braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the

accelerator again.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic

parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area

around your vehicle using six sensors in the

front bumper and six sensors in the rear

bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually

and audibly indicates the distance between your

vehicle and an object.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is

not a replacement for your attention to your

immediate surroundings. You are always

responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and

exiting a parking space. Make sure that there

are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu-

vering area while maneuvering and parking in/

leaving parking spaces.

!When parking, pay particular attention to

objects above or below the sensors, such as

flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects

when they are in the immediate vicinity of the

vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the

objects.

The sensors may not detect snow and other

objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car

wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or

a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC to malfunction.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function

correctly on uneven terrain.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-

matically when you:

Rswitch on the ignition

Rshift the transmission to position h,kor

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at

speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-

ted at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into

account obstacles located:

Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-

mals or objects.

Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging

loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks.

:Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side

(example)

170 Driving systems

Driving and parking

:Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners)

;Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)

=Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)

?Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.

They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean

the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch

or damage them (Ypage 292).

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-

evant warning displays light up and a warning

tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-

imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

:Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle

;Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-

cle

=Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distance

between the sensors and the obstacle. The

warning display for the front area is in the instru-

ment cluster. The warning display for the rear

area is located on the headliner in the rear com-

partment.

The warning display for each side of the vehicle

is divided into five yellow and two red segments.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if

operational readiness indicator =lights up.

The selected transmission position and the

direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-

mine which warning display is active when the

engine is running.

Transmission posi-

tion

Warning display

hFront area activated

k,ior the vehicle

is rolling backwards

Rear and front areas

activated

jNo areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-

cle's distance from the obstacle. In addition,

warning tones are issued.

When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,

you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The

shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter

the frequency of the intermittent warning tones

becomes. When the minimum distance is

reached, you hear a continuous warning tone.

Driving systems 171

Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

dSwitchon thedashboard

eSwitchin thecenter console

:Deactivates or activates Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

;Indicatorlamp

If indicator lamp ;lights up, Parking Assist

PARKTRONICis deactivated. Parking Pilotis

then also deactivated.

iParking AssistPARKTRONICis automati-

callyactivated when you turntheSmartKey to

position 2in theignition lock.

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Only thered segments in

theParking Assist

PARKTRONICwarning

displays are lit.You also

hear awarning tone for

approximately two sec-

onds.

Parking Assist

PARKTRONICis then

deactivated and theindi-

cator lamp on the

PARKTRONICbutton

lights up.

Parking AssistPARKTRONIChas malfunctioned and has been deacti-

vated.

XIf problemspersist, haveParking AssistPARKTRONICcheckedat a

qualified specialistworkshop.

Only thered segments in

theParking Assist

PARKTRONICwarning

displays are lit.Parking

AssistPARKTRONICis

then deactivated.

The Parking AssistPARKTRONICsensorsare dirty or there is inter-

ference.

XClean theParking AssistPARKTRONICsensors (Ypage 292).

XSwitchtheignition backon.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radioor ultra-

soundwaves.

XCheckto see if Parking AssistPARKTRONICworks at adifferent

location.

172 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera :is an optical parking and

maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind the

vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-

tem.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a

mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

iThe text shown in the multimedia system

depends on the language setting. The follow-

ing are examples of rear view camera displays

in the multimedia system.

Important safety notes

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a

replacement for your attention to your immedi-

ate surroundings. You are always responsible

for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure

that there are no persons, animals or objects in

the maneuvering area while maneuvering and

parking in parking spaces.

Under the following circumstances, the rear

view camera will not function, or will function in

a limited manner:

Rif the trunk lid is open

Rin heavy rain, snow or fog

Rat night or in very dark places

Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)

Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,

e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-

ter

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.

Observe the notes on cleaning

(Ypage 292)

Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this

case, have the camera position and setting

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rear

view camera may be restricted due to additional

accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.

license plate holder, rear bicycle rack).

The rear view camera is protected from rain-

drops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear

view camera is activated, this flap opens.

The flap closes again when:

Ryou have finished the maneuvering process

Ryou switch off the engine

Ryou open the trunk

Observe the notes on cleaning (Ypage 292).

For technical reasons, the flap may remain open

briefly after the rear view camera has been

deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera

XTo activate: make sure that the Activa‐

tion by R gear function is selected in the

multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

XEngage reverse gear.

The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-

media system shows the area behind the vehi-

cle with guide lines.

The image from the rear view camera is avail-

able throughout the maneuvering process.

XTo deactivate: shift the transmission to posi-

tion j.

XTo deactivate: Drive forwards at a speed

greater than 7 mph (12 km/h).

Multimedia display

The rear view camera may show a distorted view

of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.

The rear view camera does not show objects in

the following positions:

Rvery close to the rear bumper

Runder the rear bumper

Driving systems 173

Driving and parking

!Objects not at ground level may appear to

be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle

Rthe drawbar of a trailer

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Rthe rear section of an HGV

Ra slanted post

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Approach objects no further than the bottom-

most guideline.

:Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the

vehicle

;White guide lines without steering input,

vehicle width including the exterior mirrors

(static)

=Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including

the exterior mirrors, for current steering

input (dynamic)

?Yellow lanes marking the course the tires

will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic)

AYellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-

cle

BVehicle center axle (marker assistance)

CBumper

DRed guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

When the transmission is shifted to position k,

guide lines appear in the camera image.

The distance specifications only apply to

objects that are at ground level.

EFront warning display

FRear warning display

GAdditional vehicle icon as Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC measurement operational

readiness indicator

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC:

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-

tional, vehicle icon (Ypage 171), appears on the

multimedia system display G. If the Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active

or light up, warning displays Eand Fare also

active or light up correspondingly on the multi-

media system display.

174 Driving systems

Driving and parking

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space

without steering input

:White guide line without steering input –

vehicle width including the exterior mirrors

(static)

;Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including

the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current

steering input

=Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-

cle

?Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

XMake sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Ypage 173).

The lane and the guide lines appear.

XWith the help of white guide line :, check

whether the vehicle will fit into the parking

space.

XUsing white guide line :as a guide, carefully

back up until you reach the end position.

Red guide line ?is then at the end of the

parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel

in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-

ing input

XAfter driving past the parking space, stop the

vehicle safely.

XMake sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Ypage 173).

The lane and the guide lines appear in the

camera image.

XWhile the vehicle is stationary, turn the steer-

ing wheel in the direction of the parking space

until yellow guide lines ;reach parking

space marking :.

Yellow guide lines ;dynamically adapt to the

current steering input.

XMaintain the steering input and reverse care-

fully.

XStop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in

front of the parking space.

Driving systems 175

Driving and parking

:Parking space markings

=White guide lines – for current steering input

White guide lines =should be as close to par-

allel with parking space markings :as possi-

ble.

XTurn the steering wheel to the center position

while the vehicle is stationary.

?Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

AWhite guide lines – no steering input

BEnd of parking space

XBack up carefully until you have reached the

final position.

The red guide line ?is then at the end of the

parking space B. The vehicle is almost par-

allel in the parking space.

"Wide-angle" function

:Symbol for the wide-angle view function

;Your vehicle

=Warning displays for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

You can also use the rear view camera to select

a wide-angle view.

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-

tional (Ypage 171), a symbol for your own vehi-

cle appears in the multimedia system display. If

the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-

plays are active, warning displays =light up on

the multimedia system display in yellow or red

accordingly.

Object detection

The rear view camera helps detect moving and

stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle

or other obstacle) is detected, this object is

marked with a bar. Objects located some dis-

tance from the vehicle away are marked with a

yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very

small, the bar is displayed in red.

Object detection only works in wide-angle view.

To ensure that you can use the function, it must

be switched on in the multimedia system (see

the Digital Operator's Manual).

360° camera

General notes

The 360° camera is a system consisting of four

cameras.

176 Driving systems

Driving and parking

The system processes images from the follow-

ing cameras:

RRear view camera

RFront camera

RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors

The cameras cover the immediate surroundings

of the vehicle. The system supports you, for

example when parking or if vision is restricted at

an exit.

You can show images from the 360° camera in

full-screen mode or in six different split-screen

views on the multimedia system. A split-screen

view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This

view is calculated from the data supplied by the

installed cameras (virtual camera).

The six split-screen views are:

RTop view and picture from the rear view cam-

era (130° viewing angle)

RTop view and image from the front camera

(130° viewing angle without displaying the

maximum steering wheel angle)

RTop view and enlarged rear view

RTop view and enlarged front view

RTop view and images from the rear-facing side

cameras (rear wheel view)

RTop view and images from the forward-facing

side cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift the

transmission from hor kto i, the guide

lines on the multimedia system are hidden.

When you shift between transmission positions

hand k, you see the previously selected front

or rear view.

Distances measured by Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed:

Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets

around the vehicle icon in the top view, or

Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets

around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode

The line thickness and color of the brackets

show how far the vehicle is from an object.

Ryellow brackets with thin lines: Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC is active

Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is

present in close range of the vehicle

Rred line: an object is present in the immediate

close range of the vehicle

Important safety notes

The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a

distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-

rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a

substitute for attentive driving.

You are always responsible for safe maneuver-

ing and parking. Make sure that there are no

persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering

area while maneuvering and parking in parking

spaces.

You are always responsible for safety, and must

always pay attention to your surroundings when

parking and maneuvering. This applies to the

areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.

You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-

ers.

The 360° camera will not function or will func-

tion in a limited manner:

Rif the doors are open

Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in

Rif the trunk lid is open

Rin heavy rain, snow or fog

Rat night or in very dark places

Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)

Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving

into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid

change in temperature

Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered

Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-

eras are installed are damaged. In this case,

have the camera position and setting checked

at a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You

can otherwise injure others or cause damage to

objects or the vehicle.

The guide lines in the multimedia system display

show the distances to your vehicle. The distan-

ces only apply to road level.

The camera in the rear area is protected by

means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360°

camera is activated. Observe the notes on

cleaning (Ypage 292). For technical reasons,

the flap may remain open briefly after the 360°

camera has been deactivated.

The field of vision and other functions of the

camera system may be restricted due to addi-

tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder,

rear bicycle carrier).

Driving systems 177

Driving and parking

On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,

depending on technical conditions, leaving the

standard height can result in:

Rinaccuracies in the guide lines

Rinaccuracies in the display of generated

images (top view)

Activation conditions

The image from the 360° camera appears if:

Rthe multimedia system is switched on

Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on

If you are driving faster than at a moderate

speed and you turn on the 360° camera, a warn-

ing message appears.

The warning message disappears if:

Ryou are again driving at a moderate speed The

360° camera is then activated

Rthe message is confirmed with the %but-

ton

Switching the 360° camera on and off

using the button

XTo switch on: press button :.

Depending on whether transmission position

hor kis selected, the following appears:

Ra split screen with top view and the image

from the front camera or

Ra split screen with top view and the image

from the rear view camera

XTo switch off: press button :.

Activating the 360° camera using

reverse gear

The 360° camera images can be automatically

displayed by engaging reverse gear.

XMake sure that the Activation by R gear

function is selected on the multimedia system

(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

XTo show the 360° camera image: engage

reverse gear.

The multimedia system shows the area

behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You

see the top view of the vehicle and the image

from the rear view camera.

You cannot stop the 360° camera display if

reverse gear is engaged.

Selecting the split-screen view or full

screen mode

Switching between split screen views:

XTo switch to the line with the vehicle icons:

slide 5the controller.

XTo select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.

Switching to full screen mode:

XTurn and press 180° View with the controller.

The full screen option is only available in the fol-

lowing views:

RTop view with picture from the rear view cam-

era

RTop view with picture from the front camera

Multimedia display

Important safety notes

The camera system may show a distorted view

of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.

Obstacles are not shown by the system in the

following locations:

Runder the front and rear bumpers

Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers

Rin close range above the handle on the trunk

lid

Rvery close to the exterior mirrors

Rin the transitional areas between the various

cameras in the virtual top view

!Objects not at ground level may appear to

be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle

Rthe drawbar of a trailer

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Rthe rear section of an HGV

Ra slanted post

178 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Approach objects no further than the bottom-

most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear view

camera

:Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the

vehicle

;Symbol for the split screen setting with top

view and rear view camera image

=Guide lines for the maximum steering input

?Yellow lanes marking the course the tires

will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic)

AYellow guide lines for vehicle width including

the exterior mirrors – dynamic for current

steering input

BVehicle center axis (locating aids)

CYellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-

cle

DBumper

ERed guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

When reverse gear is selected, guide lines

appear on the camera image.

The distance specifications only apply to

objects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-

era

:Symbol for the split screen setting with top

view and front camera image

;Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the

vehicle

=Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including

the exterior mirrors, for current steering

input (dynamic)

?Yellow lanes marking the course the tires

will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic)

ARed guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

BYellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the

vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

:Symbol for the split screen setting with top

view and rear view camera image enlarged

;Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

Driving systems 179

Driving and parking

This view assists you in estimating the distance

to the vehicle behind you.

iThis setting can also be selected as an

enlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam-

eras

:Symbol for the top view and forward-facing

side camera setting

;Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors (right side of

vehicle)

=Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors (left side of

vehicle)

iYou can also select the side camera setting

for the rear-facing view.

180° view

:Symbol for the full screen setting with rear

view camera image

;Your vehicle

=Warning displays for Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC

i180° view can also be selected as front

view.

Select this view when you are driving out of an

exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,

for example.

If you select the %symbol in the display and

confirm with the controller, the split-screen view

appears.

Exiting 360° camera display mode

XShift the transmission to position j.

XDrive forwards at a speed greater than 6 mph

(10 km/h).

The 360° camera display is stopped.

The view that was active before the 360°

camera was displayed appears in the multi-

media system display. You can stop the 360°

camera from the split-screen view by select-

ing the %symbol on the display and con-

firming with the controller.

You cannot stop the 360° camera display if

transmission position kis selected.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,

monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is

active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph

(200 km/h) speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST

detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-

ing lapses in concentration on the part of the

driver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notes

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It

might not always recognize fatigue or increasing

inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them

at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-

rested and attentive driver.

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is

restricted and warnings may be delayed or not

occur at all:

Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-

imately 30 minutes

Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface

is uneven or if there are potholes

Rif there is a strong side wind

180 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-

eration

Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed

below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph

(200 km/h)

Rif you are driving with the Steering Pilot of

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC activated

Rif the time has been set incorrectly

Rin active driving situations, such as when you

change lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment

is deleted and restarted when continuing the

journey, if:

Ryou switch off the engine

Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv-

er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to

take a break

Displaying the attention level

In the Assistance menu (Ypage 204) of the on-

board computer, you can call up the current sta-

tus information.

XSelect the Assistance display for ATTENTION

ASSIST using the on-board computer

(Ypage 203).

The following information appears:

RThe length of the journey since the last break.

Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in a

bar display in five levels from high to low.

Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate

the attention level and cannot issue a warn-

ing, the System Suspended message

appears. The bar display then changes the

display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below

37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph

(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST

XActivate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-

board computer (Ypage 205).

The system determines the attention level of

the driver depending on the setting selected:

Selection Standard: the sensitivity with which

the system determines the attention level is set

to normal.

Selection Sensitive: the sensitivity is set

higher. The attention level detected by Attention

Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is

warned earlier.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

ésymbol appears in the multifunction dis-

play in the assistance graphic display.

When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,

it is automatically reactivated after the engine

has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-

responds to the last selection activated (stand-

ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration

are detected, a warning appears in the multi-

function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a

Break!.

In addition to the message shown in the multi-

function display, you will then hear a warning

tone.

XIf necessary, take a break.

XConfirm the message by pressing the a

button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good

time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do

not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST con-

tinues to detect increasing lapses in concentra-

tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutes

at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-

TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of

fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.

Vehicles with COMAND multimedia system:

if a warning appears in the multifunction display,

a service station search is performed in the mul-

timedia system. You can select a service station

and navigation to this service station will then

begin. This function can be activated and deac-

tivated in the COMAND multimedia system (see

the Digital Operator's Manual).

Driving systems 181

Driving and parking

Traffic Sign Assist

General notes

Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed

permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.

The data and general traffic regulations stored in

the navigation system are used to determine the

current speed limit.

Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and

for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily

(e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There is

also no display for changing traffic signs.

Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an

additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also

shown.

The sign indicating the end of a restriction only

appears with the restriction in the instrument

cluster when:

RThe regulation must be observed with the

restriction, or

RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine

whether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a

maximum permitted speed from any of the avail-

able sources, no speed limit appears in the

instrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-

tries. In this case, display :appears in the

assistance graphic (Ypage 203).

Important safety notes

Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always

able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic

signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign

Assist display.

The system may be either functionally impaired

or temporarily unavailable if the information in

the digital street map of the navigation system is

incorrect or out of date.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphic

XCall up the assistance graphic display func-

tion using the on-board computer

(Ypage 203).

Detected traffic signs appear in the instru-

ment cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

:Maximum permitted speed

;Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign is

relevant

=Additional sign for unknown restriction

A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph

(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph

(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.

The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)

depends on the country in which you are driving.

It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign

nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken

into account when observing the maximum per-

mitted speed.

Lane Tracking package

General notes

The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind

Spot Assist (Ypage 182) and Lane Keeping

Assist (Ypage 184).

Blind Spot Assist

General notes

Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either

side of the vehicle that are not visible to the

driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-

182 Driving systems

Driving and parking

sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior

mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles

detected in the monitored area. If you then

switch on the corresponding turn signal to

change lane, you will also receive an optical and

audible warning.

Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot area

Rvehicles which approach with a large speed

differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give

warnings in such situations. There is a risk of

an accident.

Always observe the traffic conditions care-

fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for

attentive driving. Always ensure that there is

sufficient distance to the side for other road

users and obstacles.

iUSA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as

a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor

is intended for use in an automotive radar

system only. Removing, tampering with, or

altering the device will void any warranties,

and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-

per with, alter, or use in any non-approved

way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-

grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the

bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The

sensors must not be covered, for example by

cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a

severe impact or in the event of damage to the

bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors

checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring area

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain, snow or spray

Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or

bicycles

Rthe road has very wide lanes

Rthe road has narrow lanes

Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane

Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not

indicated.

At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ;from the

vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up

to 10 ft (3 m) next to =and behind :your

vehicle, as shown in the picture.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the

lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be

indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-

ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the

case if there are vehicles driving at the inner

edge of their lanes.

Due to the nature of the system:

Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving

close to crash barriers or similar solid lane

borders.

Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a pro-

longed time.

Driving systems 183

Driving and parking

Warning lamp

:Warning lamp

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in

the monitoring range are then not indicated.

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot

monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h), warning lamp :on the correspond-

ing side lights up red. This warning is always

emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot

monitoring range from behind or from the side.

When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only

occurs if the difference in speed is less than

7 mph (12 km/h).

If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist

is not operational.

The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-

matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-

roundings.

Collision warning

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of

Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-

sponding turn signal, a double warning tone

sounds. The red warning lamp flashes on the

relevant exterior mirror. If the turn signal

remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by

the flashing of the red warning lamp on the exte-

rior mirror. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

XMake sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated

in the on-board computer (Ypage 205).

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock.

The red warning lamps on the exterior mirrors

light up until the engine is started.

Display in the assistance graphic

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar

waves propagating backwards appear next to

the vehicle in the assistance display in the mul-

tifunction display (Ypage 203). Above a speed

of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar

waves in the assistance graphic changes to

green :. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of

your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-

era :which is attached behind the top of the

windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects

lane markings on the road and can warn you

before you leave your lane unintentionally.

This function is available in the range between

40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes

over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of

intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for

up to 1.5 seconds.

184 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly

detect lane markings.

In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:

Rgive an unnecessary warning

Rnot give a warning

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and keep within the lane, especially

if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.

GWARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not

return the vehicle to the original lane. There is

a risk of an accident.

You should always steer, brake or accelerate

yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-

ing Assist.

Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk

of an accidentif you fail to adapt your driving

style nor override the laws of physics. Lane

Keeping Assist cannot take into account the

road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-

ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible

for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-

cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-

ing in your lane.

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-

cle in the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function

if:

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient

illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,

fog or spray

Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the

sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if

the road surface is wet)

Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-

ity of the camera

Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings

for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction

work

Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-

ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small

and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-

ted

Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes

branch off, cross one another or merge

Rthe road is narrow and winding

Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on

the roadway

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist

XTo activate: press button ;.

Indicator lamp :lights up. The Lane Keep‐

ing Assist On message appears in the mul-

tifunction display. If all conditions have been

satisfied, there may be a warning.

If you drive at speeds above 40 mph

(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,

the lines in the assistance graphics display

(Ypage 203) are shown in green. Lane Keep-

ing Assist is ready for use.

XTo deactivate: press button ;.

Indicator lamp :goes out. Lane Keeping

Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping

Assist Off message appears in the multi-

function display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting

XIn the DriveAssist menu on the on-board

computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist

function (Ypage 205).

XSelect Standard or Adaptive.

Standard

When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:

Driving systems 185

Driving and parking

Ryou switch on theturnsignals. In this event,

thewarnings are suppressed for acertain

period of time.

Radrivingsafetysystem intervenes, e.g. ABS,

BASor ESP®.

Adaptive

WhenAdaptive is selected, no warningvibra-

tion occursif:

Ryou switch on theturnsignals. In this event,

thewarnings are suppressed for acertain

period of time.

Radrivingsafetysystem intervenes, e.g. ABS,

BASor ESP®.

Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

Ryou brakehard.

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or changelanes quickly.

Ryou cut thecorner on asharpbend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-

saryand in goodtime if you cross thelanemark-

ing, thesystem recognizes certain conditions

and warnsyou accordingly.

The warningvibration occursearlier if:

Ryou approachtheouter lanemarking on a

bend.

Rtheroadhas verywide lanes, e.g. afreeway.

Rthesystem detects solidlanemarkings.

The warningvibration occurslater if:

Rtheroadhas narrow lanes

Ryou cut thecorner on abend

Driving Assistance Plus package

General notes

The DrivingAssistance Plus packageconsistsof

DistancePilotDISTRONIC (Ypage 153), Active

Blind Spot Assist (Ypage 186) and Active Lane

KeepingAssist (Ypage 189).

Active Blind Spot Assist

Generalnotes

Active Blind Spot Assistuses aradarsensor

system, pointedtoward therear of thevehicle,

to monitor thearea to thesidesof thevehicle

whichthedriver is unable to see. A warninglamp

lights up in theexteriormirrorsand drawsyour

attention to vehicles detectedin themonitored

area.If you then switch on thecorresponding

turnsignal to changelane, you will also receive

an opticaland audiblewarning. If ariskof lateral

collision is detected, corrective brakingmay

help you avoid acollision.Before a course-cor-

recting brakeapplication,Active Blind Spot

Assistevaluates thespacein thedirection of

travel and at thesidesof thevehicle. Forthis,

Active Blind Spot Assistuses theforward-facing

radarsensors.

Active Blind Spot Assistsupportsyou from a

speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes

Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not

a substitute for attentive driving.

GWARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot area

Rvehicles which approach with a large speed

differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-

ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-

uations. There is a risk of an accident.

Always observe the traffic conditions care-

fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

iUSA only: This device has been approved by

the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The

radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-

motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-

ing, or altering of the device will void any war-

ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do

not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

iCanada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device

will void any warranties, and is not permitted.

186 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

Radar sensors

The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are

integrated into the front and rear bumpers and

behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure

that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator

grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors

must not be covered, for example by cycle racks

or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact

or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have

the function of the radar sensors checked at a

qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot

Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring area

GWARNING

Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all

traffic situations and road users. There is a

risk of an accident.

Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-

tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ;

from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon-

itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to =and

behind :your vehicle, as shown in the picture.

The detection of obstacles can be impaired in

the case of:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not

indicated.

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow

vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or

may only detect them too late.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the

lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be

indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-

ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the

case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of

your lane.

Due to the nature of the system:

Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving

close to crash barriers or similar solid lane

borders.

Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are

driving alongside particularly long vehicles,

such as trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning lamp

:Warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at

speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not

indicated.

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot

monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h), warning lamp :on the correspond-

ing side lights up red. This warning is always

emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot

monitoring range from behind or from the side.

When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only

occurs if the difference in speed is less than

7 mph (12 km/h).

Driving systems 187

Driving and parking

If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot

Assist is not operational.

The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-

matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-

roundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray

radar waves propagating backward appear next

to the vehicle in the assistance display in the

multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph

(30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the

assistance display changes to green ;. Active

Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warning

If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes

and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring

range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision

warning. You will then hear a double warning

tone and red warning lamp :flashes. If the turn

signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-

ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.

There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake application

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-

eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-

correcting brake application is carried out. This

is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

GWARNING

A course-correcting brake application cannot

always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an

accident.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,

especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns

you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-

cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the

sides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,

red warning lamp :flashes in the exterior mir-

ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi-

tion, a display underlining the danger of a side

collision appears in the multifunction display.

In very rare cases, the system may make an

inappropriate brake application. A course-cor-

recting brake application may be interrupted at

any time by countersteering slightly or acceler-

ating.

The course-correcting brake application is avail-

able in the speed range between 20 mph

(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

Either no braking application, or a course-cor-

recting brake application adapted to the driving

situation occurs if:

Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash

barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.

Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the

side.

Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds.

Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®

or PRE-SAFE®Brake.

RESP®is switched off.

Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is

detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist

XMake sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is

activated in the on-board computer

(Ypage 205).

XSwitch on the ignition.

Warning lamps :in the exterior mirrors light

up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.

Gray radar waves propagating backwards

appear next to the vehicle in the assistance

graphic in the multifunction display ;.

Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color

of the radar waves in the assistance display

changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist

is then ready for use.

188 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Generalnotes

Active LaneKeepingAssistmonitors thearea in

frontof your vehicleby meansof multifunction

camera :at thetopof thewindshield. Various

differentareas to thefront, rear and side of your

vehicleare also monitoredwiththeaid of the

radar sensor system. Active LaneKeeping

Assistdetects lanemarkingson theroad and

can warn you before you leaveyour laneunin-

tentionally. If you do notreactto thewarning, a

lane-correcting application of thebrakes can

bring thevehiclebackintotheoriginal lane.

This function is available in therange between

40 mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200km/h).

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your drivingstyle, Active Lane

KeepingAssistcan neither reduce theriskof an

accidentnoroverride thelaws of physics.Active

LaneKeepingAssistcannottakeaccountof

road and weather conditions. It may notrecog-

nizetraffic situations. Active LaneKeeping

Assistis only an aid. You are responsiblefor the

distanceto thevehiclein front, for vehicle

speed, for braking in goodtime and for stayingin

your lane.

Active LaneKeepingAssistcannotcontinuously

keep your vehiclein itslane.

GWARNING

Active LaneKeepingAssistcannotalways

clearly detectlanemarkings.

In suchcases, Active LaneKeepingAssist

can:

Rgivean unnecessary warning and then

make a course-correcting brakeapplication

to thevehicle

Rnotgive a warning or intervene

There is ariskof an accident.

Always pay particular attention to thetraffic

situation and keep within thelane, especially

if Active LaneKeepingAssistalerts you. Ter-

minate theintervention in anon-critical driv-

ing situation.

The system may be impairedor may notfunction

if:

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient

illumination of theroad,or due to snow, rain,

fog or spray

Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncomingtraffic, the

sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if

theroad surfaceis wet)

Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered, for instance by asticker, in thevicin-

ityof thecamera

Rtheradar sensorsin thefrontor rear bumpers

or theradiatortrim are dirty, e.g. obscured by

snow

Rthere are no,several or unclear lanemarkings

for alane, e.g. in areas withroad construction

work

Rthelanemarkingsare wornaway, dark or cov-

eredup, e.g. by dirtor snow

Rthedistanceto thevehiclein frontis toosmall

and thelanemarkingsthus cannotbe detec-

ted

Rthelanemarkingschangequickly, e.g. lanes

branch off,cross oneanother or merge

Rtheroad is narrow and winding

Rthere are highly variable shadeconditionson

theroadway

If no vehicleis detectedin theadjacent laneand

brokenlanemarkingsare detected, no lane-cor-

recting brakeapplication is made.

Warning vibration in thesteering wheel

Awarning may be given if afrontwheelpasses

over a lanemarking.It will warn you by meansof

intermittent vibration in thesteering wheelfor

up to 1.5seconds.

Driving systems 189

Driving and parking

Lane-correcting brake application

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-

ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.

This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle

back to the original lane.

GWARNING

A lane-correcting brake application cannot

always bring the vehicle back into the original

lane. There is a risk of an accident.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,

especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns

you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-

cation.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,

display :appears in the multifunction display.

The brake application also slightly reduces vehi-

cle speed.

A lane-correcting brake application can be made

after driving over a lane marking detected as

being solid or broken. Before this, a warning

must be given by means of intermittent vibration

in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with

lane markings on both sides must be recog-

nized.

In the case of a broken lane marking being

detected, a lane-correcting brake application

can only be made if a vehicle has been detected

in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, over-

taking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes

can be detected.

A further lane-correcting brake application can

only occur after your vehicle has returned to the

original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:

Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-

erate.

Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Ryou have switched on the turn signal.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,

PRE-SAFE®Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-

eration.

RESP®is switched off.

Rthe transmission is not in position h.

Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has

been detected and displayed.

Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in

which you are driving.

Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other

road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate

brake application may be interrupted at any time

if you:

Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.

Rswitch on the turn signal.

Ryou brake or accelerate significantly.

A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-

ted automatically if:

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,

PRE-SAFE®Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Rlane markings are no longer detected.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane

Keeping Assist

XTo activate: press button ;.

Indicator lamp :lights up. The Lane Keep‐

ing Assist On message appears on the

multifunction display. If all conditions have

been satisfied, a warning or steering inter-

vention may be made.

If you drive at speeds above 40 mph

(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,

the lines in the assistance graphic

190 Driving systems

Driving and parking

(Ypage 203) appear in green. Active Lane

Keeping Assist is ready for use.

XTo deactivate: press button ;.

Indicator lamp :goes out. The Active Lane

Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane

Keeping Assist Off message appears on

the multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting

XIn the DriveAssist menu on the on-board

computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐

ing Assist function (Ypage 205).

XSelect setting Standard or Adaptive.

When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this case,

the warnings are suppressed for a certain

period of time.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certain

period of time.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.

Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

Ryou brake hard.

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.

Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-

sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-

ing, the system recognizes certain conditions

and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.

Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway.

Rthe system detects solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

Rthe road has narrow lanes

Ryou cut the corner on a bend

Driving systems 191

Driving and parking

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipmentintegratedin thevehi-

cle when driving,you may be distractedfrom

thetraffic situation.You could also lose con-

trol of thevehicle. Thereis ariskof an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipmentwhen thetraffic

situation permits. If you are notsurethat this

is possible,park thevehiclepayingattention

to traffic conditionsand operate theequip-

mentwhen thevehicleis stationary.

You must observethelegal requirements for the

country in whichyou are currentlydriving when

operating theon-board computer.

GWARNING

If theinstrumentclusterhas failedor mal-

functioned, you may notrecognize function

restrictionsin systems relevantto safety. The

operating safetyof your vehiclemay be

impaired.Thereis ariskof an accident.

Drive on carefully. Havethevehiclechecked

at aqualified specialist workshop immedi-

ately.

If theoperating safetyof your vehicleis

impaired,pull overas soonas it is safeto do so.

Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The on-board computer only shows messagesor

warningsfrom certain systems in themultifunc-

tion display. You should thereforemakesure

your vehicleis operating safely at all times.

Foran overview, see theinstrumentpanel illus-

tration (Ypage 36).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting

The lighting in theinstrumentcluster, in thedis-

plays and thecontrolsin thevehicleinterior can

be adjusted usingbrightness control knob :.

XTurn brightness control knob :up or down.

If you turnthelightswitch (Ypage 107) to the

T,Ãor Lposition,thebrightness

will depend upon thebrightness of theambi-

entlight.

iThe lightsensor in theinstrumentcluster

automatically controlsthebrightness of the

multifunction display.

In daylight, thedisplays in theinstrument

clusterare illuminated. Adimming function is

notpossible in daylight.

Speedometer with segments

The speedometer is divided intosegments

depending on theequipment.

The segments in thespeedometer indicate

whichspeedrange is available.

RCruisecontrol activated (Ypage 151):

The segments lightup from thestoredspeed

to theendof thescale.

RDistancePilot DISTRONICis activated

(Ypage 155):

Oneor two segments in theset speedrange

lightup.

RDistancePilot DISTRONICdetects avehiclein

frontmoving moreslowly than thestored

speed:

The segments between thespeedof thevehi-

cle in frontand thestoredspeedlightup.

192 Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays

Tachometer

!Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this

could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the

engine's overrevving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the

engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road condi-

tions when temperatures are around freezing

point.

Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-

play indicates the temperature measured and

does not record the road temperature.

The outside temperature display is in the multi-

function display (Ypage 194).

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature gauge

GWARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is over-

heated or when there is a fire in the engine

compartment could expose you to hot gases

or other service products. There is a risk of

injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before

opening the hood. If there is a fire in the

engine compartment, keep the hood closed

and contact the fire department.

!If the coolant temperature is too high, a dis-

play message is shown.

If the coolant temperature display is in the

area marked in red, do not continue driving.

Otherwise, the engine will be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower

section of the tachometer (Ypage 36).

Under normal operating conditions and at the

correct coolant level, the display may rise to the

red mark.

Operating the on-board computer

:Multifunction display

;Right control panel

=Left control panel

XTo activate the on-board computer: switch

on the power supply.

You can control the multifunction display and

the settings in the on-board computer using the

buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Left control panel

òROpens a menu list

Press briefly:

RScrolls in lists

RSelects a menu or function

RIn the Radio or Media menu:

opens a track or station list and

selects a station, an audio track or

a video scene.

RIn the Telephone menu: switches

to the phone book and selects a

name or a telephone number

Press and hold:

RScrolls quickly through all lists

RIn the Radio or Media menu:

selects a station, audio track or

video scene using rapid scrolling

RIn the Telephone menu: starts

rapid scrolling if the phone book is

open

Displays andoperation 193

On-board computer and displays

aRIn all menus: confirms the selected

entry in the list

RIn the Radio or Media menu:

opens the list of available radio

sources or media

RIn the Telephone menu: switches

to the phone book and starts dial-

ing the selected number

ñRVehicles with multimedia system

Audio 20:

Switches off voice control for nav-

igation (see the manufacturer's

operating instructions)

RVehicles with multimedia system

COMAND:

Switches off the Voice Control

System (see the separate operat-

ing instructions)

%Press briefly:

RBack

RIn the Radio or Media menu: exits

the track or station list or list of

available radio sources or media

RHides display messages

RExits the phone book/redial mem-

ory

%Press and hold:

RCalls up the standard display in the

Trip menu

Right control panel

~RRejects or ends a call

RExits the phone book/redial mem-

ory

6RMakes or accepts a call

RSwitches to the redial memory

RAdjusts the volume

8RMute

óRVehicles with multimedia system

Audio 20:

Switches on voice control for nav-

igation (see the manufacturer's

operating instructions)

RVehicles with multimedia system

COMAND:

Switches on the Voice Control Sys-

tem (see the separate operating

instructions)

Multifunction display

:Drive program (Ypage 134)

;Transmission position (Ypage 135)

=Additional speedometer

?Display

ATime

BOutside temperature (Ypage 193)

Display panel ?shows the selected menu or

submenu and display messages.

XTo open the menu list: press òon the

steering wheel.

Display panel ?appears in the menu list.

Possible displays in the multifunction dis-

play:

RZGearshift recommendation, when shifting

manually (Ypage 140)

RjParking Pilot (Ypage 166)

R¯Cruise control (Ypage 151)

194 Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays

RaDistance Pilot DISTRONIC Steering Pilot

(Ypage 159)

R_Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Ypage 109)

RèECO start/stop function (Ypage 127)

RëHOLD function (Ypage 161)

Head-up display

General notes

The head-up display projects information from

the navigation system and the driver assistance

system above the dashboard into the driver's

field of vision. The head-up display allows the

driver to see all of the information without hav-

ing to take their eyes off the road.

A requirement for the display of the contents is

that the following functions are available in the

vehicle and are switched on:

RCruise control

RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC

RTraffic Sign Assist

RNavigation

Important safety notes

The head-up display is only an aid and is not a

substitute for attentive driving.

Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are not

always correctly displayed. Traffic signs always

have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.

The visibility of the head-up display is influenced

by the following conditions:

Rthe driver's seat position

Rthe positioning of the display image

Rthe general ambient light

Rsunglasses with polarization filters

Rwet roads

Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display

cover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the

display may fade. This can be reversed by

switching the head-up display off and on again.

iVehicles with the head-up display are equip-

ped with a special windshield. Should repairs

be necessary, have the windshield replaced at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation

Switching the head-up display on/off

XPress button :.

When the head-up display is switched on, the

display appears in the driver's field of vision.

Standard displays in the head-up display

:Navigation messages

;Current speed

=Detected traffic signs

?Set speed for cruise control or Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC

Displays andoperation 195

On-board computer and displays

AMG displays in the head-up display

:Protection against reachingtheoverrevving

range

;RACE TIMER lap

=RACE TIMER lap time

?Currentspeed

ACurrently selected gear,gearshiftoptions

when shiftingmanually

BCurrentenginespeed

Setting options

You can adjust thefollowingsettings in the

head-up display submenu:

Radjust thepositionof thehead-up display on

thewindshield (Ypage 206)

Radjust thebrightness of thedisplays in the

head-up display (Ypage 206)

Rselect desired displays in thehead-up display

(Ypage 206)

UsingtheDisplayContentfunction,you

can,depending on your vehicle's equipment,

choosebetween four standard displays. The

selected contents then appear in thehead-up

display.

In Mercedes-AMGvehicles, you can choose

between further AMGdisplays in addition to

thestandard displays, depending on your

vehicle's equipment.

If you select adisplay withtraffic signs, detec-

tedtraffic signsfrom Traffic SignAssist

appear in thehead-up display.

Menus and submenus

Menu overview

Press theòbuttonon thesteering wheelto

open themenulist.

Operating theon-board computer (Ypage 193).

Dependingon thevehicleequipment, you can

select thefollowingmenu:

RTripmenu (Ypage 196)

RNavimenu(navigation instructions)

(Ypage 198)

RRadio menu (Ypage 200)

RMedia menu (Ypage 200)

RTelephone menu (Ypage 202)

RAssistanceGraphicmenu (Ypage 203)

RServicemenu (Ypage 203)

RSettings menu (Ypage 203)

RAMG menuin Mercedes-AMGvehicles

(Ypage 208)

Trip menu

Standard display

XPress and hold the%buttonon thesteer-

ing wheeluntil theTripmenuwithtrip odom-

eter :and odometer ;appears.

196 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Displaying therange andcurrent fuel

consumption

:Range of thefuelsupply

;Currentfuelconsumption

=Recuperation display

XPress theòbuttonon thesteeringwheel

to openthemenulist.

XPress :or 9on thesteeringwheelto

selecttheTripmenu.

XConfirmby pressing aon thesteering

wheel.

XPress 9or :to selectthedisplay.

Approximaterange :that can be covered is

calculated accordingto your currentdriving

style and theamount of fuelin thetank.If

there is only asmall amount of fuelleftin the

fueltank, a vehicle beingrefueledC

appears instead of approximaterange :.

Recuperation display =shows you if energy

has beenrecuperated from thekineticenergy

in overrun mode and saved in thebattery.

Recuperation display =dependson the

engineinstalled and is therefore notavailable

in all vehicles.

ECO display

XPress òon thesteeringwheelto openthe

menulist.

XPress :or 9on thesteeringwheelto

selecttheTripmenu.

XConfirmby pressing aon thesteering

wheel.

XPress the:or 9buttonto selectECO

display.

If theignition remainsswitched offforlonger

than four hours, theECOdisplay will be auto-

matically reset.

Forfurther information on theECOdisplay, see

(Ypage 147).

Trip computer"From Start" or "From

Reset"

:Distance

;Driving time

=Average speed

?Average fuelconsumption

XPress theòbuttonon thesteeringwheel

to openthemenulist.

XPress :or 9on thesteeringwheelto

selecttheTripmenu.

XConfirmby pressing aon thesteering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to selectFromStart or

FromReset.

The values in theFromStart submenuare

calculated from thestart of ajourney, while

thevalues in theFromReset submenuare

calculated from thelast time thesubmenu

was reset (Ypage 198).

The trip computeris automatically reset in the

followingcases FromStart:

Rtheignition has beenswitched offformore

than four hours.

R999hourshavebeenexceeded.

R9,999 miles havebeenexceeded.

When9999 hoursor 99,999 mileshave been

exceeded, the trip computer is automatically

reset From Reset.

Digital speedometer

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Trip menu.

Menus and submenus 197

On-board computer and displays

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the :or 9button to select the

digital speedometer.

Resetting values

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Trip menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the :or 9button to select the

function that you wish to reset.

XPress abriefly.

XPress :to select Yes and press ato

confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-

tions:

RTrip odometer

R"From Start" trip computer

R"From Reset" trip computer

RECO display

If you reset the values in the ECO display, the

values in the "From Start" trip computer are

also reset. If you reset the values in the "From

Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO

display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions

In the Navi menu, the multifunction display

shows navigation instructions. You can find fur-

ther information on navigation instructions in

the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's

Manual.

XSwitch on the multimedia system.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Navi menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

Route guidance not active

:Direction of travel

;Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

:Distance to the next destination

;Estimated arrival time

=Distance to the next change of direction

?Current road

198 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Change of direction announced with a

lane recommendation

:Target of the change of direction

;Distance to the change of direction

=Change-of-direction symbol

?Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)

APossible lane

BLane not recommended (dark gray)

On multilane roads, new lane recommendations

can be displayed for the next change of direction

if the digital map supports this data. During the

change of direction, new lanes may be added.

Lane not recommended B: you will not be able

to complete the next change of direction if you

stay in this lane.

Possible lane A: you will only be able to com-

plete the next change of direction in this lane.

Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be

able to complete the next change of direction

and the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom-

mendation

:Road into which the change of direction

leads

;Distance to change of direction and visual

distance display

=Change-of-direction symbol

When a change of direction is to be made, you

will see symbol =for the change of direction

and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator

shortens towards the top of the display as you

approach the point of the announced change of

direction. The change of direction starts once

the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-

dation

:Road into which the change of direction

leads

;Distance to change of direction and visual

distance display

=Change-of-direction symbol

?Lane recommendation

Menus and submenus 199

On-board computer and displays

Other status indicators of the naviga-

tion system

:Additional information

Other possible additional information:

RNew Route... orCalculating Route...

A new route is calculated.

RRoad Not Mapped

The vehicle position is inside the area of the

digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.

newly built streets, car parks or private land.

RNo Route

No route could be calculated to the selected

destination.

ROff Map

The map for the current vehicle position is not

available.

You have reached the destination or an inter-

mediate destination.

Radio menu

:Waveband

;Station frequency with memory position

=Name of artist

?Name of track

The multifunction display shows station ;with

station frequency or station name. The preset

position is only displayed along with station ;if

this has been stored. You can store radio sta-

tions in the multimedia system.

XSwitch on the multimedia system.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Radio menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

Currently set station ;appears in the multi-

function display.

XTo open the channel list: press the :or

9button briefly.

XTo select a station in the station list: press

the :or 9button briefly.

XTo select a station in the station list using

rapid scrolling: press and hold the :or

9button.

XTo select the waveband or station mem-

ory: press abriefly.

XPress :or 9to select the waveband or

station memory.

XPress ato confirm the selection.

iSIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a

normal radio.

Further information about radio operation can

be found in the multimedia system in the Dig-

ital Operator's Manual.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and playback

mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media

menu.

XSwitch on the multimedia system.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Media menu.

200 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XTo open the media sources list: press a

briefly.

The list shows the following media sources,

for example:

RCD or DVD (DVD only in the COMAND mul-

timedia system)

RSD card

RMedia Register (only in the COMAND mul-

timedia system)

RUSB storage device

RBluetooth®capable audio device

Please observe further information on media

support and media operation in the multimedia

system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Operating an audio player or audio

media

:Media source, e.g. name of USB memory

stick

;Current title

=Name of artist

?Name of album

AFolder name

Audio data from various audio devices or media

can be played, depending on the equipment

installed in the vehicle.

XSwitch on the multimedia system.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Media menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XTo select an audio player or audio media:

press abriefly. The list containing the

media sources appears.

XPress :or 9to select the correspond-

ing audio player or media.

XPress ato confirm.

XTo open the track list: press the :or

9button briefly.

XTo select the next or previous track from

thetrack list: press the :or 9button

briefly.

XTo select a track from the track list using

rapid scrolling: press and hold :or 9

until the desired track is reached.

If you press and hold the button, the speed of

rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not

all audio drives or data carriers support this

function.

If the corresponding track information is stored

on the audio player or media, the multifunction

display shows the following:

Rtrack number

Rthe name of the track

Rthe name of the artist

Ralbum

The track information does not appear in audio

AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external

audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

XSwitch on the multimedia system.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Media menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

Menus and submenus 201

On-board computer and displays

XTo select a DVD drive or DVD media: press

abriefly. The list containing the media

sources appears.

XPress :or 9to select the correspond-

ing DVD single drive or disc.

XPress ato confirm.

XTo open the scene list: press the :or

9button briefly.

XTo select the next or previous scene in the

scene list: press the :or 9button

briefly.

XTo select a scene from the scene list using

rapid scrolling: press and hold :or 9

until desired scene :is reached.

XPress ato confirm your selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

GWARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal

requirements for the country in which you are

currently driving.

XSwitch on the mobile phone (see the manu-

facturer’s operating instructions).

XSwitch on the multimedia system.

XEstablish a Bluetooth®connection to the mul-

timedia system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Telephone menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

You will see one of the following display mes-

sages in the multifunction display:

RPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found a net-

work and is ready to receive.

RPhone No Service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searching for

a network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐

phone menu, a display message appears in the

multifunction display.

You can accept a call at any time regardless of

the menu selected.

XPress the 6button on the steering wheel

to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call

XPress the ~button on the steering wheel

to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Telephone menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the :or 9or abutton to

switch to the phone book.

XPress the :or 9button to select the

names one after the other.

XTo start rapid scrolling: press and hold :

or 9for longer than one second.

The names are displayed quickly one after the

other in the phone book.

If you press and hold the :or 9button

for longer than five seconds, the name with

the next or previous initial letter in the alpha-

bet appears.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the

button or reach the end of the list.

XIf only one telephone number is stored for

a name: press the 6or abutton to

start dialing.

202 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

XIf there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6or a

button to display the numbers.

XPress the :or 9button to select the

number you want to dial.

XPress the 6or abutton to start dialing.

XTo exit the telephone book: press the ~

or %button briefly.

Redialing

The on-board computer saves the last names or

numbers dialed in the redial memory.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Telephone menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the 6button to switch to the redial

memory.

XPress the :or 9button to select the

desired name or number.

XPress the 6or abutton to start dialing.

XTo exit the redial memory: press the ~

or %button briefly.

Assistance graphic menu

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Assistance Graphic

menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

The assistance graphic displays the status of

and information from the following driving

systems or driving safety systems:

RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC distance display

(Ypage 158)

RTraffic Sign Assist (Ypage 182)

RDistance warning function and autono-

mous brake function of Active Brake Assist

(Ypage 65)

RActive Brake Assist with cross-traffic func-

tion (Ypage 71)

RBlind Spot Assist (Ypage 182) or Active

Blind Spot Assist (Ypage 186)

RATTENTION ASSIST (Ypage 181)

RLane Keeping Assist (Ypage 184) or Active

Lane Keeping Assist (Ypage 189)

XPress :to display the ATTENTION ASSIST

assessment.

Service menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

Service menu:

Rcalling up display messages in message mem-

ory (Ypage 212)

Rrestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-

tem (Canada only) (Ypage 319).

Rchecking the tire pressure electronically

(Ypage 321).

Rcalling up the service due date (Ypage 285).

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

Settings menu:

RChanging assistance settings (Ypage 204).

RChanging head-up display settings

(Ypage 206).

RChanging the light settings (Ypage 207).

Menus and submenus 203

On-board computer and displays

RChanging the instrument cluster settings

(Ypage 207).

RRestoring the factory settings (Ypage 207).

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Observe the "Important safety notes" section in

the description of ESP®(Ypage 68).

GWARNING

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP®no longer sta-

bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk

of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP®in the situations descri-

bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP®in the follow-

ing situations:

Rwhen using snow chains

Rin deep snow

Ron sand or gravel

Deactivating/activating ESP®in Mercedes-

AMG vehicles (Ypage 69).

For further information about ESP®, see

(Ypage 67).

XStart the engine.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the DriveAs‐

sist submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XSelect ESP by pressing :or 9.

XPress ato confirm.

The current selection appears.

XTo activate/deactivate: press the abut-

ton again.

If the åwarning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to

drive, ESP®is deactivated.

If the ÷and åwarning lamps light up

continuously, ESP®is not available due to a mal-

function.

Observe the information on warning lamps

(Ypage 244).

Observe the information on display messages

(Ypage 213).

Traffic Sign Assist

You can activate or deactivate the warning func-

tion of Traffic Sign Assist in the Traffic Sign

Assist menu. When the function is activated,

detected traffic signs and information appear in

the multifunction display for five seconds.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the DriveAs‐

sist submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select Traffic Sign

Assist.

XPress ato confirm.

The current selection appears.

XActivate or deactivate the warning func-

tion: press aagain.

For further information about Traffic Sign Assist,

see (Ypage 182).

Activating/deactivating Active Brake

Assist

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select the DriveAssist

submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XSelect Brake Assist by pressing 9

or :.

XPress ato confirm.

The current selection appears.

XTo activate/deactivate: press aagain.

When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the

æsymbol appears on the Assistance

Graphic menu of the multifunction display.

Further information on Active Brake Assist

(Ypage 65).

204 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Activating or deactivating Active Brake

Assist with cross-traffic function

ActiveBrake Assist withcross-traffic function is

available only in vehicles withtheDrivingAssis-

tance package.

XPress theòbuttonon thesteering wheel

to open themenulist.

XPress the:or 9buttonon thesteering

wheelto select theSettings menu.

XConfirmby pressingaon thesteering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select theDriveAssist

submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XSelectBrake Assist by pressing:or

XPress ato confirm.

The currentselection appears.

XTo activate/deactivate: press theabut-

tonagain.

When ActiveBrake Assist withcross-traffic

function is deactivated, theæsymbol

appearson theAssistanceGraphicmenu

of themultifunction display.

Further information about ActiveBrake Assist

withcross-traffic function (Ypage 71).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

XPress theòbuttonon thesteering wheel

to open themenulist.

XPress :or 9on thesteering wheelto

select theSettings menu.

XConfirmby pressingaon thesteering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select theDriveAs‐

sistsubmenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select Blind Spot

Assist.

XPress ato confirm.

The currentselection appears.

XTo activate/deactivate: press theabut-

tonagain.

Forfurther information about BlindSpotAssist,

see (Ypage 182).

Forfurther information about ActiveBlindSpot

Assist,see (Ypage 186).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

XPress theòbuttonon thesteering wheel

to open themenulist.

XPress the:or 9buttonon thesteering

wheelto select theSettings menu.

XConfirmby pressingaon thesteering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select theDriveAssist

submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XSelectAttention Assist by pressing:

or 9.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select Off,Standard

or Sensitive.

XPress theabuttonto confirm theselec-

tion.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

ésymbol appearsin theAssistance

Graphicmenuin themultifunction display.

Forfurther information about ATTENTION

ASSIST,see (Ypage 180).

Setting Lane Keeping Assist

XPress theòbuttonon thesteering wheel

to open themenulist.

XPress :or 9on thesteering wheelto

select theSettings menu.

XConfirmby pressingaon thesteering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select theDriveAs‐

sistsubmenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select LaneKeeping

Assist.

XPress ato confirm.

The currentselection Standard or Adaptive

appears.

XTo change thesetting: press aagain.

Forfurther information about LaneKeeping

Assist,see (Ypage 184).

Forfurther information about ActiveLaneKeep-

ing Assist,see (Ypage 189).

Menus and submenus 205

On-board computer and displays

Head-up display submenu

Selecting other displays

:Vehicle speed display

;Vehicle speed and navigation instruction

display

=Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist

Using the Display Content function, you can

choose from up to four display options depend-

ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selected

contents appear in the head-up display.

In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose

between two AMG displays. If you select an

AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-

specific contents.

If you select a display with traffic signs, detected

traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in

the head-up display.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the Head-up

Display submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XSelect Display Content by pressing :or

XPress ato confirm.

A graphic selection list appears.

XPress :or 9to select the desired dis-

play.

XPress the abutton to confirm the selec-

tion.

You can find more information on the navigation

displays in the multimedia system (see Digital

Operator's Manual).

Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist

(Ypage 182).

Setting the position

You can adjust the position of the head-up dis-

play on the windshield. You can compensate for

height differences if the seat positions are

changed, for example.

XSwitch on the head-up display (Ypage 195).

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select the Head-up

Display submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select the Position

function.

XPress the abutton to save the setting.

XPress :or 9to adjust the position to a

level from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down).

XPress the aor %button to save the

setting.

Using the Memory function, you can save and

call up the set position of the head-up display as

a single memory preset (Ypage 105).

Setting the brightness

The brightness of the head-up display is auto-

matically adjusted to the surrounding ambient

light. You can also individually adjust the bright-

ness of the head-up display.

XSwitch on the head-up display (Ypage 195).

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select the Head-up

Display submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select the Brightness

function.

XPress the abutton to save the setting.

206 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

XPress the :or 9button to adjust the

brightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) to

Level -5 (dark).

XPress the aor %button to save the

setting.

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/

off

This function is not available in Canada.

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the Lights

submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XUsing :or 9, select the Daytime

Running Lights function.

If the Daytime Running Lights function has

been switched on, the multifunction display

shows the cone of light and the Wsymbol

in yellow.

XPress the abutton to save the setting.

Further information on daytime running

lampsDaytime Running Lights (Ypage 107).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unit

The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function

allows you to choose whether certain displays

appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc-

tion display.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select the Instrument

Cluster submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select the Display

Unit Speed-/Odometer function.

The current setting km or Miles appears.

XPress the abutton to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement for distance

applies to:

RDigital speedometer in the Trip menu

ROdometer and the trip odometer

RTrip computer

RCurrent consumption and the range

RRange

RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu

RCruise control

RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC with Steering Pilot

RASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometer

on/off

If the additional speedometer is switched on,

the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul-

tifunction display instead of the outside tem-

perature.

The speed display is inverse to the speedome-

ter.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select the Instrument

Cluster submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XUsing :or 9, select the Additional

Speedometer [km/h] function.

The current selection appears.

XTo activate/deactivate: press the abut-

ton again.

Restoring the factory settings

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XUse :or 9to select the Factory

Settings submenu.

Menus and submenus 207

On-board computer and displays

XPress ato confirm.

The Reset All Settings? function

appears.

XPress :or 9to select No or Yes.

XPress ato confirm the selection.

If you have selected Yes, the multifunction

display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running

Lights function in the Lights submenu is only

reset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

:Digital speedometer

;Gear indicator

=Charge-air pressure

?Engine oil temperature

ATransmission oil temperature

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the AMG menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

Engine and transmission oil tempera-

tures: when the engine and transmission are

at normal operating temperature, oil temper-

atures ?and Aare displayed in white in the

multifunction display.

If the multifunction display shows oil temper-

ature ?or Ain blue, the engine or the

transmission are not yet at normal operating

temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-

put during this time.

Traffic Sign Assist display

XSwitch on the display function for notes and

traffic signs (Ypage 204).

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the AMG menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the 9button repeatedly until the

Traffic Sign Assist display appears.

G-Meter

While the vehicle is in motion, the G-Meter

shows the forces that are exerted on the driver

both laterally and in the direction of travel.

The maximum values are indicated in red in the

guideline system.

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the AMG menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the 9button repeatedly until the G-

Meter appears.

208 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

The maximum values of the G-Meter are

saved.

XTo reset the G-Meter: press aagain.

XUsing :or 9select Yes on the steer-

ing wheel.

XPress ato confirm.

The maximum values of the G-Meter are

deleted.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer

than four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-

cally reset.

SETUP

Mercedes-AMG C 63/AMG C 63 S

(Example)

:Mercedes-AMG C 63: Drive Comfort/

Sport/Sport +

Mercedes-AMG C 63 S: Drive Comfort/

Sport/Sport +/Race

;Suspension Comfort/Sport/Sport +

=Transmission D/M

?Exhaust system Comfort/Sport +

AESP®On/Off or SPORT handling mode

Sport

SETUP shows the following functions and set-

tings:

Rthe gear indicator

Rthe digital speedometer

Rthe drive system setting

Rthe suspension mode

Rthe transmission position

Rthe exhaust flap position

Rthe ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) status

Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC

(Example)

:Drive Eco/Comfort/Sport/Sport +

;Suspension Comfort/Sport/Sport +

=Steering Comfort/Sport

?ECO Start/Stop Active/Inactive/Off

AESP®On/Off or SPORT handling mode

Sport

SETUP shows the following functions and set-

tings:

Rthe gear indicator

Rthe digital speedometer

Rthe drive system setting

Rthe suspension mode

Rthe steering setting

Rthe setting of the ECO start/stop function

Rthe ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) status

Select SETUP

XUse òon the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the AMG menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress 9repeatedly until SETUP appears.

Menus and submenus 209

On-board computer and displays

RACE TIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

:Lap

;RACETIMER

The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a

closed race circuit. Do not use the function on

public roads.

You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is

running or the ignition is switched on.

XUse òon the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the AMG menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9repeatedly until the

RACETIMER appears.

XTo start: press the abutton to start the

RACETIMER.

Starting a new lap

:Lap

;RACETIMER

=Quickest lap time

XPress the :or 9button to select New

Lap.

XPress ato confirm.

A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.

Stopping the RACETIMER

XPress :or 9to select Stop.

XPress ato confirm.

Continuing the RACETIMER

XPress :or 9to select Continue.

XPress ato confirm.

Resetting the RACETIMER

210 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

XPress :or 9to select Stop.

The RACETIMER is stopped.

XPress :or 9to select Reset.

XPress ato confirm.

All laps are deleted.

Lap statistics

:Lap

;Lap time

=Average lap speed

?Lap length

This function is only available if you have stored

at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-

TIMER.

XUse òon the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the AMG menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the :or 9button to select Lap

List.

XPress ato confirm.

The lap evaluation appears.

XPress the 9or :button to select a dif-

ferent lap evaluation.

The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-

bol :.

Display messages

Introduction

General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual

and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.

Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this

Operator's Manual.

With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.

You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.

When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:

RHOLD function (Ypage 161)

RParking (Ypage 143)

Hiding display messages

XPress the aor %button on the steering wheel.

The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority

display messages cannot be hidden.

The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages

have been remedied.

Display messages 211

On-board computer and displays

Message memory

The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up

the display messages:

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering wheel.

XPress the :or 9button to select the message memory.

If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display.

When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress the :or 9button to scroll through the display messages.

212 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

!÷

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP®(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) are temporarily not available.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

tion.

In addition, the ÷and !warning lamps light up in the instru-

ment cluster.

For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

GWARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake

hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP®is not operational, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

XDrive on carefully.

Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-

ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above

are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷

Inoperative See

Operator's Manual

ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

tion.

The $(USA only) or J(Canada only), ÷and !warning

lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

GWARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake

hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP®is not operational, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 213

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Inoperative See

Operator'sManual

ESP®is malfunctioning.

Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-

tion.

The ÷warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

GWARNING

The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the

functionslisted above.

The braking distancein an emergencybraking situation can thus

increase.

If ESP®is notoperational, ESP®is unable to stabilizethevehicle.

There is an increased riskof skiddingand an accident.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual

ESP®is temporarily unavailable.

Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-

tion.

The ÷warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

The self-diagnosis function might notbe complete, for example.

GWARNING

The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the

functionslisted above. The wheels could thereforelockif you brake

hard, for example.

The braking distancein an emergencybraking situation can thus

increase.

If ESP®is notoperational, ESP®is unable to stabilizethevehicle.

There is an increased riskof skiddingand an accident.

XCarefully drive asuitable distance, making slight steering move-

ments at aspeed above12 mph (20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above

are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

214 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Inoperative See

Operator'sManual

EBD(electronic brakeforce distribution), ABSand ESP®are malfunc-

tioning.

Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-

tion.

In addition,the÷and !warning lampslightup in theinstru-

mentclusterand awarning tone sounds.

GWARNING

The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the

functionslisted above. The frontand rear wheels could thereforelock

if you brakehard, for example.

The steerabilityand braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distancein an emergencybraking situation can increase.

If ESP®is notoperational, ESP®is unable to stabilizethevehicle.

There is an increased riskof skiddingand an accident.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only) !(Canada

only)

TurnOn the Igni‐

tionto Releasethe

ParkingBrake

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp lights

up.

You attemptedto release theelectric parking brakewhile theignition

was switched off.

XSwitchon theignition.

F(USA

only) !(Canada

only)

Please ReleasePark‐

ing Brake

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and awarning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic release of the

electric parking brakeis notfulfilled (Ypage 146).

You are drivingwiththeelectric parking brakeapplied.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakemanually.

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and awarning tone sounds.

You are usingtheelectric parking brakefor emergencybraking

(Ypage 146).

F(USA

only) !(Canada

only)

ParkingBrake See

Operator'sManual

The yellow !warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

To apply:

XSwitchtheignition off.

XPress theelectric parking brakehandle for at least tenseconds.

XShift thetransmission to position j.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 215

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The yellow !warning lamp and thered F(USAonly) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp lightup.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

To release:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakemanually.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakeautomatically (Ypage 146).

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe released:

XDo notdrive on.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and theyellow !warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

To release:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakemanually.

To apply:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XApply theelectric parking brakemanually.

If thered F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp con-

tinuesto flash:

XDo notdrive on.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 332).

XShift thetransmission to position j.

XTurn thefrontwheels towardsthecurb.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

216 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The yellow !warning lamp lights up. The red F(USAonly)

or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds

after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedor released. It then

goesout or remainslit.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XApply theelectric parking brake.

If it is notpossibleto engage theelectric parking brake:

XShift thetransmission to position j.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

If it is notpossibleto release theelectric parking brakemanually:

XReleasetheelectric parking brakeautomatically (Ypage 146).

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe released:

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

The yellow !warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release theelectric parking brake, thered F(USAonly) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.It is notpossibleto apply

theelectric parking brakemanually.

XShift thetransmission to position j,as theelectric parking brake

is notappliedautomatically.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

If it is notpossibleto release theelectric parking brakemanually:

XReleasetheelectric parking brakeautomatically (Ypage 146).

F(USA

only) !(Canada

only)

ParkingBrake Inop‐

erative

The yellow !warning lamp lights up. The red F(USAonly)

or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds

after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedor released. It then

goesout or remainslit.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning,e.g. because of over-

voltageor undervoltage.

XRemove thecausefor theovervoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by

charging thebattery or restarting theengine.

XEngage or release theelectric parking brake.

If it remainsimpossible to apply or release theelectric parking brake:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XEngage or release theelectric parking brake.

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe released:

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe applied:

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 217

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The yellow !warning lamp lights up and thered F(USAonly)

or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

It is notpossibleto apply theelectric parking brakemanually.

XShift thetransmission to position j.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

$(USAonly)

J(Canada only)

Check Brake Fluid

Level

There is notenough brakefluid in thebrakefluid reservoir.

In addition,the$(USAonly) or J(Canada only) warning lamp

lights up in theinstrumentclusterand awarning tone sounds.

GWARNING

The braking effectmay be impaired.

There is ariskof an accident.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinuedriving

under any circumstances.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

XDo notadd brakefluid.This does notcorrectthemalfunction.

Check Brake Pad Wear

The brakepads/linings havereached their wear limit.

USAonly: the$red brakesystem warning lamp is lit while the

engineis running.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative

Oneor moremain features of thembrace system are malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Active Brake Assist

Functions Currently

LimitedSee Opera‐

tor's Manual

Active Brake Assistis temporarily inoperative.

Possiblecauses are:

RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor

other sourcesof electromagneticradiation.

RThe system is outside theoperating temperature range.

RThe on-boardvoltageis toolow.

Whenthecauses statedaboveno longer apply, thedisplay message

disappears.

Active Brake Assistis operational again.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XRestart theengine.

218 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Active Brake Assist

Functions Limited

See Operator'sMan‐

ual

Active Brake Assistis unavailable due to amalfunction.Adaptive

Brake Assistmay also havefailed.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐

tiveSee Operator's

Manual

Importantfunctionsof PRE-SAFE®havefailed. Allother occupant

safetysystems,e.g. air bags,remain available.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Active Brake Assist

Functions Currently

LimitedSee Opera‐

tor's Manual

Active Brake Assistwithcross-traffic function is temporarily inopera-

tive.

Possiblecauses are:

RFunction is impaireddue to heavyrain or snow.

RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor

other sourcesof electromagneticradiation.

RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP®is deactivated

RThe system is outside theoperating temperature range.

RThe on-boardvoltageis toolow.

Whenthecauses statedaboveno longer apply, thedisplay message

disappears.

Active Brake Assistwithcross-traffic function is operational again.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XRestart theengine.

XMercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP®on again (Ypage 69).

Active Brake Assist

Functions Limited

See Operator'sMan‐

ual

Active Brake Assistwithcross-traffic function is unavailable due to a

malfunction.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 219

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Radar SensorsDirty

See Operator'sMan‐

ual

The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.

Possiblecauses are:

RDirt on sensors

RHeavy rain or snow

RWhendrivingon inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,

e.g. in desert-like areas

At least onedrivingsystem or drivingsafetysystem is malfunctioning

or is temporarily unavailable:

RActive Brake Assistwithcross-traffic function

RActive Brake Assist

RActive LaneKeepingAssist

RActive Blind Spot Assist

RDistancePilotDISTRONICwithSteering Pilot

If theradar sensor system in frontis dirty, Active Blind Spot Assistwill

notperform a course-correcting brakeapplication.

Once thecauseof theproblem is no longer present, thedrivingand

drive safetysystems will be available again.The display message dis-

appears.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XSwitchoff theengine.

XClean all sensors (Ypage 292).

XRestart theengine.

The display message disappears.

SRS Malfunction Ser‐

viceRequired

The restraintsystem is malfunctioning.The 6warning lamp also

lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

GWARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered

unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbe triggered.

There is an increased riskof injury.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Forfurther information about therestraintsystem, see (Ypage 43).

Front LeftMalfunc‐

tionService

Required or Front

Right Malfunction

ServiceRequired

The restraintsystem is malfunctioning at thefronton theleftor right.

The 6warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

GWARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered

unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbe triggered.

There is an increased riskof injury.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

220 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

RearLeftMalfunc‐

tionService

Required or Rear

Right Malfunction

ServiceRequired

The rear left-handor right-hand restraintsystem is malfunctioning.

The 6warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

GWARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered

unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbe triggered.

There is an increased riskof injury.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

LeftSideCurtain

Airbag Malfunction

ServiceRequired or

Right SideCurtain

Airbag Malfunction

ServiceRequired

There is amalfunction in theleft-handand/orright-hand head bag.

The 6warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

GWARNING

The leftor right head bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in

theevent of an accident, may notbe triggered.

There is an increased riskof injury.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Malfunction Service

Required

GWARNING

The rollbars are defective.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 221

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Front Passenger Air‐

bag Disabled See

Operator'sManual

The front-passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee bag are

deactivated during thejourney although:

Ran adult

Raperson of thecorrespondingstatureis on thefront-passenger seat

If additional forcesare appliedto theseat,thesystem may interpret

theoccupant's weightas lower than it actually is.

GWARNING

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag will notbe

triggered in theevent of an accident.

There is an increased riskof injury.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XSwitchtheignition off.

XHavetheoccupant on thefront-passenger seat get out of thevehi-

cle.

XKeeptheseat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and

switch on theignition.

XObservethePASSENGER AIRBAGindicator lampsin thecenter

console and themultifunction display and checkthefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

Raself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAGOFFand

PASSENGER AIRBAGON indicator lampsmustlightup simulta-

neouslyfor approximately six seconds

RthePASSENGER AIRBAGOFFindicator lamp mustthen lightup

and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.If theindicator lamp is on,

theOCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled thefront-

passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee bag

(Ypage 52)

Rthedisplay messagesFront Passenger Airbag Enabled

See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐

abled See Operator'sManual mustnotappear in themulti-

function display

XWait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysystem

checks havebeen completed.

XMakesurethat thedisplay messagesdo notappear in themulti-

function display.

If these conditionsare fulfilled,thefront-passenger seat can be occu-

pied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAGOFFindicator lamp

remainslit or goesout dependson how OCS classifies theoccupant.

If theconditionsare notfulfilled,thesystem is notoperating correctly.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Forfurther information about theOccupant Classification System, see

(Ypage 52).

222 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Front Passenger Air‐

bag EnabledSee

Operator'sManual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled

during thejourney although:

Rachild, asmall adult or an objectweighing less than thesystem's

weightthreshold is locatedon thefront-passenger seat

Rthefront-passenger seat is unoccupied

The system may detectobjects or forcesapplyingadditional weighton

theseat.

GWARNING

The front-passenger air bag and thefront-passenger knee bag may be

triggered unintentionally.

There is an increased riskof injury.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XSwitchtheignition off.

XOpenthefront-passenger door.

XRemove thechild and thechild restraintsystem from thefront-

passenger seat.

XMakesurethat there are no objects on theseat addingto the

weight.

The system might otherwise detecttheadditional weightand inter-

prettheseat occupant's weightas greaterthan it actually is.

XKeeptheseat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and

switch on theignition.

XObservethePASSENGER AIRBAGindicator lampsin thecenter

console and themultifunction display and checkthefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:

Raself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAGOFFand

PASSENGER AIRBAGON indicator lampsmustlightup simulta-

neouslyfor approximately six seconds

RthePASSENGER AIRBAGOFFindicator lamp mustthen lightup

and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.If theindicator lamp is on,

theOCS has disabled thefront-passenger frontair bag and front-

passenger knee bag (Ypage 52)

Rthedisplay messagesFront Passenger Airbag Enabled

See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐

abled See Operator'sManual mustnotappear in themulti-

function display

XWait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysystem

checks havebeen completed.

XMakesurethat thedisplay messagesdo notappear in themulti-

function display.

If these conditionsare fulfilled,thefront-passenger seat can be occu-

pied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAGOFFindicator lamp

remainslit or goesout dependson how OCS classifies theoccupant.

If theconditionsare notfulfilled,thesystem is notoperating correctly.

Display messages 223

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Forfurther information about theOccupant Classification System, see

(Ypage 52).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Check LeftLow Beam

(Example)

The bulb in question is malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

iLEDlightsources: thedisplay message for thecorresponding

lamp only appearswhen all theLEDs in thelamp havefailed.

Active Headlamps

Inoperative

The active lightfunction is malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction See

Operator’sManual

The exteriorlighting is malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

AutoLampFunction

Inoperative

The lightsensor is malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Switch Off Lights

You leavethevehicleand thelights are switched on. A warning tone

also sounds.

XTurn thelightswitch to theÃposition.

Switch On Headlamps

You are drivingwithlow-beam headlampsswitched off.

XTurn thelightswitch to theLor Ãposition.

Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Currently

Unavailable See

Operator'sManual

Adaptive HighbeamAssistis deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Possiblecauses are:

RThe windshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty.

RVisibilityis impaireddue to heavyrain,snow or fog.

XClean thewindshield.

If thesystem detects that thecamera is fullyoperational again,the

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.

Adaptive HighbeamAssistis operational again.

Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Inoperative

Adaptive HighbeamAssistis malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

224 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Check Coolant Level

See Operator's Man‐

ual

The coolant level is too low.

!Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine

cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

XAdd coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so

(Ypage 284).

If you have to add coolant frequently:

XContact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling

system checked.

?The fan motor is malfunctioning.

XIf the coolant temperature is below the red marking in the coolant

temperature gauge, drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-

shop.

XAvoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-

tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Coolant Too Hot

Stop Vehicle Turn

Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.

GWARNING

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some

fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch

fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which

can occur just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-

ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XWait until the engine has cooled down.

XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,

e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

XDo not start the engine again until the display message goes out and

the coolant temperature gauge is below the red marking. Other-

wise, the engine could be damaged.

XPay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.

If the temperature increases again:

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant

level, the coolant temperature gauge may rise to the red marking.

Display messages 225

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

See Operator'sMan‐

ual

The battery is notbeingcharged.

Awarning tone also sounds.

Possiblecauses are:

Radefective alternator

Ratorn poly-V-belt

Ramalfunction in theelectronics

!Do notcontinuedriving. The enginecould otherwise overheat.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine, pay-

ing attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

StopVehicleSee

Operator'sManual

The battery is no longer beingcharged and thecondition of chargeis

toolow.

Awarning tone also sounds.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine, pay-

ing attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XObservetheinstructionsin the#See Operator'sManual

display message.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

StopVehicleLeave

Engine Running

The battery condition of chargeis toolow.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinuedriving

under any circumstances.

XLeavetheenginerunning.

XWait until thedisplay message disappearsbefore pullingaway.

Start Engine See

Operator'sManual

The engineis switched off and thecondition of chargeis toolow.

XSwitchoff electrical consumersthat you do notneed, suchas the

rear window defrosterand interior lighting.

XLeavetheenginerunningfor afew minutesor drive alongdistance.

The battery is beingcharged.

226 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Check Engine Oil At

NextRefueling

The engineoil level has dropped to theminimum level.

Awarning tone also sounds.

!Avoid longjourneys withtoolittleengineoil. The enginewill oth-

erwise be damaged.

XChecktheoil level when next refueling, at thelatest (Ypage 283).

XIf necessary, add engineoil (Ypage 283).

If you have to addengineoil frequently:

XContact a qualified specialist workshop and havetheengine

checked.

Information on approvedengineoils can be obtained from aqualified

specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-

benz.com.

Check Engine Oil

Level (Add 1 quart)

(USA) Check Engine

Oil Level (Add 1

Liter) (Canada)

Mercedes-AMG C 63 vehicles:

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

!Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-

erwise be damaged.

XCheck the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Ypage 283).

XIf necessary, add engine oil (Ypage 283).

If you have to add engine oil frequently:

XContact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine

checked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified

specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-

benz.com.

Engine Oil Level

Low Stop Vehicle

Turn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG C 63 vehicles:

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-

ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XCheck the engine oil level (Ypage 283).

XIf necessary, add engine oil (Ypage 283).

Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

XRefuel at the nearest gas station.

Display messages 227

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

CThere is only averysmall amount of fuel in thefuel tank.

XRefuelat thenearestgas station without fail.

Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is notclosed correctlyor thefuel system is leaking.

XCheckthat thefuel filler cap is correctlyclosed.

If thefuel filler cap is not correctlyclosed:

XClosethefuel filler cap.

If thefuel filler cap is correctlyclosed:

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

ATTENTION ASSIST:

TakeaBreak!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detectedfatigue or

alack of concentration on thepart of thedriver. A warning tone also

sounds.

XIf necessary, take a break.

During longjourneys, takeregular breaks in goodtime so you get

enough rest.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

VehicleRising

The vehicleis rising to thelevel you haveselected.

VehicleRising

Please Wait

The vehiclelevel is toolow when thevehicleis stationary. Awarning

tone also sounds.

XDo notpull away.

The vehiclelevel is set when thedisplay message disappears.

StopVehicleVehi‐

cle Too Low

You havepulled away while thevehiclelevel is still toolow.

AIRMATIC setsthevehicleto theselected level after ashort period.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XWait until thedisplay message disappearsbefore pullingaway.

228 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

XDo notdrive at speeds above50 mph (80 km/h).

XMakeonly slight steering movements. Otherwise,thefrontfender

or thetires could be damaged if thesteering movement is toolarge.

XListenfor scraping sounds.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely, payingattention to roadand

traffic conditions, and set ahigher vehiclelevel.

Dependingon themalfunction,it may be possibleto raisethevehi-

cle.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handlingcharac-

teristics may be affected.

XDo notdrive at speeds above50 mph (80 km/h).

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

LaneKeepingAssist

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual or Active

LaneKeepingAssist

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual

LaneKeepingAssistor Active LaneKeepingAssistis deactivated and

temporarily inoperative.

Possiblecauses are:

RThe windshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty.

RVisibilityis impaireddue to heavyrain,snow or fog.

RThere havebeen no lanemarkingsfor an extended period

RThe lanemarkingsare wornaway, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirtor

snow.

Whenthecauses statedaboveno longer apply, thedisplay message

disappears.

LaneKeepingAssistor Active LaneKeepingAssistis operational

again.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XClean thewindshield.

LaneKeepingAssist

Inoperative or

Active LaneKeeping

Assist Inoperative

LaneKeepingAssistor Active LaneKeepingAssistis malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 229

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Blind SpotAssist

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual or Active

Blind SpotAssist

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual

Blind Spot Assistor Active Blind Spot Assistis temporarily inoperative.

Possiblecauses are:

RThe radar sensor system is outside theoperating temperature

range.

RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor

other sourcesof electromagneticradiation.

Whenthecauses statedaboveno longer apply, thedisplay message

disappears.

Blind Spot Assistor Active Blind Spot Assistis operational again.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XRestart theengine.

Blind SpotAssist

Inoperative or

Active Blind Spot

Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assistor Active Blind Spot Assistis malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

ParkingPilot Can‐

celed

The driver's door is open.

XRepeat theparking gap measurementand parking process withthe

driver's door closed.

You touched themultifunction steering wheelwhile steering inter-

vention was active.

XWhilesteering intervention is active,makesurethat themultifunc-

tion steering wheelis nottouched unintentionally.

The vehiclehas started to skid and ESP®has intervened.

XUse theParking Pilotagain later (Ypage 166).

ParkingPilot Inop‐

erative

Parking Pilotis malfunctioning or defective.

XFollow theinstructionsand helpful hints in the"Problemswith

Parking AssistPARKTRONIC" section (Ypage 172).

If themultifunction display still shows thedisplay message:

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilotis unavailable or malfunctioning.

XSwitchoff theignition and restarttheengine.

If theParking Pilotcontinues to be unavailable (the jsymbol does

notappear in themultifunction display):

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

ParkingPilot Fin‐

ished

The vehicleis parked. Awarning tone also sounds.

The display message disappearsautomatically.

230 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

TrafficSignAssist

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual

Traffic SignAssistis temporarily inoperative.

Possiblecauses are:

RThe windshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty.

RVisibilityis impaireddue to heavyrain,snow or fog.

XClean thewindshield.

If thesystem detects that thecamera is fullyoperational, thedisplay

message disappears.

Traffic SignAssistis operational again.

TrafficSignAssist

Inoperative

Traffic SignAssistis malfunctioning.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Off

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicleis skidding.

Awarning tone also sounds.

XReactivatetheHOLD function later (Ypage 162).

The HOLD function is deactivated. Whenthebrakepedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is notfulfilled.

Awarning tone also sounds.

XChecktheactivation conditionsfor theHOLD function

(Ypage 161).

Distance Pilot Off DistancePilotDISTRONICis deactivated (Ypage 158).

If it was notdeactivated by thedriver, a warning tone also sounds.

Distance Pilot Now

Available

DistancePilotDISTRONICis operational again after having been tem-

porarily unavailable.You can nowreactivateDistancePilot

DISTRONIC (Ypage 155).

Distance Pilot Cur‐

rently Unavailable

See Operator'sMan‐

ual

DistancePilotDISTRONICis temporarily inoperative.

Steering Pilotis also temporarily inoperative.

Possiblecauses are:

RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor

other sourcesof electromagneticradiation.

RThe system is outside theoperating temperature range.

RThe on-boardvoltageis toolow.

Awarning tone also sounds.

Whenthecauses statedaboveno longer apply, thedisplay message

disappears.

DistancePilotDISTRONICis operational again.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XRestart theengine.

Display messages 231

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Distance Pilot Inop‐

erative

DistancePilotDISTRONICis malfunctioning.

The followingmay havealso failed:

RActive Brake Assistwithcross-traffic function

RSteering Pilot

Awarning tone also sounds.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Distance Pilot Sus‐

pended

You havedepressed theacceleratorpedal.DistancePilotDISTRONIC

is no longer controllingthespeed of thevehicle.

XRemove your footfrom theacceleratorpedal.

Distance Pilot

---mph

Acondition for activating DistancePilotDISTRONIChas notbeen met.

XChecktheactivation conditionsfor DistancePilotDISTRONIC

(Ypage 155).

Steering Pilot Cur‐

rently Unavailable

See Operator'sMan‐

ual

Steering Pilotis temporarily inoperative.

Possiblecauses are:

RThe windshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty.

RVisibilityis impaireddue to heavyrain,snow or fog.

RThere havebeen no lanemarkingsfor an extended period.

RThe lanemarkingsare wornaway, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirtor

snow.

Whenthecauses statedaboveno longer apply, thedisplay message

disappears.

Steering Pilotis operational again.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XClean thewindshield.

Steering Pilot Inop‐

erative

Steering Pilotis malfunctioning.

However, theDistancePilotDISTRONICfunctionsare still available.

Awarning tone also sounds.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlInop‐

erative

Cruisecontrol is malfunctioning.

Awarning tone also sounds.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

232 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Cruise Control

---mph

RAcondition for activating cruise control has notbeen met.

You havetried to store aspeed below20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-

ple.

RESP®is deactivated. The yellowESP®OFFwarning lamp is lit.

XIf conditionspermit,drive fasterthan 20 mph (30 km/h)and store

thespeed.

XChecktheactivation conditionsfor cruise control (Ypage 151).

XReactivateESP®(Ypage 204).

XReactivateESP®in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Ypage 69).

Cruise ControlOff Cruisecontrol has been deactivated.

If awarning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-

matically (Ypage 151).

Display messages 233

On-board computer and displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Check Tire Pressure

Soon

Canada only:

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss

in pressure.

A warning tone also sounds.

Possible causes:

Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed

new wheels and tires

Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly

GWARNING

Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:

Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.

Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be

greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

XStop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XCheck the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat

tire (Ypage 296).

XCheck the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.

XRestart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-

sure is correct (Ypage 319).

Check Tire Pressure

Then Restart Run

Flat Indicator

Canada only:

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message

and has not been restarted since.

XSet the correct tire pressure in all four tires.

XRestart the tire pressure loss warning system (Ypage 319).

Run Flat Indicator

Inoperative

Canada only:

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct Tire

Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire

pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

XCheck the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Ypage 321).

XIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.

XRestart the tire pressure monitor (Ypage 321).

234 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Check Tires The tire pressurein oneor moretires has dropped significantly. The

wheelposition is displayed in themultifunction display.

Awarning tone also sounds.

GWARNING

Tirepressures that are toolow posethefollowinghazards:

Rthey may burst, especially as theload and vehiclespeed increase.

Rthey may wear excessivelyand/orunevenly, whichmay greatly

impair tire traction.

Rthedrivingcharacteristics,as well as steering and braking,may be

greatlyimpaired.

There is ariskof an accident.

XStop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsas you do so.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XCheckthetires and,if necessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat

tire (Ypage 296).

XCheckthetire pressure (Ypage 321).

XIf necessary, correctthetire pressure.

WarningTireMal‐

function

The tire pressurein oneor moretires has dropped suddenly. The wheel

position is shown in themultifunction display.

GWARNING

Drivingwith a flat tire poses ariskof thefollowinghazards:

Raflat tire affects theabilityto steer or brakethevehicle

Ryou could lose control of thevehicle

Rcontinued drivingwith a flat tire will causeexcessive heat build-up

and possibly a fire

There is ariskof an accident.

XStop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsas you do so.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XCheckthetires and,if necessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat

tire (Ypage 296).

TirePress. Monitor

Currently Unavaila‐

ble

Becausethere is interferencefrom astrongsource of radiowaves, no

signals from thetire pressuresensorsare detected. The tire pressure

monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.

XDrive on.

The tire pressuremonitor restarts automatically as soonas the

problem has been resolved.

TirePress.Sen‐

sor(s) Missing

There is no signal from thetire pressuresensor of oneor several tires.

The pressureof theaffectedtire is notdisplayed in themultifunction

display.

XHavethefaultytire pressuresensor replacedat aqualified special-

ist workshop.

Display messages 235

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

TirePressure Moni‐

tor Inoperative No

Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounteddo nothave a suitable tire pressuresensor.The

tire pressuremonitor is deactivated.

XMountwheels withsuitable tire pressuresensors.

The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor

afew minutes.

TirePress. Monitor

Inoperative

The tire pressuremonitor is faulty.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Tires OverheatedThe tire temperature monitoring function is notavailable in all vehi-

cles.

At least onetire has overheated. Affectedtires are shown in red.At

temperatures close to thelimitvalue,thetires are shown in yellow.

XDrive moreslowly.

Tires Overheated

Decrease Speed

The tire temperature monitoring function is notavailable in all vehi-

cles.

At least onetire has overheated.

GWARNING

Overheated tires can burst, particularly at high speeds.

XDrive moreslowly so that thetires cool down.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'

to Start Engine

You haveattemptedto start theenginewiththetransmission in posi-

tion kor h.

XShift thetransmission to position jor i.

Apply Brake to

Shift from'P'

You haveattemptedto shift thetransmission to position h,kor i

without depressing thebrakepedal.

XDepress thebrakepedal.

To Deselect Por N,

DepressBrake and

Start Engine

Withtheengineswitched off,you haveattemptedto shift thetrans-

mission out of position jor iintoanother transmission position.

XDepress thebrakepedal.

XStart theengine.

To Engage Trans‐

miss. Position R

First Depressthe

Brake

You haveattemptedto shift from position hto position k.

XDepress thebrakepedal.

XShift thetransmission to position k.

236 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Driver's DoorOpen

&Transmission Not

in PRiskof Vehi‐

cle RollingAway

The driver's door is open or notfully closed and thetransmission is in

position k,ior h.

Awarning tone also sounds.

GWARNING

The vehiclemay rollaway.

There is ariskof an accident.

XShift thetransmission to position j.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XClosethedriver's door completely.

OnlyShift to 'P'

whenVehicleis Sta‐

tionary

The vehicleis moving.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XShift thetransmission to position j.

ServiceRequired Do

Not Shift Gears

Visit Dealer

You cannotchangethetransmission position due to amalfunction.

Awarning tone also sounds.

If transmission position his selected:

XDrive to aqualified specialist workshop without shifting thetrans-

mission from position h.

If transmission position k,ior jis selected:

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XNotify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐

ble ServiceRequired

You cannotshift intotransmission position kdue to amalfunction.

The transmission positionsj,ior hcontinueto be available.

Awarning tone also sounds.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐

function Stop

Amalfunction has occurred in themechanical transmission compo-

nents.

Awarning tone also sounds. The transmission automatically shiftsto

position i.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XShift thetransmission to position j.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XNotify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Display messages 237

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

StopVehicleLeave

Engine RunningWait

Transmission Cool‐

ing

The transmission has overheated. Pullingaway can be temporarily

impairedor notpossible.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinuedriving

under any circumstances.

XLeavetheenginerunning.

XWait until thedisplay message disappearsbefore pullingaway.

NThe trunk lid is open.

XClosethetrunk lid.

MThe hoodis open. A warning tone also sounds.

GWARNING

The open hoodmay blockyour viewwhen thevehicleis in motion.

There is ariskof an accident.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XClosethehood.

CAt least onedoor is open. A warning tone also sounds.

XCloseall thedoors.

Front LeftSeat

Backrest Not Locked

or Front Right Seat

Backrest Not Locked

The driver's or frontpassenger's seat backrest is notengaged. A

warning tone also sounds.

XPush thebackrest backuntil it engages.

Power Steering Mal‐

function See Opera‐

tor's Manual

The powersteering is malfunctioning.

Awarning tone also sounds.

GWARNING

You will need to use moreforce to steer.

There is ariskof an accident.

XCheckwhether you are able to apply theextraforce required.

If you areableto steer safely:

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

If you areunable to steer safely:

XDo notdrive on.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

238 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Phone No ServiceYour vehicleis outside thenetwork provider'stransmitter/receiver

range.

XWait until themobile phone operational readiness symbol appears

in themultifunction display.

Trunk Partition Open

The trunk partition is open.

XClosethetrunk partition (Ypage 90).

While stationary,

apply the brakes

before operating

the softtop.

The vehicleis stationary and you tryto open or close thesofttop.

XDepress thebrakepedal.

XPush or pull thesofttopswitch again until thesofttopis fullyopen

or closed (Ypage 89).

Convertible Top

Operation Possible

to 35 mph

If you drive at speeds of morethan 35 mph (60 km/h), you cannot

open or close thesofttop.

XDo notdrive at speeds above35 mph (60 km/h).

XFullyopen or close thesofttop (Ypage 89).

Convertible Top Low‐

ering

The softtopis notfully opened or closed.The hydraulicsare depres-

surized.

XFullyopen or close thesofttop (Ypage 89).

Open/CloseConver‐

tible Top Completely

The roofis notlocked.

If you drive at speeds of morethan 35 mph (60 km/h), you cannot

open or close thesofttop.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XPush or pull and hold thesoft-topswitch until thesofttopis fully

open or closed (Ypage 89).

Start Engine See

Operator'sManual

The on-boardvoltageis toolow.

XStart theengine.

Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluidlevel in thewasher fluidreservoir has dropped below

theminimum.

XAddwasher fluid (Ypage 285).

Display messages 239

On-board computer and displays

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Key Does Not Belong

to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

XUse the correct SmartKey.

Take Your Key from

Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

A warning tone sounds

XRemove the SmartKey.

Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.

XChange the batteries (Ypage 79).

Don't Forget Your

Key

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's

door with the engine switched off. A warning tone sounds

This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is

simply a reminder.

XTake the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Not Detected

(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.

XChange the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired

position.

Key Not Detected

(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

A warning tone also sounds.

If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-

trally or start the engine.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XLocate the SmartKey.

XPress aon the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

240 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Becausethere is interferencefrom astrongsource of radiowaves, the

SmartKey is notdetectedwhilsttheengineis running.

Awarning tone also sounds.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 143).

XInserttheSmartKey intotheignition lockand drive in SmartKey

mode.

Remove 'Start'But‐

ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has atemporarymalfunction or is

faulty. Awarning tone also sounds.

XInserttheSmartKey intotheignition lockand turnit to thedesired

position.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes

Some systems carry out aself-diagnosis when theignition is switched on.Therefore,someindicator

and warning lampsmay lightup or flashtemporarily. This behavioris non-critical.These indicator

and warning lampsonly indicate a malfunction if they lightup or flashafter starting theengineor

whilstdriving.

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

üNAfterstarting theengine, thered seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec-

onds.

The seat belt warning lamp remindsthedriver and frontpassenger to fastentheir

seat belts.

XFastenyour seat belt (Ypage 47).

üNAfterstarting theengine, thered seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a

warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is notfastened.

XFastenyour seat belt (Ypage 47).

The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 241

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

üNThe red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the

driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

XFasten your seat belt (Ypage 47).

The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.

XRemove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure

place.

The warning lamp goes out.

üNThe red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning

sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being

driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph

(25 km/h).

XFasten your seat belt (Ypage 47).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster

than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).

XRemove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure

place.

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

242 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Safety systems

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

$J N$(USA only), J(Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit

while the engine is running.

A warning tone also sounds.

GWARNING

The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be

affected.

There is a risk of an accident.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$(USA only), J(Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp lights

up while the engine is running.

A warning tone also sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

GWARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road

and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XDo not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$NUSA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The multifunction display also shows a display message with the #symbol.

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 243

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

!NThe yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.

If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

GWARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed

above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-

ple.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking

distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP®is not operational, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such

as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

÷!

N$(USA only), J(Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow

ESP®and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.

ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

GWARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed

above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-

ple.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking

distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

If ESP®is not operational, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

244 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

÷NThe yellow ESP®warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

ESP®or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at

least one wheel has started to spin.

Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.

XWhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.

XEase off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.

XAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

XDo not deactivate ESP®.

In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®:

Rwhen using snow chains

Rin deep snow

Ron sand or gravel

Observe the important safety notes on ESP®(Ypage 68).

÷NThe yellow ESP®warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

ESP®is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

GWARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed

above.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.

If ESP®is not operational, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 245

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

åNThe yellow ESP®OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO

start/stop function is activated.

ESP®is deactivated.

GWARNING

If ESP®is switched off, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active

Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

XReactivate ESP®.

In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®:

Rwhen using snow chains

Rin deep snow

Ron sand or gravel

Observe the important safety notes on ESP®(Ypage 68).

XAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP®cannot be activated:

XDrive on carefully.

XContact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP®checked.

MNMercedes-AMG vehicles:

The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

GWARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP®is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

XOnly activate SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-

bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Ypage 69).

246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

F! NF(USA only), !(Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric

parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric

parking brake is lit.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6NThe red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The restraint system is malfunctioning.

GWARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-

tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.

There is an increased risk of injury.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XDrive on carefully.

XContact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Ypage 43).

Engine

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

;NThe yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:

Rin the engine management

Rin the fuel injection system

Rin the exhaust system

Rin the ignition system

Rin the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency

mode.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon

as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-

ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations

apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8NThe yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

XRefuel at the nearest gas station.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 247

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

8NThe yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

In addition, the ;Check Engine warning lamp may light up.

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

XCheck that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

XIf the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.

XIf the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

?NThe red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the

coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.

The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine

damage if the coolant temperature is too high.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

?NThe red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.

The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or

the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.

The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XLeave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.

XCheck the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(Ypage 284).

XIf you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.

XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,

slush or ice.

XDo not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gauge is below the

red marking. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

XDrive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

XAvoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain

and stop-and-go traffic.

?NThe red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning

tone also sounds.

The coolant temperature gauge has reached the red marking. The airflow to the

engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

GWARNING

The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which

may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur

just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XLeave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.

XCheck the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(Ypage 284).

XIf you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.

XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,

slush or ice.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 249

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

XIf the coolant temperature is below the red marking, drive to the nearest quali-

fied specialist workshop.

XAvoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain

and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

·NThe red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning

tone also sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of

travel at too high a speed.

XBe prepared to brake immediately.

XPay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take

evasive action.

Further information about Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

(Ypage 71).

Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist

(Ypage 65).

250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Tires

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

hNThe yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

GWARNING

Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:

Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase

Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-

tion

Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly

impaired

There is a risk of an accident.

XStop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay

attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 143).

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XCheck the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire

(Ypage 296).

XCheck the tire pressure (Ypage 321).

XIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.

hNThe yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

GWARNING

The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.

There is a risk of an accident.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 251

On-board computer and displays

Vehicle

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

ÐNThe red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

The power steering is malfunctioning.

A warning tone also sounds.

GWARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.

There is a risk of an accident.

XCheck whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely:

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If you are unable to steer safely:

XDo not drive on.

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera-

tor's Manual describes the basic principles for

operation. More information can be found in the

Digital Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when

operating the multimedia system.

The multimedia system calculates the route to

the destination without taking the following into

account, for example:

Rtraffic lights

Rstop and yield signs

Rparking or stopping restrictions

Rroad narrowing

Rother road and traffic rules and regulations

The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-

igation recommendations if the actual street/

traffic situation does not correspond with the

digital map's data.

For example:

Ra diverted route

Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way

street has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe road

and traffic rules and regulations during your

journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations

always have priority over multimedia system

driving recommendations.

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting your

attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-

sulting the map display for directions. Looking

at the icons or map display can distract you from

traffic conditions and driving, and increase the

risk of an accident.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-

ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.

This equipment has very low levels of RF energy

that is deemed to comply without maximum

permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-

ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance

of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the

radiation source and a person's body (not

including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and

legs).

GWARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their

software as well as wiring can impair their

function and/or the function of other net-

worked components. In particular, systems

relevant to safety could also be affected. As a

result, these may no longer function as inten-

ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of

the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an

accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-

tronic components or their software. You

should have all work to electrical and elec-

tronic equipment carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-

ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.

You will notice this, for example, because either

you will not be able to select certain menu items

or a message will appear to this effect.

Function restrictions 253

Multimedia system

Operating system

Overview

General notes

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your

ability to read the display.

The display has an automatic temperature-con-

trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is

automatically reduced if the temperature is too

high. The display may temporarily switch off

completely.

Cleaning instructions

!Do not touch the display. The display has a

very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a

risk of scratching. If you have to clean the

screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent

and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and have

cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not

apply pressure to the display surface when

cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-

age to the display.

Switching the multimedia system

on/off

XPress the Übutton on the center console

to the right of the controller.

XFor Mercedes-AMG vehicles with a switch-

able AMG Performance exhaust system:

press the thumbwheel which is to the right of

the controller.

Adjusts the volume

XTurn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-

troller.

The volume is adjusted:

Rfor the currently selected media source

Rduring traffic or navigation announcements

Rin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or off

This function is only available on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel for Mercedes-AMG vehicles

with a selectable AMG Performance exhaust

system.

XPress the thumbwheel to the right of the con-

troller.

XPress the 8button on the multifunction

steering wheel.

If the audio output is switched off, the status

line will show the 8symbol. If you switch

the media source or change the volume, the

sound is automatically switched on.

iNavigation announcements will be heard

even if the sound is muted.

Functions

The multimedia system has the following func-

tions:

RRadio mode

RMedia mode with media search

RSound system

RNavigation system

COMAND: navigation via the hard drive

Audio 20: navigation via SD card

RCommunication functions

RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)

RVehicle functions with system settings

RFavorites functions

Controller

The controller in the center console lets you:

Rselect menu items on the display

Renter characters

Rselect a destination on the map

Rsave entries

The controller can be:

Rturned 3

Rslid left or right 1

Rslid forwards or back 4

Rslid diagonally 2

Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7

Back button

You can use the %button to exit a menu or to

call up the display of the current operating

mode.

254 Operating system

Multimedia system

XTo exit the menu: briefly press the %

button.

The multimedia system changes to the next

higher menu level in the current operating

mode.

XTo call up the highest level menu: press the

%button for longer than two seconds.

Touchpad

Switching the touchpad on/off

Multimedia system:

XSelect VehicleQSystem Set‐

tingsQTouchpadQActivate Touch‐

pad.

The touchpad is switched on Oor off ª.

Operating the touchpad

:Touch-sensitive surface

;Favorites button

=Calls up quick access for audio

?Back button

Navigating in menus and lists can be done via

touch-sensitive surface :by swiping with

your finger.

XTo select the menu item: swipe up, down, to

the left or right.

XPress the touchpad.

XTo move the digital map: swipe in all direc-

tions.

Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-

tion:

XTo show or hide the audio menu: swipe up

or down with two fingers.

XTo increase or reduce the vehicle and

sound settings: turn two fingers to the right

or left.

XTo zoom in and out of the map: move two

fingers together or apart.

Character entry with handwriting rec-

ognition

Entering characters

XUse one finger to write characters on the sur-

face.

The character is entered in the input line. If

the character that you have entered can be

interpreted in different ways, these character

suggestions are displayed.

XIf character suggestions are shown, turn and

press the controller.

XResume the character entry on the touchpad.

Handwriting recognition

Example: COMAND

:Active input line

;Inserts a space

=Character entered on the touchpad

?Deletes characters

XTo display the menu: press the touchpad.

Operating system 255

Multimedia system

Example: COMAND

:To exit the menu

;To return to handwriting recognition

=To use the phone book or text templates

?To select the input line or changes the posi-

tion of the cursor

ATo switch the language

BTo finish character entry

XTo select the input line: select p.

XSwipe up or down.

XTo move the cursor within the input line:

select p.

XSwipe to the left or right.

XTo delete characters: swipe to the left if an

input line is selected.

XTo confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of the

handwriting recognition on/off

Multimedia system:

XSelect VehicleQSystem Set‐

tingsQTouchpadQRead Out Hand‐

writing Recognition.

The read-aloud function is switched on Oor

off ª.

Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is currently

activated, you can use this function to select the

next station or music track.

XSwipe upwards with two fingers on the touch-

pad.

The current audio source is displayed.

XTo select the previous or next station/

music track: glide to the right or left.

The selected station/music track is played.

Switching the character entry between

touchpad and controller

Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or

characters has been selected.

XTo switch to the controller: press the con-

troller.

Character entry using the controller is active.

XTo switch to the touchpad: press the touch-

pad with your finger.

Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is

active.

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favorites

XTo call up: press the gbutton on the con-

troller or on the touchpad.

XSelect a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.

The favorites are displayed.

XTo exit: press the gbutton again.

256 Operating system

Multimedia system

Adding favorites

Adding predefined favorites

Example: favoritesarranged in onerow

:Adds anewfavorite

;Renames aselected favorite

=Moves aselected favorite

?Deletes aselected favorite

XPress thegbutton.

The favoritesare displayed.

These are arranged in either oneor two rows,

eachwithfivetiles.

XFavorites arearranged in one row: slide

6thecontroller.

The menubar is shown.

XSelectReassign.

The categoriesare displayed.

XSelect a category.

The favoritesare displayed.

XSelect a favorite.

XAdd a favorite at thedesired position.

If afavorite has already been added at this

position,it will be overwritten.

XFavorites arearranged in one row: slide

6or 5thecontroller.

XTo select WAdd:turnand press thecon-

troller.

The categoriesand predefinedfavoritesare

displayed.

XSelect a category.

The favoritesare displayed.

XSelect a favorite.

XAdd a favorite at thedesired position.

If afavorite has already been added at this

position,it will be overwritten.

Adding yourown favorites

XSelectVehicleQClimate Control.

XPress and hold thegbuttonuntil the

favoritesare displayed.

XAdd a favorite at thedesired position.

If afavorite has already been added at this

position,it will be overwritten.

Climate control settings

General notes

You can adjust theclimatecontrol settings

usingtheclimatecontrol bar or theclimatecon-

trol menu.

Importantclimatecontrol functionscan be set

in theclimatecontrol bar:

RTemperature

RAirflow

RAir distribution

The climatecontrol bar is visible in mostdis-

plays.

You can findall available climatecontrol func-

tionsin theclimatecontrol menu. You can use

theclimatecontrol bar to switch to theclimate

control menu.

Overview

Climate control bar (COMAND)

:Adjusts temperature, air distribution on the

leftand airflow, displays thecurrentsettings

;Calls up theclimatecontrol menu, displays

thecurrentcoolingand climatemodeset-

tings

=Adjusts temperature and air distribution on

theright,displays thecurrentsettings

There may be fewer settingsor none depending

on your vehicle's equipment.

Operating system 257

Multimedia system

Calling up the climate control bar

Multimedia system:

XSelect Vehicle.

The vehicle menu is displayed.

XSlide 6the controller repeatedly until the

climate control bar is activated.

Calling up the climate control menu

Multimedia system:

XSelect Vehicle.

The vehicle menu is displayed.

XSlide 6the controller repeatedly until the

climate control bar is activated.

XTo select from climate control bar ;: turn

and press the controller.

The menu for selecting the climate control

function is activated.

XTo select the climate control function: turn

and press the controller.

The selected climate control function

appears.

Settings in the climate menu

Adjusting the climate mode settings

The climate mode determines the type of air-

flow. The setting is active when the air-condi-

tioning system is set to Ã(Ypage 117).

XCall up the climate control menu

(Ypage 258).

XTo select Climate Mode: turn and press the

controller.

XTo change the setting: turn the controller.

XTo exit the menu: press the %button.

The climate mode bar displays the current air-

flow setting: DIFFUSE,MEDIUM or FOCUS.

Switching the ionization on/off

The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in

the vehicle interior. Further information

(Ypage 120).

XCall up the climate control menu

(Ypage 258).

XTo select Ionization: turn and press the

controller.

The setting element is active.

XTo switch the ionization on or off: turn the

controller.

XTo exit the menu: press the %button.

Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-

mate control menu

Switching cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion on/off

XCall up the climate control menu

(Ypage 258).

XSlide 6the controller repeatedly until the

bottom bar is activated.

XTo select OA/C: turn and press the control-

ler.

XSwitch cooling with air dehumidification on

Oor off ª.

iThe current status of the cooling function is

displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON

– activated, A/C OFF – deactivated.

iDeactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-

fication function reduces fuel consumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set-

tings

Use OSync (synchronization) to select the cli-

mate control setting for all zones together Oor

separately ª.

XCall up the climate control menu

(Ypage 258).

XSlide 6the controller repeatedly until the

bottom bar is activated.

XTo select OSync: turn and press the con-

troller.

XSwitch the synchronization function on Oor

off ª.

For further information on synchronizing climate

control settings, see (Ypage 118).

Navigation mode

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you operate information systems and com-

munication equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you may be distracted from

the traffic situation. You could also lose con-

258 Operating system

Multimedia system

trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this

is possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when

operating the navigation system.

General notes

Among other things, correct functioning of the

navigation system depends on GPS reception. In

certain situations, GPS reception may be

impaired, there may be interference or there

may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or

parking garages.

Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin®MAP PILOT

(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Garmin®MAP PILOT operating instructions

are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD

card box contains a quick guide.

The following descriptions apply to navigation

with COMAND. Further information can be

found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route options

Multimedia system:

XSelect NaviQNavigation.

XSelect OptionsQRoute Settings.

iIf route guidance is active, first slide 6the

controller and show the menu.

XSelect a route type.

Notes for route types:

REco Route

Calculates an economic route.

RDynamic Traffic Route (only available in

the USA)

Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-

ance are taken into account.

RCalculate Alternative Routes

Different routes are being calculated. Instead

of Start, select the Continue menu item.

XTo avoid/use route options: select Avoid

Options.

XSelect a route option.

Notes for route options:

RUse Toll Roads

The route calculation includes roads which

require you to pay a usage fee (toll).

RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the

USA)

Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access

conditions for carpool lanes.

Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool

lanes option is activated.

Entering an address

Multimedia system:

XSelect NaviQNavigation.

XSelect DestinationQAddress Entry.

iIf route guidance is active, first slide 6the

controller and show the menu.

Enter an address, e.g. as follows:

Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number

Rcountry, city or ZIP code

Rcity or ZIP code, center

Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection

XSelect City.

The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-

ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.

Below this, you will see locations for which

route guidance has already been carried out.

XEnter the city.

The Gsymbol: the location is contained on

the digital map multiple times.

XTo switch to the list: slide the 5control-

ler.

XSelect the location.

If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are

different ZIP codes available for the location,

the corresponding digits are displayed with an

XEnter the street and house number.

The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:

RKeyword search

The keyword search finds destinations using

fragments of words.

Rselect the last destination

Operating system 259

Multimedia system

Rselect a contact

Rselect a POI

You can search for a POI by location, name or

telephone number.

Rselect destination on the map

Renter intermediate destination

You can map the route to the destination

yourself with up to four intermediate destina-

tions.

Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz

Apps

Rselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the route

Prerequisite: the address has been entered and

is in the menu.

XSelect Start or Continue.

The route is calculated with the selected route

type and the selected route options.

If route guidance has already been activated,

a prompt will appear asking whether you wish

to end the current route guidance.

XSelect Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐

tination.

Yes cancels the current route guidance and

starts route calculation to the new destina-

tion.

Set as Intermediate Destination adds

the new destination in addition to the existing

destination and opens the intermediate des-

tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements

Note: this segment describes connecting of a

mobile phone with COMAND. To connect a

mobile phone with Audio 20 (see the Digital

Operator's Manual).

For telephony via the Bluetooth®interface, you

require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The

mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile

1.0 or above.

Multimedia system:

XSelect VehicleQSystem Set‐

tingsQActivate Bluetooth.

XActivate Bluetooth®O.

Mobile phone:

XActivate Bluetooth®and, if necessary, Blue-

tooth®visibility for other devices (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth®device names for all of one man-

ufacturer's products might be identical. To

make it possible to clearly identify your mobile

phone, change the device name (see the man-

ufacturer's operating instructions).

If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone

Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message

Access Profile) Bluetooth®profiles, the follow-

ing information will be transmitted after you

connect:

RPhone book

RCall lists

RMessages

iFurther information on suitable mobile

phones can be obtained on the Internet at:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/

connect

iIn the USA, you can get in touch with the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-

tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobile

phone

Before using your mobile phone with the multi-

media system for the first time, you will need to

search for the phone and then authorize (con-

nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-

ization either takes place by means of Secure

Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The

multimedia system automatically makes the

procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone

available. The mobile phone is always connec-

ted automatically after authorization. Further

information on using a mobile phone with the

multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

If the multimedia system does not detect your

mobile phone, this may be due to particular

security settings on your mobile phone (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions).

Only one mobile phone can be connected to the

multimedia system at any one time.

Searching for a mobile phone

260 Operating system

Multimedia system

Multimedia system:

XSelect PhoneQConnect

DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart

Search.

The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-

bol

Explanation

ÏNew mobile phone found, not yet

authorized.

ÑMobile phone is authorized, but is

not connected.

#Mobile phone is authorized and

connected.

Connecting a mobile phone

Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:

XSelect mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system

and on the mobile phone.

XIf codes match: select Yes on the multimedia

system.

XConfirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-

ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the

connection to the multimedia system and for

the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The

prompt to confirm may take up to two

minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-

er's operating instructions).

XIf the codes are different: select No on the

multimedia system.

The process is canceled.

Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):

XSelect Bluetooth®name of the mobile phone.

The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

XChoose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-

nation as a passkey.

XEnter the passkey on the multimedia system.

XPress ¬to confirm.

XEnter and confirm the passkey on the mobile

phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,

confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-

tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®

profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up

to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-

ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phones

If you have authorized more than one mobile

phone, you can switch between the individual

phones.

Multimedia system:

XSelect PhoneQConnect Device.

XSelect a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notes

If you wish to play external media sources, the

appropriate media mode must already be turned

on. Further information on media mode (see the

Digital Operator's Manual).

The following external media sources can be

used:

RApple®devices (e.g. iPhone®)

RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)

RCD

RDVD (COMAND)

RSD cards

Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

iInformation on the single DVD drive (see the

Digital Operator's Manual).

Activating media mode

Multimedia system:

XSelect MediaQDevices .

The available media sources will be shown.

XSelect the media source.

Playable files are played.

Inserting and removing an SD card

Important safety notes

GWARNING

SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-

lowed and cause choking. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.

If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-

tion immediately.

Operating system 261

Multimedia system

!If you are no longer using the SD card, you

should remove it and store it outside the vehi-

cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD card

The SD card slot is located in the stowage com-

partment under the armrest.

XInsert the SD card into the SD card slot until

the SD card engages. The side with the con-

tacts must face down.

XSelect the media source (Ypage 261).

Removing an SD card

XPress the SD card.

The SD card is ejected.

XRemove the memory card.

Connecting USB devices

USB ports e.g. when the vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system.

There are two USB ports in the stowage space

under the armrest.

XConnect the USB device to the USB port.

XSelect the media source (Ypage 261).

262 Operating system

Multimedia system

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

gases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open when the engine is running,

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a

risk of poisoning.

Always switch off the engine before opening

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid

open.

GWARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or

not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-

den change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be

flung around. Secure objects, luggage or

loads against slipping or tipping before the

journey.

GWARNING

The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can

become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn

yourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around the

exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

these components to cool down before touch-

ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle

are dependent on the distribution of the load

within the vehicle. For this reason, you should

observe the following notes when transporting a

load:

RNever exceed the maximum permissible

gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight

rating for the vehicle (including occupants).

The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's

door.

RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry

objects.

RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-

sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.

RThe load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests.

RAlways place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible.

RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and

wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for

protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If objects in the passenger compartment are

stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be

thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In

addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces

and mobile phone brackets cannot always

retain all objects they contain. There is a risk

of injury, particularly in the event of sudden

braking or a sudden change in direction.

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.

RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or

stowage nets.

RClose the lockable stowage spaces before

starting a journey.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in

the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Ypage 263).

Stowage areas 263

Stowage and features

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

XTo open: pull handle :and open glove box

flap ;.

XTo close: fold glove box flap ;up until it

engages.

The glove box can only be locked and unlocked

using the mechanical key (Ypage 78).

XTo lock: insert the mechanical key into the

lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.

XTo unlock: insert the mechanical key into the

lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to

position 1.

Eyeglasses compartment

XTo open: press marking :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is

always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the front center

console

XBriefly press trim ;in the direction of the

arrow.

Cover :swings up.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

XTo open: press button :at front.

The stowage space opens.

264 Stowage areas

Stowage and features

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-

lowing may be in the stowage space:

Ran SD card slot

Ra multimedia connector unit with two USB

ports, e.g. for iPod®, iPhone®or MP3 player

(see the Digital Operator's Manual)

Ra mobile phone bracket

Ra small stowage space in the upper front sec-

tion

Stowage compartment in the doors

In stowage space :in the doors, you can store

bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l),

a rolled-up fluorescent jacket (driver's door) and

the vehicle document wallet (front-passenger

door).

Additional stowage space

Depending on the equipment, the following

additional stowage areas are available in the

vehicle:

Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard above

the light switch (not suitable for holding thin

objects such as shopping tokens)

Rthe open stowage compartment in the center

console

Rstowage net in the front-passenger footwell

Rparcel net on the left-hand side in the trunk

Rstowage nets on the left and right in the foot-

well of the rear bench seat

Observe the loading guidelines (Ypage 263)

and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces

(Ypage 263).

Rear bench seat through-loading fea-

ture

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat

backrest are not engaged they could fold for-

wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the

event of an accident.

RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be

pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench

seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The

seat belt can no longer offer the intended

level of protection and could even cause

injuries.

RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be

restrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.

Before every trip, make sure that the seat

backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat

are engaged.

!When folding the rear seat backrest for-

wards, ensure that there are no items lying on

the seat cushions. These items could other-

wise be damaged or could themselves dam-

age the rear seats.

Observe the loading guidelines (Ypage 263).

The left and right rear seat backrests can be fol-

ded down separately to increase the trunk capa-

city.

Folding the rear seat backrests forward

XVehicles without memory function: if neces-

sary, move the driver's or front-passenger

seat forward.

XVehicles with memory function: when one or

both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded

forward, the respective front seat moves

forward slightly, when necessary, in order to

avoid contact.

XOpen the trunk.

Stowage areas 265

Stowage and features

XPress the right or left button :on the rear

seat backrest.

The corresponding rear seat backrest is

released.

XFold corresponding rear seat backrest ;

forward.

XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat

back if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back

!Make sure that the seat belt does not

become trapped when folding the rear seat

backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-

aged.

Left and right seat backrest

XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat

forward if necessary.

XFold rear seat backrest :back until it

engages.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and

locked, this will be shown in the multifunction

display in the instrument cluster. A warning

tone also sounds.

You should always engage the rear seat backr-

ests if you do not need the through-loading fea-

ture. This will prevent unauthorized access to

the trunk from the vehicle interior.

Securing loads

Cargo tie-down rings

Observe the following notes on securing loads:

RObserve the loading guidelines (Ypage 263).

RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down

rings.

RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down

rings evenly.

RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a

load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip

protection for light loads.

RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or

corners.

RPad sharp edges for protection.

XFold up the cargo tie-down rings next to the

rear seat backrest and put them through the

slots in the carpet.

266 Stowage areas

Stowage and features

Parcel net

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If objects in the passenger compartment are

stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be

thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In

addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces

and mobile phone brackets cannot always

retain all objects they contain. There is a risk

of injury, particularly in the event of sudden

braking or a sudden change in direction.

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.

RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or

stowage nets.

RClose the lockable stowage spaces before

starting a journey.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in

the trunk.

Observe the following notes:

RObserve the loading guidelines (Ypage 263).

Attaching the parcel net

XFold up the cargo tie-down rings next to the

rear seat backrest and put them through the

slots in the carpet.

XAttach parcel net :to the front and rear

cargo tie-down rings.

Stowage well under the trunk floor

The following items are located beneath the

trunk floor, for example:

Rthe folding box

Rtire-change tool kit

RTIREFIT kit

!Unhook the handle before again before clos-

ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre-

vent the handle flap from protruding. Other-

wise, you could damage the handle.

XTo open: pull handle :up.

XHook handle :into rain trough ;.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

GWARNING

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure

whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst

traveling, the container may be flung around

and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-

Features 267

Stowage and features

pants may come into contact with the liquid

and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may

be distracted from the traffic conditions and

you could lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of an accident and injury.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is

stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-

tainers of the right size. Always close the con-

tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.

GWARNING

If objects in the passenger compartment are

stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be

thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In

addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces

and mobile phone brackets cannot always

retain all objects they contain. There is a risk

of injury, particularly in the event of sudden

braking or a sudden change in direction.

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.

RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-

trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or

stowage nets.

RClose the lockable stowage spaces before

starting a journey.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-

ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in

the trunk.

!Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The drinks

could otherwise spill.

!Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup

holder in the center console to continuous,

strong and direct sunlight. The passenger

compartment in the area of the center con-

sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-

centrated and reflected sunlight.

Observe the loading guidelines (Ypage 263).

Cup holder in the front center console

If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use

the resulting compartment for stowage.

XTo open: open the stowage compartment

(Ypage 264).

XTo remove: slide catch =forward and pull

out cup holder ;.

XTo insert: insert cup holder ;and slide back

catch =.

XTo close: push cover :of the stowage com-

partment closed.

You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for

cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Cup holders in the rear compartment

The cup holder can hold two cups of up to

17 fl. oz. (0.5 l).

Sun visors

Overview

GWARNING

If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded

up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be

blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an

accident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded down

while driving.

268 Features

Stowage and features

:Mirror light

;Retainer

=Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket

?Vanity mirror

AMirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light :only functions if the sun visor is

clipped into bracket ;and mirror cover Ahas

been folded up.

Glare from the side

XFold down the sun visor.

XPull sun visor :out of retainer ;.

XSwing sun visor :to the side.

XSlide sun visor :horizontally as required.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

!The stowage space under the ashtray is not

heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in

the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is

properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage

space could be damaged.

XTo open: open the stowage compartment

(Ypage 264).

XPush the cover of the ashtray upwards at its

right side =.

XTo remove the insert: hold the sides of

insert ?, push it forward and lift it up ;and

out.

XTo install the insert: press insert ?into the

holder until it engages.

XTo close: close the cover of the ashtray.

XPush cover :of the stowage compartment

closed.

iYou can remove the ashtray insert and use

the resulting compartment for stowage.

Rear compartment ashtray

XTo open: pull cover ;out by its top edge.

XTo remove the insert: push ribbing =from

the left side and pull insert :upwards.

XTo install the insert: install insert :from

above into the holder and press down into the

holder until it engages.

Features 269

Stowage and features

Cigarette lighter

GWARNING

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot

heating element or the socket of the cigarette

lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:

Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls

Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is

out of reach of children. Never leave children

unsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on the

traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter

when road and traffic conditions permit.

Cigarette lighter (example)

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XTo open: open the stowage compartment

(Ypage 264).

XPress in cigarette lighter ;.

Cigarette lighter ;will pop out automatically

when the heating element is red-hot.

XTo close: push cover :of the stowage com-

partment closed.

12 V sockets

General notes

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a

maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories

include such items as chargers for mobile

phones.

If you use the sockets for long periods when the

engine is switched off, the battery may dis-

charge.

An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-

board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-

board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-

ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there

is sufficient power to start the engine.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V

socket, leave the cover of the stowage com-

partment open. This prevents the cover from

being blocked.

Socket in the front center console

12 V socket (example)

XTo open: open the stowage compartment

(Ypage 264).

XLift up the cover of socket ;.

XTo close: push cover :of the stowage com-

partment closed.

Socket in the rear compartment center

console

270 Features

Stowage and features

XPull cover ;out by its top edge.

XLift up the cover of socket :.

mbrace

General notes

The mbrace system is only available in the USA.

You must have a license agreement to activate

the mbrace service. Make sure that your system

is activated and operational. To register, press

the ïInfo call button. If any of the steps

mentioned are not carried out, the system may

not be activated.

If you have questions about the activation, con-

tact one of the following telephone hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

1-866-990-9007

Shortly after successfully registering with the

mbrace service, a user ID and password will be

sent to you by mail. You can use this password

to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners

Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

The system is available if:

Rit has been activated and is operational

Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is

available for transmitting data to the Cus-

tomer Center

Ra service subscription is available

Determining the location of the vehicle on a map

is only possible if:

RGPS reception is available

Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the

Customer Assistance Center

The mbrace system

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as

follows:

XPress the Wor Xbutton on the multi-

function steering wheel.

XUse the multimedia system volume control.

The system offers various services, e.g.:

RAutomatic and manual emergency call

RRoadside Assistance call

RInfo call

You can find information and a description of all

available features under "Owners Online" at

http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-

tem carries out a self-diagnosis.

A malfunction in the system has been detected

if one of the following occurs:

RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not

come on during the system self-test.

RThe indicator lamp in the FRoadside

Assistance button does not light up during

self-diagnosis of the system.

RThe indicator lamp in the ïInfo call button

does not light up during the system self-diag-

nosis

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-

lowing buttons continues to light up red after

the system self-diagnosis:

-SOS button

-FRoadside Assistance call button

-Info call buttonï

RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐

ative or Service Not Activated message

appears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,

the system may not operate as expected. In the

event of an emergency, help will have to be

summoned by other means.

Have the system checked at the nearest

Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the

following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

1-866-990-9007

Features 271

Stowage and features

Emergency call

Important safety notes

GWARNING

It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,

even if you have pressed the SOS button in an

emergency if:

Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-

cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident

Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of

road

Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be

seen by other road users, particularly when

dark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-

lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.

Move to a safe location along with other vehi-

cle occupants. In such situations, secure the

vehicle in accordance with national regula-

tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notes

Observe the notes on system activation

(Ypage 271).

An emergency call is dialed automatically if an

air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-

gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-

gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-

ually.

As soon as the emergency call has been initi-

ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button

flashes. The Connecting Call message

appears in the multifunction display.

The audio output is muted.

Once the connection has been made, the Call

Connected message appears in the multifunc-

tion display.

All important information on the emergency is

transmitted, for example:

RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined

by the GPS system)

RVehicle identification number

RInformation on the severity of the accident

Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-

ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-

lished between the Customer Assistance Center

and the vehicle occupants.

RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

attempts to get more information on the

emergency.

Rif there is no response from the vehicle occu-

pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to

the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,

the system has been unable to initiate an emer-

gency call.

This can occur, for example, if the relevant

mobile phone network is not available. The indi-

cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-

ously.

The Call Failed message appears in the mul-

tifunction display and must be confirmed.

In this case, summon assistance by other

means.

Making an emergency call

XTo initiate an emergency call manually:

press cover :briefly to open.

XPress and hold the SOS button for at least one

second ;.

The indicator lamp in SOS button ;flashes

until the emergency call is concluded.

XWait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

XAfter the emergency call, close cover :.

If the mobile phone network is unavailable,

mbrace will not be able to make the emergency

call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after

pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if

mbrace has successfully made the emergency

call. In this case, always summon assistance by

other means.

272 Features

Stowage and features

Roadside Assistance

XTo call: press Roadside Assistance but-

ton :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-

tomer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance

button :flashes while the call is active. The

Connecting Call message appears in the

multifunction display. The audio output is

muted.

If a connection can be made, theCall Connec‐

ted message appears in the multifunction dis-

play.

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception

are available, the system transfers data to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,

for example:

RCurrent location of the vehicle

RVehicle identification number

The multimedia system display indicates that a

call is active. During the call, you can change to

the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-

ton on the multimedia system, for example.

Voice output is not available in this case.

A voice connection is established between the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

and the vehicle occupants.

From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

can ascertain the nature of the problem

(Ypage 276).

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-

ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-

nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle

to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz

Service Center.

You may be charged for services such as repair

work and/or towing.

You can find more information in the separate

mbrace manual.

The system has not been able to initiate a Road-

side Assistance call, if:

Rthe Findicator lamp for the Roadside

Assistance call button is flashing continu-

ously.

Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center was estab-

lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-

work is not available, for example.

The Call Failed message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

XTo end a call: press the ~button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

XPress the corresponding multimedia system

button for ending a phone call.

Info call button

XTo call: press Info call button :.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-

tomer Assistance Center.

The indicator lamp in Info call button :

flashes while the connection is being made.

The Connecting Call message appears in

the multifunction display. The audio output is

muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐

nected message appears in the multifunction

display.

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception

are available, the system transfers data to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,

for example:

RCurrent location of the vehicle

RVehicle identification number

Features 273

Stowage and features

The multimedia system display indicates that a

call is active. During the call, you can change to

the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-

ton on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available in this case.

A voice connection is established between the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

and the vehicle occupants.

You receive information about operating your

vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-

vice Center and about other products and serv-

ices from Mercedes-Benz.

You can find further information on the mbrace

system under "Owners Online" at http://

www.mbusa.com.

The system has not been able to initiate an MB

Info call, if:

Rthe indicator lamp in the ïInfo call button

is flashing continuously.

Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center was estab-

lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-

work is not available, for example.

The Call Failed message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

XTo end a call: press the ~button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

XPress the corresponding multimedia system

button for ending a phone call.

Call priority

When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside

Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can

still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call

will take priority and override all other active

calls.

The indicator lamp of the respective button

flashes until the call is ended.

An emergency call can only be terminated by the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:

Rthe ~button on the multifunction steering

wheel

Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia

system to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system is

muted.

The mobile phone is no longer connected to the

multimedia system.

However, if you want to use your mobile phone,

do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in

a safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinations gives you access to a

database with over 15 million points of interest

(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-

gation system in your vehicle. If you know the

destination, the address can be downloaded.

Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations

in the vicinity.

Furthermore, you can download routes with up

to four way points.

You are prompted to confirm route guidance to

the address entered.

XSelect Yes by turning 3or sliding 1

the controller and confirm with 7.

The system calculates the route and subse-

quently starts the route guidance with the

address entered.

If you select No the address can be stored in

the address book.

The destination download function is available

if:

Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-

tem.

Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-

ble and data transfer is possible.

Route Assistance

This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package

and cannot be purchased separately.

You can use the Route Assistance function even

if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation

system.

Within the framework of this service, you receive

a professional and reliable form of navigation

support without having to leave your vehicle.

The customer service representative finds a

suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-

rent position and the desired destination. You

will then be guided live through the current route

section.

274 Features

Stowage and features

Search and Send

General notes

To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be

equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.

Additionally, an mbrace service subscription

must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A

destination address which is found on Google

Maps®can be transferred via mbrace directly to

your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destination

address

XGo to the website http://maps.google.com

and enter a destination address into the entry

field.

XTo send the destination address to the e-

mail address of your mbrace account:

click on the corresponding button on the web-

site.

Example:

If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then

'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will

be sent to your vehicle.

XWhen the "Send" dialog window appears:

Enter the e-mail address you specified when

setting up your mbrace account into the cor-

responding field.

XClick "Send".

Information on specific commands such as

"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the

website.

Calling up a transmitted destination

address

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition

lock (Ypage 123).

The transmitted destination address is loaded

into the vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking whether

navigation should be started.

XSelect Yes by turning 3or sliding 1

the controller and confirm with 7.

The system calculates the route and subse-

quently starts the route guidance with the

address entered.

If you select No the address can be stored in

the address book.

If you have sent more than one destination

address, each individual destination must be

confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the same

order as the order in which they were sent.

If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with

mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:

If multiple vehicles are registered under the

same e-mail address, the destination will be

sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening

You can use the vehicle remote opening if you

have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a

replacement SmartKey is not available.

The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately opened

remotely within four days of the ignition being

turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking

may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened

remotely.

The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-

ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-

able and a data connection is possible.

XContact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your password.

XReturn to your vehicle at the time agreed upon

with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-

tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:

Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-

tion

Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,

Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-

ber and password.

Vehicle remote closing

The vehicle remote closing feature can be used

when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and

you are no longer nearby.

The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

Features 275

Stowage and features

The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked

within four days of the ignition being turned off.

After this time, remote closing may be delayed

by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle

can no longer be locked remotely.

The vehicle remote closing feature is available if

the relevant mobile phone network is available

and a data connection is possible.

XContact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

or 1-866-990-9007

You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you

switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked

Remotely message appears in the multifunction

display.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:

Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-

tion

Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,

Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-

ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery service

If your vehicle has been stolen:

XNotify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident

report.

XThis number will be forwarded to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

together with your PIN.

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center then tries to locate the system. The

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

contacts you and the local law enforcement

agency if the vehicle is located.

However, only the law enforcement agency is

informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for

longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center is automatically

notified.

Vehicle Health Check

With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer

Assistance Center can provide improved sup-

port for problems with your vehicle. During an

existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the

Customer Assistance Center.

The customer service representative can use

the received data to decide what kind of assis-

tance is required. You are then, for example,

guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service

Center or a recovery vehicle is called.

If vehicle data need to be transferred during an

Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is

initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐

nected message in the display. If the Vehicle

Health Check can be started, the Request for

Vehicle Diagnostics Received Start

vehicle diagnostics? message appears in

the display.

XPress the Yes button to confirm the message.

XIf the Vehicle Diagnostics Please

Start Ignition message appears: turn the

SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock

(Ypage 123).

XIf the Please follow the instructions

received by phone and move your vehi‐

cle to a safe position. message

appears: please follow the instructions

received by phone and move your vehicle to a

safe position.

The message in the display disappears.

The vehicle operating state check begins. You

will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active

message.

If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health

Check is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sending

vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐

nection may be interrupted during

data transfer) message appears. The vehicle

data can now be sent.

XPress the OK button to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the Customer

Assistance Center is terminated.

You will see the Vehicle Diagnostics:

Transferring Data... message.

The vehicle data is sent to the Customer

Assistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-

resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-

tion is re-established after the transfer is com-

plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a

later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or

phone.

276 Features

Stowage and features

Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is

the transfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display

shows a message to this effect together with

information about any special offers at your

workshop.

This information can also be called up under

"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle

(Ypage 32).

Information on Roadside Assistance

(Ypage 29).

Downloading routes

Downloading routes allows you to transfer and

save predefined routes in the navigation sys-

tem.

A route can be prepared and sent by either a

customer service representative or under "Own-

ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Each route can include up to four way points.

Once a route has been received by the naviga-

tion system, you will see the Do you want to

start route guidance? Destination

Received destination has been saved

in "Previous destinations". message on

the multimedia system display.

The route is saved.

XTo start route guidance: select Yes.

An overview of the route is shown in the dis-

play.

If you select No, the saved route can be called

up later in the navigation menu.

XSelect Start.

Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called up

again.

Speed alert

You can define the upper speed limit, which

must not be exceeded by the vehicle.

If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,

a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-

tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center

then forwards this information to you.

You can select the way in which you receive this

information beforehand. Possible options

include text message, e-mail or an automated

call.

The data you receive contains the following

information:

Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-

ded

Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee-

ded

Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencing

Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the

vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be

informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries

of the selected areas. You can select the way in

which you receive this information beforehand.

Possible options include text message, e-mail or

an automated call.

The area can be determined as either a circle or

a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You

can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-

ferent settings are possible for each area.

These settings can be called up under "Owners

Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Alternatively, you can trigger an Info call and

notify the customer service representative that

you wish to activate geo-fencing.

Currently inactive areas can be activated by text

message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm

With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's

panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds

and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on

the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-

onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink®garage door opener integrated

in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up

to three different door and gate systems.

Use the integrated garage door opener only on

garage doors that:

Rhave safety stop and reverse features and

Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards

Once programed, the integrated garage door

opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the

function of the garage door system's remote

Features 277

Stowageand features

control. Please also read the operating instruc-

tions for the garage door system.

When programming a garage door opener, park

the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the

engine while programming.

Certain garage door drives are incompatible

with the integrated garage door opener. If you

have difficulty programing the integrated garage

door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following tele-

phone assistance services:

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

RCanada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100

RHomeLink®hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of

charge)

More information on HomeLink®and/or com-

patible products is also available online at

http://www.homelink.com.

Notes on the declaration of conformity

(Ypage 263).

USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When you operate or program the garage door

with the integrated garage door opener, per-

sons in the range of movement of the garage

door can become trapped or struck by the

garage door. There is a risk of injury.

When using the integrated garage door

opener, always make sure that nobody is

within the range of movement of the garage

door.

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with-

out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttons

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"

(Ypage 278).

Garage door remote control Ais not included

with the integrated garage door opener.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XSelect one of buttons ;to ?to use to con-

trol the garage door drive.

XTo start programming mode: press and

hold one of buttons ;to ?on the integrated

garage door opener.

The garage door opener is in programming

mode. After a short time, indicator lamp :

lights up yellow.

Indicator lamp :lights up yellow as soon as

button ;,=or ?is stored for the first time.

If the selected button has already been pro-

grammed, indicator lamp :will only light up

yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

XRelease button ;,=or ?. Indicator

lamp :flashes yellow.

XTo program the remote control: point

garage door remote control Atowards but-

tons ;to ?on the rear-view mirror at a dis-

tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

XPress and hold button Bon remote control

Auntil indicator lamp :lights up green.

When indicator lamp :lights up green: pro-

gramming is finished.

When indicator lamp :flashes green: pro-

gramming was successful. The rolling code

must be synchronized (Ypage 279).

XRelease button Bon remote control Afor

the garage door drive system.

If indicator lamp :lights up red: repeat the

programing procedure for the corresponding

button on the rear-view mirror. When doing

278 Features

Stowage and features

so, vary the distance between remote control

Aand the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between remote con-

trol Aand the integrated garage door opener

depends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. You

should test every position for at least

25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"

(Ypage 278).

If the garage door system uses a rolling code,

you will also have to synchronize the garage

door system with the integrated garage door

opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will

need to use the programming button on the door

drive control panel. The programming button

may be located in different places depending on

the manufacturer. It is usually located on the

door drive unit on the garage ceiling.

Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive

operating instructions, for example under "Pro-

gramming additional remote controls", before

carrying out the following steps.

Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage

door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-

ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are

present within the sweep of the door or gate.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XGet out of the vehicle.

XPress the programming button on the door

drive unit.

Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate

the next step.

XGet into the vehicle.

XPress previously programmed button ;,=

or ?on the integrated garage door opener

repeatedly and in quick succession until the

door closes.

The rolling code synchronization is then com-

plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-

trol

Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"

(or interruption) of the transmission signals

after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,

these signals may not last long enough for the

integrated garage door opener. The signal is not

recognized during programming. Comparable

with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open-

ers also feature a "break".

Proceed as follows:

Rif you live in Canada.

Rif you have difficulties programming the

garage door opener (regardless of where you

live) when using the programming steps.

XPress and hold one of buttons ;to ?on the

integrated garage door opener.

After a short time, indicator lamp :lights up

yellow.

XRelease the button.

Indicator lamp :flashes yellow.

XPress button Bof garage door remote con-

trol Afor two seconds, then release it for two

seconds.

XPress button Bof the remote control A

again and hold for two seconds.

XRepeat this sequence on button Bof remote

control Auntil indicator lamp :lights up

green.

When indicator lamp :lights up green: pro-

gramming is finished.

When indicator lamp :flashes green: pro-

gramming was successful. The next step is to

synchronize the rolling code.

XRelease button Bof remote control Aof the

garage door drive.

If indicator lamp :lights up red: repeat the

programming process for the corresponding

button on the rear-view mirror. When doing

so, vary the distance between remote control

Aand the rear-view mirror.

The required distance between remote con-

trol Aand the integrated garage door opener

depends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. You

should test every position for at least

25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programming

If you are experiencing problems programing

the integrated garage door opener on the rear-

view mirror, take note of the following instruc-

tions:

RCheck the transmitter frequency used by

garage door drive remote control Aand

whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-

quency can usually be found on the back of

remote control Afor the garage door drive.

Features 279

Stowage and features

The garage door opener is compatible with

devices which operate in the frequency range

of 280 to 433 MHz.

RReplace the batteries in garage door remote

control A. This increases the likelihood that

garage door remote control Awill transmit a

strong and precise signal to the integrated

garage door opener.

RWhen programming, hold remote control A

at varying distances and angles and from but-

tons ;to ?which you are programming. Try

various angles at a distance between 2and

8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but

at varying distances.

RIf another remote control Ais available for

the same garage door drive, repeat the same

programming steps with this remote control

A. Before performing these steps, make sure

that new batteries have been installed in

garage door drive remote control A.

RNote that some remote controls only transmit

for a limited amount of time (the indicator

lamp on the remote control goes out). Press

button Bon remote control Aagain before

transmission ends.

RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signal recep-

tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated

garage door opener performs the function of the

garage door system remote control. Please also

read the operating instructions for the garage

door system.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress button ;,=or ?which you pro-

grammed to operate the garage door.

Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-

cator lamp :lights up green.

Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-

cator lamp :flashes green.

The transmitter will transmit a signal as long

as the button is pressed. The transmission is

halted after a maximum of ten seconds and

indicator lamp :lights up yellow.

XPress button ;,=or ?again if necessary.

Clearing the memory

Make sure that you clear the memory of the

integrated garage door opener before selling the

vehicle.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress and hold buttons ;and ?.

The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow

and then green.

XRelease buttons ;and ?.

The memory of the integrated garage door

opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

GWARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is

jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats and do not place floormats on

top of one another.

XSlide the relevant seat back.

XTo install: place the floormat in the footwell.

XPress studs :onto retainers ;.

XTo remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.

XRemove the floormat.

280 Features

Stowage and features

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when

the vehicle is in motion and block your view.

There is a risk of an accident.

Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before

every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

GWARNING

When opening and closing the hood, it may

suddenly fall into the closed position. There is

a risk of injury to persons within range of

movement of the hood.

Open and close the hood only when no one is

within its range of movement.

GWARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is over-

heated or when there is a fire in the engine

compartment could expose you to hot gases

or other service products. There is a risk of

injury.

Let an overheated engine cool down before

opening the hood. If there is a fire in the

engine compartment, keep the hood closed

and contact the fire department.

GWARNING

The engine compartment contains moving

components. Certain components, such as

the radiator fan, may continue to run or start

again suddenly when the ignition is off. There

is a risk of injury.

If you need to do any work inside the engine

compartment:

Rswitch off the ignition

Rnever reach into the area where there is a

risk of danger from moving components,

such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-

ple, away from moving parts

Opening the hood

GWARNING

Certain components in the engine compart-

ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses a

risk of injury.

Where possible, let the engine cool down and

touch only the components described in the

following.

GWARNING

When the hood is open and the windshield

wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by

the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

the ignition before opening the hood.

!Make sure that the windshield wipers are

not folded away from the windshield. You

could otherwise damage the windshield wip-

ers or the hood.

XMake sure that the windshield wipers are

turned off.

XPull release lever :on the hood.

The hood is released.

Engine compartment 281

Maintenance and care

XReachintothegap, pull hoodcatch handle ;

up and lift thehood.

If you lift thehoodby approximately 15 in

(40 cm), thehoodis opened and held open

automatically by thegas-filled strut.

Closing the hood

XLowerthehoodand let it fall from aheight of

approximately 8in (20 cm).

XCheckthat thehoodhas engagedproperly.

If thehoodcan be raised slightly, it is not

properly engaged. Open it again and close it

with a littlemoreforce.

Radiator

Do notcover up theradiator, suchas with a

thermal mat or insectprotection cover.Other-

wise, thevaluesof theEuropean on-board diag-

nostics may be affected. Some of these read-

ingsare requiredby law and mustbe accurateat

all times.

Engine oil

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Certain componentsin theenginecompart-

ment, suchas theengine, radiatorand parts

of theexhaust system, can become veryhot.

Workingin theenginecompartmentposes a

riskof injury.

Wherepossible, let theenginecool down and

touch only thecomponentsdescribedin the

following.

GWARNING

The enginecompartmentcontainsmoving

components. Certain components, suchas

theradiatorfan,may continueto run or start

again suddenly when theignition is off.There

is ariskof injury.

If you need to do any workinside theengine

compartment:

Rswitch off theignition

Rnever reachintothearea wherethere is a

riskof danger from moving components,

suchas thefan rotation area

Rremove jewelryand watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair,for exam-

ple, away from moving parts

GWARNING

If engineoil comes intocontact withhot com-

ponents in theenginecompartment, it may

ignite. There is ariskof fireand injury.

Makesurethat engineoil is notspilled next to

thefiller neck.Let theenginecool down and

thoroughly clean theengineoil off thecom-

ponents before starting theengine.

GWARNING

Opening thehoodwhen theengineis over-

heated or when there is afirein theengine

compartmentcould exposeyou to hot gases

or other serviceproducts.There is ariskof

injury.

Let an overheatedenginecool down before

opening thehood. If there is afirein the

enginecompartment, keep thehoodclosed

and contact thefiredepartment.

General notes

Dependingon your driving style, thevehicle

consumes up to 0.9US qt (0.8l) of oil per

600miles(1000 km). The oil consumption may

be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if

you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be

in a different location.

282 Engine compartment

Maintenance and care

When checking the oil level:

Rpark the vehicle on a level surface

Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-

imately five minutes if the engine is at normal

operating temperature

Rall vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG C 63

and Mercedes‑AMG C 63 S): if the engine is

not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if

the engine was started only briefly, wait

approximately 30 minutes before carrying out

the measurement

Mercedes‑AMG C 63 and Mercedes‑AMG C

63 S: the oil level must only be checked when

the engine is at normal operating temperature.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-

stick

Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (exam-

ple)

XPull oil dipstick :out of the dipstick guide

tube.

XWipe off oil dipstick :.

XSlowly slide dipstick :into the guide tube to

the stop, and take it out again after approx-

imately three seconds.

If the level is between MIN mark =and MAX

mark ;, the oil level is correct.

XIf the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =or

below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

HEnvironmental note

When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If

oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to

the environment.

!Use only engine oils and oil filters that are

approved for vehicles with a service system. A

list of the engine oils and oil filters that have

been tested and approved in accordance with

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products is available at any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

The following cause engine failure or damage

to the exhaust system:

RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have

not been expressly approved for the service

system

RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after

the replacement interval specified by the

service system has expired

RUse of engine oil additives

!Do not add too much oil. adding too much

engine oil can result in damage to the engine

or to the catalytic converter. Have excess

engine oil siphoned off.

Add engine oil (example)

XTurn cap :counter-clockwise and remove it.

XAdd engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on

the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine

oil.

XReplace cap :on the filler neck and tighten

clockwise.

Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

XCheck the oil level again with the oil dipstick

(Ypage 283).

Further information on engine oil (Ypage 342).

Engine compartment 283

Maintenance and care

Additional service products

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Certain componentsin theenginecompart-

ment, suchas theengine, radiatorand parts

of theexhaust system, can become veryhot.

Working in theenginecompartmentposes a

riskof injury.

Wherepossible, let theenginecool down and

touch only thecomponentsdescribed in the

following.

GWARNING

The enginecompartmentcontainsmoving

components. Certain components, suchas

theradiatorfan,may continueto run or start

again suddenly when theignition is off.There

is ariskof injury.

If you need to do any workinside theengine

compartment:

Rswitch off theignition

Rnever reachintothearea wherethere is a

riskof danger from moving components,

suchas thefan rotation area

Rremove jewelryand watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair,for exam-

ple, away from moving parts

GWARNING

The coolingsystem is pressurized, particularly

when themotor is warm.If you open thecap,

you could be scalded if hot coolantsprays out.

There is ariskof injury.

Let theenginecool down before you open the

cap.Wear gloves and eye protection.Slowly

open thecap to relievepressure.

GWARNING

Opening thehoodwhen theengineis over-

heated or when there is afirein theengine

compartmentcould exposeyou to hot gases

or other serviceproducts.There is ariskof

injury.

Let an overheatedenginecool down before

opening thehood. If there is afirein the

enginecompartment, keep thehoodclosed

and contact thefiredepartment.

Checking coolant level

Checking thecoolantlevel (example)

XPark thevehicleon alevel surface.

Only checkthecoolantlevel when thevehicle

is on alevel surfaceand theenginehas cooled

down.

XTurn theSmartKey to position 2in theigni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress theStart/Stopbuttontwice on vehicles

withKEYLESS-GO or theKEYLESS-GO start

function (Ypage 124).

XCheckthecoolanttemperature display in the

instrumentcluster (Ypage 36).

The coolanttemperature mustbe below

158 ‡ (70 †).

XTurn theSmartKey to position gin theigni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress theStart/Stopbuttononce on vehicles

withKEYLESS-GO or theKEYLESS-GO start

function (Ypage 124).

XSlowly turncap :half aturncounter-clock-

wise and allow excess pressureto escape.

XTurn cap :further counter-clockwise and

remove it.

If thecoolantis at thelevel of markerbar =

in thefiller neck when cold, there is enough

coolantin coolantexpansion tank;.

If thecoolantlevel is approximately 0.6in

(1.5cm) abovemarkerbar =in thefiller neck

when warm,there is enough coolantin expan-

sion tank;.

284 Engine compartment

Maintenance and care

XIf necessary, add coolant that has been tested

and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

XReplace cap :and turn it clockwise as far as

it will go.

For further information on coolant, see

(Ypage 343).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system

GWARNING

Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if

it comes into contact with hot engine compo-

nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of

fire and injury.

Make sure that no windshield washer con-

centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Example: adding liquid to the windshield

washer system

XTo open: pull cap :upwards by the tab and

open.

XAdd the premixed washer fluid.

XTo close: press cap :onto the filler neck

until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-

mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt (1.0 l),

a message appears in the multifunction display

prompting you to add washer fluid (Ypage 239).

Further information on washer fluid

(Ypage 344).

ASSYST PLUS

Service message

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

informs you of the next service due date.

Information on the type of service and service

intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-

let).

Further information can be obtained at a quali-

fied specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center, or at

http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

iThe ASSYST PLUS service interval display

does not show any information on the engine

oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil

level (Ypage 282).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-

sage for several seconds, e.g.:

RService A in XX Days

RService A Due

RService A Overdue by XX Days

Depending on the operating conditions of the

vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the

next service due date is displayed.

The letter Aor B, possibly in connection with a

number or another letter, indicates the type of

service. Astands for a minor service and Bfor a

major service.

You can obtain further information from an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does

not take into account any periods of time during

which the battery is disconnected.

Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-

ule:

XNote down the service due date displayed in

the multifunction display before disconnect-

ing the battery.

XAfter reconnecting the battery, subtract the

battery disconnection periods from the ser-

vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message

XPress the aor %button on the steering

wheel.

Displaying service messages

XSwitch on the ignition.

XUse òon the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

ASSYST PLUS 285

Maintenance and care

XPress 9or :on the steering wheel to

select the Service menu and confirm with

XPress 9or :on the steering wheel to

select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-

firm with a.

The service due date appears in the multi-

function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service

interval display

!If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

has been inadvertently reset, this setting can

be corrected at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Have service work carried out as described in

the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise

lead to increased wear and damage to the

major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the

ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the

service work has been carried out. You can also

obtain further information on maintenance

work, for example.

Special service requirements

The specified maintenance interval takes only

the normal operation of the vehicle into

account. Under arduous operating conditions or

increased load on the vehicle, maintenance

work must be carried out more frequently, for

example:

Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate

stops

Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short

distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road

surfaces

Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods

Under these or similar conditions, have, for

example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter

replaced or changed more frequently. Under

arduous operating conditions, the tires must be

checked more often. Further information can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroad

An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is

also available in other countries. You can obtain

further information from any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

!For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of

the following:

Rdry, rough or hard cloths

Rabrasive cleaning agents

Rsolvents

Rcleaning agents containing solvents

Do not scrub.

Do not touch the surfaces or protective films

with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.

You could otherwise scratch or damage the

surfaces and protective film.

!Do not park your vehicle for a long period of

time directly after cleaning, particularly after

cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.

Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-

rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,

drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By

heating up the brakes, the brake discs and

pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a

long period of time.

HEnvironmental note

Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning

cloths in an environmentally responsible man-

ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for

retaining the quality in the long term.

Use care products and cleaning agents recom-

mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the

paintwork

Automatic car wash

GWARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing

the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

286 Care

Maintenance and care

After the vehicle has been washed, brake

carefully while paying attention to the traffic

conditions until full braking power is restored.

!When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,

the vehicle brakes automatically in certain

situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

these systems in the following or similar sit-

uations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

!Preferably use automatic car washes with

adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. This

corresponds with the specification for the

Cabriolet program. In car washes that use

high water pressures, there is a risk that a

small amount of water may leak into the vehi-

cle.

!Make sure that the vehicle is not subse-

quently treated with hot wax.

!Always remove the SmartKey before wash-

ing the vehicle in a car wash. This ensures that

the wind deflector on the windshield is retrac-

ted. The wind deflector may otherwise be

damaged.

!Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless

Automatic Car Wash as these use special

cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can

damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

!Make sure that:

Rthe side windows and soft top are closed

completely

Rthe blower is switched off

Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0

Rthe 360° camera or the rear view camera is

deactivated

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

!Make sure that the automatic transmission

is in neutral position iwhen washing your

vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle

may otherwise be damaged.

ROperating with the SmartKey:

Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-

tion lock. Do not open the driver's door

when the engine is switched off or at very

low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis-

sion position hor k, the automatic

transmission will automatically switch to

park position jand block the wheels.

ROperating with the Start/Stop button:

Do not open the driver's door when the

engine is switched off or at very low

speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission

position hor k, the automatic transmis-

sion will automatically switch to park posi-

tion jand block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that the

automatic transmission stays in neutral i:

Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop

button:

XMake sure that the ignition is switched on.

XMake sure that the vehicle is stationary.

XDepress and hold the brake pedal.

Operating with the Start/Stop button only:

XEngage park position j.

XRelease the brake pedal.

XRemove Start/Stop button from ignition lock

(Ypage 124).

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

XSwitch on the ignition.

XDepress and hold the brake pedal.

Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop

button:

XEngage neutral i.

XRelease the brake pedal.

XRelease the electric parking brake, if neces-

sary.

XSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey

in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car

wash from the very start.

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before

cleaning it in an automatic car wash.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax

from the windshield and the wiper blades. This

will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises

caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by hand

In some countries, washing by hand is only

allowed at specially equipped washing bays.

Observe the legal requirements in each country.

Care 287

Maintenance and care

XDo not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.

XUse a soft sponge to clean.

XUse a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

XThoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-

tle jet of water.

XDo not point the water jet directly towards the

air inlet.

XUse plenty of water and rinse out the sponge

frequently.

XRinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.

XDo not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-

work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as

soon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

GWARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt

blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

to the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-

edly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet

nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced imme-

diately.

!Always maintain a distance of at least

11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the

power washer nozzle. Information about the

correct distance is available from the equip-

ment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around when

cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:

RTires

RDoor gaps, joints etc.

RSoft top

RWind deflector net

RElectrical components

RBattery

RConnectors

RLamps

RSeals

RTrim elements

RVentilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components can

lead to leaks or failures.

!Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative film.

Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)

between the parts of the vehicle covered with

the film and the nozzle of the high pressure

cleaner.

Information about the correct distance is

available from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around when

cleaning your vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork

!Do not affix:

Rstickers

Rfilms

Rmagnetic plates or similar items

to painted surfaces. You could otherwise

damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by

corrosion and damage caused by inadequate

care cannot always be completely repaired. In

such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

XRemove dirt immediately, where possible,

while avoiding rubbing too hard.

XSoak insect remains with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

XSoak bird droppings with water and rinse off

the treated areas afterwards.

XRemove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,

fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a

cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter

fluid.

XUse tar remover to remove tar stains.

XUse silicone remover to remove wax.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint

surface, use the paint care products recommen-

ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the

case approximately every three to five months,

depending on the climate conditions and the

care product used.

The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has

been recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has

penetrated the paint surface.

288 Care

Maintenance and care

Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has become

dull.

Do not use these care products in the sun or on

the hood while the hood is hot.

XUse a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-

Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-

work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

!Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

!The following may cause the paint to

become shiny and thus reduce the matte

effect:

Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with

unsuitable materials

Rfrequent use of automatic car washes

Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

!Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing

products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the

purpose of paintwork care. These products

are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their

use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to

considerable surface damage or, more spe-

cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.

Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

!Do not use wash programs with a hot wax

treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear

matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage

to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.

These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with

a clear matte finish.

The vehicle should preferably be washed by

hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and

plenty of water.

Use only insect remover and car shampoo from

the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care

products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the soft top

!Never use any of the following to clean the

soft top:

Rgasoline

Rthinner

Rtar or stain remover

Rother organic solvents

!Remove bird droppings immediately as they

are corrosive and, therefore, can make the

soft-top fabric leak. Do not use high-pressure

cleaning equipment to clean the vehicle. Do

not use sharp-edged equipment to remove ice

and snow.

XLight soiling: you can clean the soft top while

it is dry or rinse it with clean water.

XNormal to heavy soiling: clean the soft top

with a brush and clear water. Clean stains and

other dirt with a brush and soft top cleaning

agents that have been recommended and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always brush

from front to back, following the grain of the

fabric.

Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's resist-

ance to dirt.

To restore this resistance to dirt, clean the soft

top using soft top cleaning agents that have

been recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging,

can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Have the

soft-top seams sealed at a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Cover the soft top appropriately if you plan to

leave the vehicle outside for a long period of

time.

Cleaning AIRCAP

Cleaning the wind deflector

!Do not use high-pressure cleaning equip-

ment to clean the net.

Clean the wind deflector on the windshield with

the soft top open.

Care 289

Maintenance and care

XApply the electric parking brake manually.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles

with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start

function (Ypage 124).

XPress AIRCAP button :.

The wind deflector between the windshield

and the soft top is extended.

XClean net ;of the wind deflector with a soft

brush or a moist cloth.

If there is a large amount of dirt on the net:

Rclean with the care products and cleaning

agents recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz

Rrinse with clean water

Cleaning the AIRCAP wind screen

Clean the AIRCAP wind screen with the soft top

open.

XApply the electric parking brake manually.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles

with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start

function (Ypage 124).

XOpen the soft top (Ypage 89).

XPress AIRCAP button :.

The AIRCAP wind screen moves up.

XClean net ;of the AIRCAP wind screen with

a damp cloth. Use only the care products and

cleaning agents recommended and approved

by Mercedes-Benz for this.

Cleaning the folding wind screen

!Do not use high-pressure cleaning equip-

ment to clean the net.

The folding wind screen is stowed in a bag. The

bag is secured with a securing strap to the

through-loading facility behind the rear seat.

Observe the information on the correct installa-

tion of the folding wind screen (Ypage 92).

XClean the net of the folding wind screen with

a damp cloth together with the care products

290 Care

Maintenance and care

and cleaning agents recommended and

approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wheels

GWARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt

blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

to the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-

edly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet

nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced imme-

diately.

!Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products

to remove brake dust. This could damage

wheel bolts and brake components.

!Do not park your vehicle for a long period of

time directly after cleaning, particularly after

cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.

Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-

rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,

drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By

heating up the brakes, the brake discs and

pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a

long period of time.

Cleaning the windows

GWARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield

wipers if they start moving while cleaning the

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

the ignition before cleaning the windshield or

wiper blades.

!Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,

solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-

vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do

not touch the insides of the windows with

hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There

is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

!Clean the water drainage channels of the

windshield and the rear window at regular

intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and

pollen may under certain circumstances pre-

vent water from draining away. This can lead

to corrosion damage and damage to elec-

tronic components.

XClean the inside and outside of the windows

with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that

is recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

GWARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield

wipers if they start moving while cleaning the

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

the ignition before cleaning the windshield or

wiper blades.

!Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the

wiper blade could be damaged.

!Do not clean wiper blades too often and do

not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-

ite coating could be damaged. This could

cause wiper noise.

!Hold the wiper arm securely when folding

back. The windshield could be damaged if the

wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

XFold the windshield wiper arms away from the

windshield (Ypage 112).

XCarefully clean the wiper blades with a damp

cloth.

XFold the windshield wiper arms back again

before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

!Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

which are suitable for plastic light lenses.

Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

could scratch or damage the plastic light len-

ses.

XClean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-

ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning

agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or

cleaning cloths.

Care 291

Maintenance and care

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

!Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable

cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could

scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the

mirror turn signals.

XClean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-

nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet

sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning

cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

!If you clean the sensors with a power

washer, make sure that you keep a distance

of at least 11.8 in (30 cm)betweenthe vehicle

and the power washer nozzle. Information

about the correct distance is available from

the equipment manufacturer.

XClean sensors :of the driving systems with

water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera and 360°

camera

!Do not clean the camera lens and the area

around the rear view camera or 360° camera

with a power washer.

XMake sure that the vehicle is stationary.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XPress the Start/Stop button once or twice on

vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-

GO start function (Ypage 124).

XOpen the camera cover for cleaning via the

multimedia system (see Digital Operator's

Manual).

XTo clean the camera: use clean water and a

soft cloth to clean camera lens :.

When you switch off the ignition, the camera

cover closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

GWARNING

The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can

become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn

yourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around the

exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

these components to cool down before touch-

ing them.

!Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents, such as bathroom

cleaner or wheel cleaner.

!Mercedes‑AMG C 63 and Mercedes‑AMG C

63 S with black exhaust pipes: Black chrome

trims must not be polished with a chrome

polish as this will cause them to lose their

black shine. For optimal care, the faceplates

should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth

after every car wash. Commercially available

engine and care oils are suitable for this.

292 Care

Maintenance and care

For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-

work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove

the excess polish residue after polishing.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit

and corrosive environmental factors may cause

flash rust to form on the surface. You can

restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by

cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and

after washing.

XClean the exhaust pipe with a care product

tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

!For cleaning, do not use any of the following:

Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline

Rabrasive cleaning agents

Rcommercially-available household cleaning

agents

These may damage the display surface. Do

not put pressure on the display surface when

cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-

age to the display.

XBefore cleaning the display, make sure that it

is switched off and has cooled down.

XClean the display surface using a commer-

cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD

display cleaner.

XDry the display surface using a dry microfiber

cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

GWARNING

Care products and cleaning agents containing

solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to

become porous. As a result, plastic parts may

come loose in the event of air bag deploy-

ment. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use any care products and cleaning

agents to clean the cockpit.

!Never attach the following to plastic surfa-

ces:

Rstickers

Rfilms

Rperfume oil container or similar

You could otherwise damage the plastic.

!Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or

sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-

tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of

the surfaces.

XWipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free

cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

XHeavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-

ucts recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

The surface may change color temporarily.

Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-

tor lever

XThoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have been recom-

mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-

ments

!Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes

or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-

ing the surface.

!Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.

The trim pieces have a chrome look but are

mostly made of anodized aluminum and can

lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use

a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning

the trim pieces.

If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very

dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are

unsure as to whether the trim pieces are

chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care 293

Maintenance and care

XWipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a

damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

XTrim elements with piano black finish:

wipe with a soft, damp cotton cloth. Use clean

water.

XHeavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-

ucts recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes

!Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers

made out of real leather, artificial leather or

DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage

the cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure that

the appearance and comfort of the covers is

retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers

!To retain the natural appearance of the

leather, observe the following cleaning

instructions:

RClean genuine leather covers carefully with

a damp cloth and then wipe the covers

down with a dry cloth.

RMake sure that the leather does not

become soaked. It may otherwise become

rough and cracked.

ROnly use leather care agents that have

been tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified

specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.

It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for

example:

Rdifferences in the texture

Rmarks caused by growth and injury

Rslight nuances of color

These are characteristics of leather and not

material defects.

Seat covers of other materials

!Observe the following when cleaning:

Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%

detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%

detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub

carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-

tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave

the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results

depend on the type of dirt and how long it

has been there.

Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.

Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-

tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

GWARNING

Seat belts can become severely weakened if

bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat

belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of

an accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or fatal injury.

Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

!Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by

heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †)

or in direct sunlight.

XUse clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets

XHeadliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or

dry shampoo.

XCarpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning

agents recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

294 Care

Maintenance and care

Where will I find...?

Reflective safety jacket

Removing/replacing the reflective

safety jacket

The reflective safety jackets are located in the

safety jacket compartments in the stowage

compartments.

XTo remove: pull out safety jacket bag :with

the reflective safety jacket by loop ;.

XOpen safety jacket bag :and pull out the

reflective safety jacket.

XTo stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll

it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :.

XSlide safety jacket bag :along the lower

edge of the armrest into the safety jacket

compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that

loop ;hangs out well within reach.

XObserve the legal requirements in each indi-

vidual country for the use of safety jackets.

iRemove a new reflective safety jacket from

its packaging material before sliding it into

the safety jacket compartment. The packag-

ing material may otherwise cause it to slip out

or make removing it difficult.

Information on reflective safety jackets

:Maximum number of washes

;Maximum wash temperature

=Do not bleach

?Do not iron

ADo not use a laundry dryer

BDo not dry-clean

CThis is a class 2 jacket

RThe safety jackets only meet the require-

ments defined by the legal standard:

-if the correct size is used

-if the reflective safety jackets are correctly

fastened

RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety

jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-

erties may otherwise be compromised.

RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored

in their original packaging in a dry place away

from sources of heat and light.

RThe maximum number of washes specified is

not the only factor influencing the life span of

the reflective safety jackets. Their life span

also depends on use, care, storage, etc.

RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-

posed of and replaced with new ones:

-after 15 washes, and/or

-if the reflective strips have become

scratched, and/or

-if the backing material and/or reflective

strips have become soiled and cannot be

cleaned off, and/or

-if the fluorescence has faded, for example

due to the effects of sunlight

RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-

ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,

contact your local waste disposal company.

Where will I find...? 295

Breakdown assistance

Towing eye

The towing eye is located in the stowage well

under the trunk floor.

XTo remove: open the trunk lid.

XLift the trunk floor up (Ypage 267).

XRemove towing eye :.

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Removing the TIREFIT kit

:Tire inflation compressor

;Tire sealant filler bottle

The TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well

under the trunk floor.

XTo remove: open the trunk lid.

XLift the trunk floor up (Ypage 267).

XUse the TIREFIT kit (Ypage 298).

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit

General notes

Apart from certain country-specific variations,

the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change

tool kit.

Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to

the vehicle. For more information on which tire

changing tools are required and approved to

perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult

a qualified specialist workshop.

Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for

example:

RJack

RWheel chock

RLug wrench

RAlignment bolt

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

Your vehicle may be equipped with:

RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-

ties) (Ypage 297)

Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-

cles with MOExtended tires

Ra TIREFIT kit (Ypage 296)

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are

not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It

is therefore recommended that you additionally

equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount

tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from

a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with an mbrace system (USA only) that

are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit: in the event

of a flat tire, contact the Customer Assistance

Center of the mbrace emergency call system

(Ypage 272).

Information on changing and mounting wheels

(Ypage 332).

XStop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground, as far away as possible from

traffic.

XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away

(Ypage 143).

296 Flat tire

Breakdown assistance

XIf possible, bring the front wheels into the

straight-ahead position.

XSwitch off the engine.

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function

or KEYLESS‑GO

XOpen the driver's door.

The vehicle electronics are now in position

u. which is the same as the SmartKey having

been removed.

XRemove the Start/Stop button from the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 124).

XMake sure that the engine cannot be started

via your smartphone (Ypage 126).

XMake sure that the passengers are not endan-

gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is

near the danger area while a wheel is being

changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting

in the wheel change should, for example,

stand behind the barrier.

XGet out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic

conditions when doing so.

XClose the driver's door.

Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires

with run-flat characteristics)

General notes

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-

acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-

cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one

or more tires. The affected tire must not show

any clearly visible damage.

You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the

MOExtended marking which appears on the

sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking

next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-

ing capacity and the speed index (Ypage 326).

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-

tion with an active tire pressure loss warning

system or with an active tire pressure monitor.

If a pressure loss warning message appears

in the multifunction display:

Robserve the instructions in the display mes-

sages (Ypage 234)

Rcheck the tire for damage

Rif driving on, observe the following notes

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is

approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-

cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully

laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-

tance possible depends upon:

Rvehicle speed

Rroad condition

Routside temperature

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode

may be reduced by extreme driving conditions

or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a

moderate style of driving.

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is

counted from the moment the tire pressure loss

warning appears in the multifunction display.

You must not exceed a maximum permissible

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

When replacing one or all tires, please observe

the following specifications for your vehicle's

tires:

Rsize

Rthe type and

Rthe "MOExtended" marking

If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced

with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be

used as a temporary measure. Make sure that

you use the proper size and type (summer or

winter tires).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are

not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It

is therefore recommended that you additionally

equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount

tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from

a qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When driving in emergency mode, the driving

characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-

ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.

There is a risk of an accident.

Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.

Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,

and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,

off-road). This applies in particular to a laden

vehicle.

Flat tire 297

Breakdown assistance

Stop driving in emergency mode if:

Ryou hear banging noises.

Rthe vehicle starts to shake.

Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.

RESP®is intervening constantly.

Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.

After driving in emergency mode, have the

wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist

workshop with regard to their further use. The

defective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes

TIREFIT is a tire sealant.

You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to

0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire

tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-

tures down to Ò4‡(Ò20 †).

GWARNING

In the following situations, the tire sealant is

unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-

tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:

Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger

than those mentioned above.

Rthe wheel rim is damaged.

Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or

on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.

Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified

specialist workshop.

GWARNING

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-

tion. It must not come into contact with your

skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not

inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away

from children. There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the tire sealant,

observe the following:

RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately with water.

RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with

your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-

oughly with clean water.

RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink

plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,

and seek medical attention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with tire sealant.

RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

!Residue from the tire sealant may come out

of the filler hose after use. This could cause

stains.

Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic

bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

HEnvironmental note

Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist

workshop.

!Do not operate the tire inflation compressor

for longer than ten minutes at a time without

a break. It may otherwise overheat.

The tire inflation compressor can be operated

again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-

tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-

pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

XDo not remove any foreign objects which have

penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

XRemove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-

nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation

compressor from the stowage well under-

neath the trunk floor (Ypage 296).

298 Flat tire

Breakdown assistance

XAffix part :of the TIREFIT sticker to the

instrument cluster within the driver's field of

vision.

XAffix part ;of the TIREFIT sticker near the

valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

XRemove filler hose Band connector =from

the bottom section of tire inflation compres-

sor housing ;.

XSlide the yellow filler hose connector into the

mounting on yellow cap Aof tire sealant filler

bottle :until the connector engages.

XWith the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap

Aof tire sealant bottle :into the mounting

of tire inflation compressor ;. The cap must

engage in both hooks.

XRemove the cap from valve Con the faulty

tire.

XScrew filler hose Donto valve C.

XInsert plug =into cigarette lighter socket

(Ypage 270) or into another 12 V socket in

your vehicle (Ypage 270).

XTurn the SmartKey to position 1in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 123).

XPress on and off switch ?on the tire inflation

compressor to ON position.

The tire inflation compressor is switched on.

The tire is inflated.

First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The

pressure may briefly rise to approximately

500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation com-

pressor during this phase.

XLet the tire inflation compressor run for a

maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then

have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa

(2.0 bar/29 psi).

If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has

been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-

sure reached" (Ypage 300).

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has

not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire

pressure not reached" (Ypage 299).

If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected

areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if

possible.

If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have

them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry

cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has

not been attained after ten minutes:

XSwitch off the tire inflation compressor.

XUnscrew the filler hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is

unscrewed.

XVery slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-

imately 30 ft (10 m).

XPump up the tire again.

After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pres-

sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi).

Flat tire 299

Breakdown assistance

GWARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached

after the specified time, the tire is too badly

damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the

tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire

pressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-

acteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified

specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

GWARNING

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant

impairs the driving characteristics and is not

suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of

accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style

accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed

the specified maximum speed with a tire that

has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tire

sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).

The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be

affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's

field of vision.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has

been attained after ten minutes:

XSwitch off the tire inflation compressor.

XUnscrew the filler hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is

unscrewed.

XStow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-

tion compressor.

XPull away immediately.

XStop after driving for approximately ten

minutes and check the tire pressure with the

tire inflation compressor.

The tire pressure must now be at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

GWARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached

after driving for a short period, the tire is too

badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a

tire pressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-

acteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified

specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con-

tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or

call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

XCorrect the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on

the driver's side or the tire pressure table in

the fuel filler flap for values.

XTo increase the tire pressure: switch on the

tire inflation compressor.

XTo reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-

sure release button :next to pressure

gauge ;.

XWhen the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the

filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is

unscrewed.

XScrew the valve cap onto the tire valve of the

sealed tire.

300 Flat tire

Breakdown assistance

XTo remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire

inflation compressor, press together the lock-

ing tabs on the yellow cap.

XPull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-

tion compressor.

The filler hose remains attached to the tire

sealant bottle.

XDrive to the nearest qualified specialist work-

shop and have the tire changed there.

XHave the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose

replaced as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop.

XHave the tire sealant bottle replaced every

four years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery – important safety notes

Special tools and expert knowledge are required

when working on the battery, e.g. removal and

installation. You should therefore have all work

involving the battery carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

GWARNING

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery

can lead, for example, to a short circuit and

thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can

lead to function restrictions applying to

safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-

tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the

ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The oper-

ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.

You could lose control of the vehicle, for

example:

Rwhen braking

Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers

and/or when the vehicle's speed is not

adapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.

In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-

dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop

immediately. Do not drive any further. You

should have all work involving the battery car-

ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,

see (Ypage 64) and (Ypage 67).

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-

ion battery:

GWARNING

Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation

of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-

sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an

explosion.

Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle

body to remove any existing electrostatic

build-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms when

charging the battery as well as when jump-start-

ing.

Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-

tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of

electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-

ple:

Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic

fibers

Rdue to friction between clothing and seats

Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-

pet or other synthetic materials

Rif you rub the battery with a cloth

GWARNING

During the charging process, a battery produ-

ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or

sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can

ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

RMake sure that the positive terminal of a

connected battery does not come into con-

tact with vehicle parts.

RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-

tery.

RIt is important that you observe the descri-

bed order of the battery terminals when

connecting and disconnecting a battery.

RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity are

connected.

Battery (vehicle) 301

Breakdown assistance

RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting and dis-

connecting the jumper cables.

RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

GWARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do

not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over

the battery. Keep children away from batter-

ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with

plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-

tion.

All vehicles:

HEnvironmental note

Batteries contain dangerous

substances. It is against the

law to dispose of them with

the household rubbish. They

must be collected separately

and recycled to protect the

environment.

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally friendly

manner. Take discharged

batteries to a qualified spe-

cialist workshop or a special

collection point for used bat-

teries.

!Have the battery checked regularly at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-

nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist

workshop for more information.

!Always have work on batteries carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be

absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-

volt battery yourself, please observe the fol-

lowing:

RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

away.

RSwitch off the ignition.

RDisconnect the negative terminal first and

then the positive terminal.

The transmission is locked in position j

after disconnecting the battery.

After the work has been done, install the bat-

tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-

minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-

tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are

prohibited when handling the bat-

tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-

sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or

clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing,

especially gloves, apron and face-

guard.

Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid

splashes off with clean water. Con-

tact a physician if necessary.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use batteries which have

been tested and approved for your vehicle by

Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide

increased impact protection to prevent vehicle

occupants from suffering acid burns should the

battery be damaged in the event of an accident.

302 Battery (vehicle)

Breakdown assistance

In order for the battery to achieve the maximum

possible service life, it must always be suffi-

ciently charged.

Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may

discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.

In this case, have the battery disconnected at a

qualified specialist workshop. You can also

charge the battery with a charger recommended

by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-

ist workshop for further information.

Have the battery condition of charge checked

more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for

short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a

lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist

workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle

parked for a long period of time.

Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle

and do not require any electrical consumers.

The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus

conserving battery power.

Charging the 12 V battery

Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:

!Only use battery chargers with a maximum

charging voltage of 14.4 V.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-

ion battery:

!Only use battery chargers with a maximum

charging voltage of 14.8 V.

GWARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive

gases can escape from the battery. There is a

risk of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient

ventilation while charging and jump-starting.

Do not lean over a battery.

GWARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do

not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over

the battery. Keep children away from batter-

ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with

plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-

tion.

GWARNING

A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-

tures below freezing point. When jump-start-

ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases

can escape from the battery. There is a risk of

an explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before

charging it or jump-starting.

All vehicles:

!Only charge the battery using the jump-

starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the

engine compartment (Ypage 304).

XOpen the hood.

XConnect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the same order

as when connecting the donor battery in the

jump-starting procedure (Ypage 304).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not

lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it

is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a

battery charger which has been tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger

unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-

Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the

charging of the battery in its installed position.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

for further information and availability. Read the

battery charger's operating instructions before

charging the battery.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-

ion battery: if the warning and indicator lamps

on the instrument cluster do not light up at low

temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-

charged battery has frozen. In this case you may

neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the

battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery

may be shorter. The starting characteristics can

be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.

Have the thawed-out battery checked at a quali-

fied specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low

temperatures, do not charge a battery which has

been removed using a battery charger. Allow the

battery to warm up gently first, if necessary.

Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and

the starting characteristics impaired, especially

at low temperatures.

Battery (vehicle) 303

Breakdown assistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-

partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:

GWARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the

battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of

clean water and seek medical attention.

GWARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk

of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-

tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

GWARNING

During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks

are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with

vehicle parts.

RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.

RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting

and disconnecting a battery.

RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting

the jumper cables.

RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

GWARNING

A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the

vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures are

low, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge

the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The

starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out

battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles:

!Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be

damaged by the non-combusted fuel.

304 Jump-starting

Breakdown assistance

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the

engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.

Observe the following points:

RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-

start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.

RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

RAll vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: do not start the engine if the battery

is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.

RJump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for

a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.

RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Make sure that:

RThe jumper cables are not damaged.

RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper

cables are connected to the battery.

RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,

such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

XSecure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.

XShift the transmission to position j.

XMake sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be

off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position uin the ignition lock and remove it

(Ypage 123).

XSwitch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.

XOpen the hood.

Position number Cidentifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting

device.

XLift up panel B.

XSlide cover Aof positive terminal :in the direction of the arrow.

Jump-starting 305

Breakdown assistance

XConnect positive terminal :on your vehicle to positive terminal ;of donor battery Cusing the

jumper cable, Always begin with positive terminal :on your own vehicle first.

XStart the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

XConnect negative terminal =of donor battery Cto earth point ?of your vehicle using the

jumper cable. beginning with donor battery Cfirst.

XStart the engine.

XBefore disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

XFirst, remove the jumper cables from ground point?and negative terminal =, then from pos-

itive clamp :and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

XClose cover Aof positive terminal :after removing jumper cables.

XFold panel Bshut.

XHave the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

iJumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified

specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Functions relevant to safety are restricted or

no longer available if:

Rthe engine is not running.

Rthe brake system or the power steering is

malfunctioning.

Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply

or the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much more

force may be necessary to steer or brake.

There is a risk of an accident.

In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,

make sure that the steering moves freely.

GWARNING

You can no longer steer the vehicle if the

steering wheel lock has been engaged. There

is a risk of an accident.

Always switch off the ignition when towing the

vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

GWARNING

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle

and its weight is greater than the permissible

gross weight of your vehicle, the:

Rthe towing eye could detach itself

Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-

over.

There is a risk of an accident.

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,

its weight should not be greater than the per-

missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight

of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-

tification plate (Ypage 339).

!When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,

the vehicle brakes automatically in certain

situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

these systems in the following or similar sit-

uations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

!Make sure that the electric parking brake is

released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,

visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing

eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could

become damaged.

306 Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance

!Do not use the towing eye for recovery. This

could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, have

the vehicle recovered using a crane.

!When towing, pull away slowly and

smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the

vehicles could be damaged.

!Shift the automatic transmission to position

iand do not open the driver's or front pas-

senger's door during towing. The automatic

transmission may otherwise shift to position

j, which could damage the transmission.

!Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This

could damage the vehicle.

!The vehicle can be towed a maximum of

30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph

(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than

30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be

raised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported than

to have it towed away.

If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,

have it transported on a transporter or trailer.

The automatic transmission must be in position

iwhen the vehicle is being towed. If the auto-

matic transmission cannot be shifted to position

i, have the vehicle transported on a trans-

porter or trailer.

The battery must be connected and charged.

Otherwise, you:

Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2in

the ignition lock

Rcannot release the electric parking brake

Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to

position i

Disarm the automatic locking feature before the

vehicle is towed (Ypage 82). You could other-

wise be locked out when pushing or towing the

vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

GWARNING

The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is

a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.

Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular

care when removing the rear cover.

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are

located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and

at the front, under covers :.

XRemove the towing eye from the retainer

(Ypage 296).

XPress the mark on cover :inward and

remove.

XScrew in the towing eye clockwise as far as it

will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eye

XUnscrew and remove the towing eye.

XAttach cover :to the bumper and press until

it engages.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle

raised

Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed

with the rear axle raised.

!Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised, as

doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away

with both axles on the ground or be loaded up

and transported.

!Vehicles with automatic transmission must

not be towed with the rear axle raised. The

Towing and tow-starting 307

Breakdown assistance

vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise

swerve or even roll over.

Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground

The automatic transmission automatically shifts

to position jwhen you open the driver's or

front-passenger door or when you remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock. It is essential to

observe the following steps to ensure that the

automatic transmission remains in position i

during towing.

XMake sure that the vehicle is stationary.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock.

XDepress and hold the brake pedal.

XShift the automatic transmission to position

XLeave the SmartKey in position 2in the igni-

tion lock.

XRelease the brake pedal.

XRelease the electric parking brake.

XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps

(Ypage 109).

In order to signal a change of direction when

towing the vehicle with the hazard warning

lamps switched on, use the combination switch

as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps

for the direction of travel flash. After resetting

the combination switch, the hazard warning

lamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-

matic transmission

!When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the

front and rear axles must be stationary and on

the same transportation vehicle. Positioning

over the connection point of the transport

vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may

otherwise be damaged.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive

Damping System PLUS)

GWARNING

The weaker damping forces of the vehicle to

be transported can cause the vehicle/trailer

combination to swing.

As a result, when transporting vehicles with

Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/

trailer combination may start to skid. Conse-

quently, you could lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

When transporting, make sure that:

Rthe vehicle is has been loaded onto the

transporter correctly

Rthe vehicle is secured at all four wheels with

suitable tensioning straps

Ryou do not exceed the maximum permissi-

ble speed of 35 mph (60 km/h)

!After loading, the vehicle must be secured at

all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could

be damaged.

A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and

4 in (10 cm) down must be maintained to the

transport platform.

XSecure all four wheels after loading the vehi-

cle.

All vehicles

!You may only secure the vehicle by the

wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as

axle or steering components. Otherwise, the

vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle

onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-

poses.

308 Towing and tow-starting

Breakdown assistance

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the igni-

tion lock.

XShift the automatic transmission to position

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:

XPrevent the vehicle from rolling away by

applying the electric parking brake.

XShift the automatic transmission to position

XTurn the SmartKey to position uin the igni-

tion lock and remove it.

XSecure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles

!Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised, as

doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away

with both axles on the ground or be loaded up

and transported.

If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is

damaged, have the vehicle transported on a

truck or trailer.

In the event of damage to the electrical sys-

tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic

transmission will be locked in position P. To shift

the automatic transmission to position N, you

must provide power to the vehicle's electrical

system in the same way as when jump-starting

(Ypage 304).

Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or

trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency engine

starting)

!Vehicles with automatic transmission must

not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-

age the automatic transmission.

iYou can find information on "Jump-starting"

under (Ypage 304).

Fuses

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if

you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-

age, the electric cables could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an

accident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with the specified

new fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the

same rating, which you can recognize by the

color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the

fuse allocation chart.

The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the

trunk (Ypage 311).

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the

cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-

ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

!Only use fuses that have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the

correct fuse rating for the system concerned.

Otherwise, components or systems could be

damaged.

!Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.

!When closing the cover, make sure that it is

lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-

ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-

ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down

faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-

nents on the circuit and their functions stop

operating.

Before changing a fuse

Observe the important safety notes

(Ypage 309)

XSwitch off the engine.

XSwitch off all electrical consumers.

Fuses 309

Breakdown assistance

XMake sure that the ignition is switched off

(Ypage 124).

XWhen using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey

to position uin the ignition lock and remove

it (Ypage 123).

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away

(Ypage 143).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

must be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard

RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell

RFuse box in the engine compartment on the

driver's side

RFuse box under the trunk floor on the right-

hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the

direction of travel

Dashboard fuse box

The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the

dashboard. You can obtain further information

from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well

XOpen the front-passenger door.

XTo open: fold cover :out towards the rear

and remove it.

XTo close: clip in cover :at the rear.

XFold cover :forwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

GWARNING

When the hood is open and the windshield

wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by

the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

the ignition before opening the hood.

XOpen the hood (Ypage 281).

XTo open: turn fastener ;on cover :coun-

ter-clockwise as far as it will go.

XRemove fuse box cover :up.

XUse a dry cloth to remove any moisture from

the fuse box.

XLoosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ?and

remove it.

XTo close: check whether the seal is posi-

tioned correctly in lid ?.

XInsert lid ?into the bracket at the rear of the

fuse box.

XFold down lid ?of the fuse box and tighten

screws =.

XInsert cover :and turn fastener ;clock-

wise as far as it will go.

XClose the hood.

310 Fuses

Breakdown assistance

Fuse box in the trunk

Opening

XOpen thetrunk lid.

XLiftthetrunk floor up (Ypage 267).

XLiftup cover :in thetrunk recess panel in

thedirection of thearrow.

Closing

XFold cover :backin theoppositedirection

to thearrow.

Makesure that cover :is in therecess provi-

ded for it in thepanel trim.

iThe fuseallocation chart is locatedin a

recess at theside of thefusebox.You can find

thecorresponding fuserating and fusetype

on thefuseallocation chart.

Fuses 311

Breakdown assistance

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If wheels and tires of thewrong sizeare used,

thewheelbrakes or suspension components

may be damaged. Thereis ariskof an acci-

dent.

Always replace wheels and tires withthose

that fulfill thespecificationsof theoriginal

part.

When replacing wheels, makesureto use the

correct:

Rdesignation

Rmodel

When replacing tires,makesureto use the

correct:

Rdesignation

Rmanufacturer

Rmodel

GWARNING

Aflat tire severely impairs thedriving,steer-

ing and braking characteristics of thevehicle.

Thereis ariskof accident.

Tires without run-flat characteristics:

Rdo notdrivewith a flat tire.

Rimmediately replace theflat tire withyour

emergencysparewheelor sparewheel, or

consult aqualified specialist workshop.

Tires withrun-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to theinformation and warn-

ing noticeson MOExtended tires (tireswith

run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are notapprovedfor your vehi-

cle by Mercedes-Benzor are notbeingused cor-

rectlycan impair theoperating safety.

Before purchasing and usingnon-approved

accessories, visit aqualified specialist work-

shopand inquire about:

Rsuitability

Rlegal stipulations

Rfactory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be foundunder "Wheel/tire combinations"

(Ypage 336).

You can ask for information regarding permitted

wheel-tire combinationsat an authorized

Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Information on tire pressurecan be found:

Ron theTireand Loading Information placard

on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside

(Ypage 322)

Rin thetire pressuretable in thefuel filler flap

(Ypage 315)

Runder "Tirepressure" (Ypage 315)

Operation

Information on driving

Checkthetire pressurewhen thevehicleis

heavily laden and adjust priorto atrip.

While driving,pay attention to vibrations, noises

and unusual handlingcharacteristics,e.g. pull-

ing to oneside.This may indicatethat the

wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspectthat

atire is defective, reduce your speedimmedi-

ately. Stop thevehicleas soonas possible to

checkthewheels and tires for damage. Hidden

tire damagecould also be causing theunusual

handlingcharacteristics.If you findno signsof

damage, havethetires and wheels checkedat a

qualified specialist workshop.

When parking your vehicle, makesurethat the

tires do notget deformed by thecurbor other

obstacles. If they cannotbe avoided, driveover

obstacles suchas curbs slowly and at an obtuse

angle. Otherwise, you may damagethewheels

or tires.

Notes on high performance tires

GWARNING

Due to thespecial tire tread in combination

withtheoptimized rubber compound,there is

an increased riskof hydroplaning and skid-

dingon damp or wet road surfaces. In addi-

tion,tire traction is significantly reducedat

low outside temperatures and low tire-oper-

ating temperatures.Thereis ariskof an acci-

dent.

312 Operation

Wheels and tires

Activate ESP®and adapt your driving style. At

outside temperatures below 50 ‡(10 †), use

M+S tires.

iDifferent driving styles may lead to high tire

wear and the tires may reach the minimum

tire tread depth after only a short time.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

GWARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-

sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of

your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage

and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Check wheels and tires for damage at least once

a month. Check wheels and tires after driving

off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels

can cause a loss of tire pressure.

Pay particular attention to damage such as:

RCuts in the tires

RPunctures in the tires

RTears in the tires

RBulges on tires

RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels

Regularly check the tire tread depth and the

condition of the tread across the whole width of

the tire (Ypage 313). If necessary, turn the

front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the

inner side of the tire surface.

All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the

valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount

anything onto the valve other than the standard

valve cap or other valve caps approved by

Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any

other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure

monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-

ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-

sure as necessary (Ypage 315).

The service life of tires depends, among other

things, on the following factors:

RDriving style

RTire pressure

RDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

GWARNING

Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.

The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.

This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk

of hydroplaning increases, in particular where

speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-

ditions. There is a risk of accident.

If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires

may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-

ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you

should regularly check the tread depth and

the condition of the tread across the entire

width of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:

RSummer tires: âin (3 mm)

RM+S tires: ãin (4 mm)

For safety reasons, replace the tires before

the legally prescribed limit for the minimum

tire tread depth is reached.

Marking :shows where the bar indicator

(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire

tread.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.

Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.

They are visible once a tread depth of approx-

imately áin (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this

is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be

replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing

tires

ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type

and make.

Operation 313

Wheels and tires

Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-

ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.

Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with

run-flat characteristics" section (Ypage 297).

ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the

wheels.

RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the

first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only

reach their full performance after this dis-

tance.

RDo not drive with tires which have too little

tread depth, as this significantly reduces the

traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).

RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,

regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-

acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-

cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one

or more tires.

MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-

tion with an active tire pressure loss warning

system or with an active tire pressure monitor

and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-

Benz.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a

flat tire (Ypage 297).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are

not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It

is therefore recommended that you additionally

equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount

tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from

a qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notes

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"

section (Ypage 331).

Driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer

tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and

braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle

to M+S tires. Usingsummer tires at very cold

temperatures could cause cracks to form,

thereby damaging the tires permanently.

Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for

this type of damage.

GWARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-

sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of

your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage

and replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

GWARNING

M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than

ãin (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter

and do not provide sufficient traction. There is

a risk of an accident.

M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ãin

(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter

tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are

identified by the M+S marking.

Only winter tires bearing the isnowflake

symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide

the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

Only these tires will allow driving safety systems

such as ABS and ESP®to function optimally in

winter. These tires have been developed specif-

ically for driving in snow.

Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all

wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-

tics.

Always observe the maximum permissible

speed specified for the M+S tires you have

mounted.

When you have mounted the M+S tires:

XCheck the tire pressures (Ypage 318).

XVehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-

sure loss warning system (Ypage 319).

XRestart the tire pressure monitor

(Ypage 321).

314 Winter operation

Wheels and tires

Snow chains

GWARNING

If snow chains are installed to the front

wheels, they may drag against the vehicle

body or chassis components. This could

cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.

There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:

Rnever install snow chains to the front

wheels

Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the

rear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use snow chains that have

been specially approved for your vehicle by

Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding

standard of quality. For more information,

please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear

the following points in mind:

RSnow chains may not be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations. Observe the infor-

mation regarding permitted wheel/tire com-

binations (Ypage 336).

ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads

completely covered by snow. Remove the

snow chains as soon as possible when you

come to a road that is not snow-covered.

RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow

chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if

you wish to mount snow chains.

RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 31 mph (50 km/h).

ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at

raised vehicle level if snow chains have been

installed (Ypage 164).

RYou must never use Parking Pilot (Ypage 166)

when snow chains are installed.

You may wish to deactivate ESP®when pulling

away with snow chains installed:

RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)

(Ypage 68)

RMercedes‑AMG vehicles (Ypage 69)

You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a

controlled manner, achieving an increased driv-

ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the

following risks:

Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load

and vehicle speed increase.

Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair tire

traction.

Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-

ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures

and check the pressure of all the tires includ-

ing the spare wheel:

Rmonthly, at least

Rif the load changes

Rbefore beginning a long journey

Runder different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Information

placard and tire pressure table shown here are

examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-

cle-specific and may deviate from the data

shown here. The tire pressure specifications

that are valid for your vehicle can be found on

the Tire and Loading Information placard and

tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes

The recommended tire pressures for the tires

mounted at the factory can be found on the

labels described here.

Further information on tire pressures can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure 315

Wheels and tires

Tire and Loading Information placard

:Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on

the B-pillar on the driver's side (Ypage 322).

The Tire and Loading Information placard con-

tains the recommended tire pressures for cold

tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid

for the maximum permissible load and up to the

maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel

filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires

permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see

illustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-

ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-

ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-

ditions.

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire

pressure information following is only valid for

that tire size. If a speed range precedes the tire

pressure, the following tire pressure data

applies to only this speed range.

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully

laden" are defined in the table for different num-

bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The

actual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim

diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.

Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be

found on the tire sidewall (Ypage 326).

If the tire pressures have been set to the lower

values for lighter loads and/or lower road

speeds, the pressures should be reset to the

higher values:

Rif you want to drive with an increased load

and/or

Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds

The tire pressures for increased loads and/or

higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure

table, may have a negative effect on driving

comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can

lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-

den loss of pressure.

For more information, contact a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

GWARNING

If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the

wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire

pressure that is too low may result in a tire

blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

RCheck the tire for foreign objects.

RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-

tact a qualified specialist workshop.

316 Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

GWARNING

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire

valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and

malfunction, which can cause tire pressure

loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-

sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This

can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a

risk of an accident.

Only screw the standard valve cap or other

valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for

your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does

not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire

pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-

tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure

can be checked in the on-board computer.

The tire temperature and pressure increase

when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent

on the driving speed and the load.

Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-

sures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:

Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours

and

Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than

1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the

outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the

tire load. If the tire temperature changes by

18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by

approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take

this into account when checking the pressure of

warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. If

you check the tire pressure when the tires are

warm, the resulting value will be higher than if

the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not

reduce the tire pressure to the value specified

for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise

be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires:

Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side

Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap

(Ypage 142)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

GWARNING

Tires with pressure that is too low can over-

heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,

they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-

ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-

ing properties and the driving characteristics.

There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the

tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:

Roverheat, leading to tire defects

Radversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenly

Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

GWARNING

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst

because they are damaged more easily by

road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they

also suffer from irregular wear, which can

severely impair the braking properties and the

driving characteristics. There is a risk of an

accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the

tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:

Rincrease the braking distance

Radversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenly

Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort

Rbe more susceptible to damage

Tire pressure 317

Wheels and tires

Maximum tire pressures

:Example: maximum permissible tire pres-

sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire

inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-

mended tire pressure for your vehicle when

adjusting the tire pressure (Ypage 315).

iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-

cific and may deviate from the values in the

illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes

Observe the notes on tire pressure

(Ypage 315).

Information on air pressure for the tires on your

vehicle can be found:

Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information

placard on the B-pillar

Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

(Ypage 142)

Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually

To determine and set the correct tire pressure,

proceed as follows:

XRemove the valve cap of the tire that is to be

checked.

XPress the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.

XRead the tire pressure and compare it to the

recommended value on the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the tire pressure table

(Ypage 315).

XIf the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire

pressure to the recommended value.

XIf the tire pressure is too high, release air. To

do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,

using the tip of a pen for example. Then check

the tire pressure again using the tire pressure

checker.

XScrew the valve cap onto the valve.

XRepeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notes

While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure

loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-

sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.

This enables the system to detect significant

pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of

a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,

a corresponding warning message will appear in

the multifunction display.

You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning

by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press

'OK' to Restart message which appears in

the Service menu of the multifunction display.

Information on the message display can be

found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss

warning system" section (Ypage 319).

Important safety notes

The tire pressure warning system does not warn

you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe

the notes on the recommended tire pressure

(Ypage 315).

The tire pressure loss warning does not replace

the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An

even loss of pressure on several tires at the

same time cannot be detected by the tire pres-

sure loss warning system.

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you

of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is

penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a

sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a

halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering

movements.

The function of the tire pressure loss warning

system is limited or delayed if:

Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's

tires.

Rroad conditions are wintry.

318 Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

Ryou are drivingon sandor gravel.

Ryou adopt a verysportydrivingstyle (corner-

ingat high speeds or drivingwithhigh rates of

acceleration).

Ryou drive with a heavyload.

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-

ing system

Restart thetire pressureloss warningsystem if

you have:

Rchanged thetire pressure

Rchanged thewheels or tires

Rmountednewwheels or tires

XBeforerestarting,makesurethat thetire

pressures are set properly on all fourtires for

therespective operating conditions.

The recommended tire pressurecan be found

on theTireand LoadingInformation placard

on theB-pillar.Additionally, atire pressure

table is attached to thefuel filler flap.The tire

pressureloss warningsystem can only give

reliable warnings if you haveset thecorrect

tire pressure. If an incorrecttire pressureis

set,these incorrectvalueswill be monitored.

XAlso observethenotesin thesection on tire

pressures (Ypage 315).

XMakesurethat theSmartKey is in position 2

in theignition lock (Ypage 123).

XPress òon thesteeringwheelto callup

themenulist.

XPress 9or :on thesteeringwheelto

select theServicemenu.

XConfirmby pressing aon thesteering

wheel.

XPress 9or :to select TirePres‐

sure.

XPress ato confirm.

The Run FlatIndicator Active Press

'OK'to Restartmessage is shown in the

multifunction display.

If you wish to confirmtherestart:

XPress theabutton.

The TirePressure Now OK? message is

shown on themultifunction display.

XPress 9or :to select Yes.

XPress ato confirm.

The Run FlatIndicator Restarted mes-

sage is shown on themultifunction display.

After a teach-inperiod, thetire pressureloss

warningsystem will monitor theset tire pres-

sures of all fourtires.

If you wish to cancel therestart:

XPress the%button.

XIf theTirePressure Now OK? message

appears,press 9or :to select Can‐

cel.

XPress ato confirm.

The tire pressurevaluesstoredat thelast

restartwill continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes

If atire pressuremonitor is installed,thevehi-

cle's wheels havesensorsthat monitor thetire

pressures in all fourtires.The tire pressuremon-

itor warnsyou if thepressuredrops in oneor

moreof thetires.The tire pressuremonitor only

functionsif thecorrespondingsensorsare

installed in all wheels.

Information on tire pressures is displayed in the

multifunction display. After a few minutesof

driving, thecurrenttire pressureof eachtire is

shown in theServicemenuof themultifunction

display; see illustration (example).

Information on themessage display can be

found in the"Checking thetire pressureelec-

tronically" section (Ypage 321).

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Eachtire, includingthespare(if provided),

should be checkedat leastonce every two

Tire pressure 319

Wheels and tires

weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer

on the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-

sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If

your vehicle has tires of a different size than

the size indicated on the Tire and Loading

Information placard or, if available, the tire

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-

sure telltale when one or more of your tires

are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,

you should stop and check your tires as soon

as possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-

flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's

handling and stopping ability. Please note that

the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if

underinflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-

sure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-

tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp

will flash for approximately a minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-

cle is started as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-

minated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of incom-

patible replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire

pressure to that recommended for cold tires

which is suitable for the operating situation

(Ypage 315). Note that the correct tire pressure

for the current operating situation must first be

taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-

stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning

threshold for the warning message is aligned to

the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire

pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of

the cold tires (Ypage 321). The current pres-

sures are saved as new reference values. As a

result, a warning message will appear if the tire

pressure drops significantly.

The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of

an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the

notes on the recommended tire pressure

(Ypage 315).

The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you

of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is

penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a

sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a

halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering

movements.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning

lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating

pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the

warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates

whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire

pressure monitor is malfunctioning:

Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire

pressure on one or more tires is significantly

too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-

functioning.

Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a

minute and then remains lit constantly, the

tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a message

appears in the multifunction display. Observe

the information on display messages

(Ypage 234).

It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction

of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A

malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-

sure warning lamp flashing for approximately

one minute and then remaining lit. When the

320 Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure

warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of

driving.

The tire pressure values indicated by the on-

board computer may differ from those meas-

ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The

tire pressures shown by the on-board computer

refer to those measured at sea level. At high

altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a

pressure gauge are higher than those shown by

the on-board computer. In this case, do not

reduce the tire pressures.

The operation of the tire pressure monitor can

be affected by interference from radio transmit-

ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way

radios) that may be being operated in or near the

vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-

cally

XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position 2

(Ypage 123) in the ignition lock.

XPress òon the steering wheel to call up

the menu list.

XPress 9or :on the steering wheel to

select the Service menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress 9or :to select Tire Pres‐

sure.

XPress ato confirm.

The multifunction display shows the current

tire pressure of each wheel.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than

20 minutes, the following message appears:

Tire pressure will be displayed after

driving a few minutes.

After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-

itor automatically detects new wheels or new

sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire

pressure value to the individual wheels is not

possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active

message is shown instead of the tire pressure

display. The tire pressures are already being

monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-

sages

If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure

loss in one or more tires, a warning message is

shown in the multifunction display. The yellow

tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.

RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure

message appears in the multifunction display,

the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.

The tire pressure must be corrected when the

opportunity arises.

RIf the Check Tires message appears in the

multifunction display, the tire pressure in one

or more tires has dropped significantly. The

tires must be checked.

RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message

appears in the multifunction display, the tire

pressure in one or more tires has dropped

suddenly. The tires must be checked.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec-

tion (Ypage 234).

If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,

the tire pressures may be displayed for the

wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified

after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-

sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor

When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all

existing warning messages are deleted and the

warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-

rently set tire pressures as the reference values

for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure

monitor will automatically detect the new refer-

ence values after you have changed the tire

pressure. However, you can also set reference

values manually as described here. The tire

pressure monitor then monitors the new tire

pressure values.

XSet the tire pressure to the value recommen-

ded for the corresponding driving situation on

the Tire and Loading Information placard on

the B-pillar on the driver's side.

You can find more tire pressures for various

operating conditions in the tire pressure table

inside the filler flap.

Observe the information on tire pressure

when doing so (Ypage 315).

XMake sure that the tire pressure is correct on

all four wheels.

Tire pressure 321

Wheels and tires

XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position 2

in the ignition lock (Ypage 123).

XPress òon the steering wheel to call up

the menu list.

XPress 9or :on the steering wheel to

select the Service menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress 9or :to select Tire Pres‐

sure.

XPress ato confirm.

The multifunction display shows the current

tire pressure of each wheel or the Tire

pressure will be displayed after

driving a few minutes message.

XPress the :button.

The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐

erence Values message is shown on the

multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:

XPress the abutton.

The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes-

sage is shown on the multifunction display.

After driving for a few minutes, the system

checks whether the current tire pressures are

within the specified range. The new tire pres-

sures are then accepted as reference values

and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:

XPress the %button.

The tire pressure values stored at the last

restart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-

sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXGG4

FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-GG4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

GWARNING

Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a

blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the

steering and driving characteristics and lead

to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.

Observe the load rating of the tires. The load

rating must be at least half of the GAWR of

your vehicle. Never overload the tires by

exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the

maximum possible load.

(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire

and Loading Information placard shows the

maximum permissible number of occu-

pants and the maximum permissible vehicle

load. It also contains details of the tire sizes

and corresponding pressures for tires

mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-

pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-

tification plate informs you of the gross

vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the

vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the

fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-

mation about the maximum gross axle

weight rating on the front and rear axle.

The maximum gross axle weight rating is

the maximum weight that can be carried by

one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed

the maximum load or the maximum gross

axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

:B-pillar, driver's side

322 Loading the vehicle

Wheels and tires

Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight rating

XSpecification for maximum gross vehicle

weight :is listed in the Tire and Loading

Information placard: "The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load

and luggage must not exceed the specified

value.

iThe specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration

are examples. The maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific

and may differ from that in the illustration.

You can find the valid maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on

the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats :indicates the

maximum number of occupants allowed to

travel in the vehicle. This information can be

found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-

ard.

iThe specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in the illustration

are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-

specific and can differ from the details shown.

The number of seats in your vehicle can be

found on the Tire and Loading Information

placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions

The following steps have been developed as

required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-

suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle

Safety Act of 1966".

XStep 1: Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's

Tire and Loading Information placard.

XStep 2: Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

XStep 3: Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or

XXX lbs.

XStep 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-

city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals

1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-

sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

XStep 5: Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-

culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying

seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of

Loading the vehicle 323

Wheels and tires

1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load

limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Ypage 322).

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum

weight of occupants

and load (data from the

Tire and Loading Infor-

mation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people in

the vehicle (driver and

occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the

occupants

Front: 2

Rear: 3

Front: 1

Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-

pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Occupant 2: 180 lbs

(82 kg)

Occupant 3: 160 lbs

(73 kg)

Occupant 4: 140 lbs

(63 kg)

Occupant 5: 120 lbs

(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs

(91 kg)

Occupant 2: 190 lbs

(86 kg)

Occupant 3: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

(68 kg)

Gross weight of all

occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load (maxi-

mum gross vehicle

weight rating from the

Tire and Loading Infor-

mation placard minus

the gross weight of all

occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

750 lbs (340 kg) =

750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

540 lbs (245 kg)

=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò

150 lbs (68 kg) =

1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate

Even if you have calculated the total cargo care-

fully, you should still make sure that the gross

vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight

rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on

the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on

the driver's side of the vehicle (Ypage 322).

324 Loading the vehicle

Wheels and tires

Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-

sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if

applicable) must not exceed the permissible

gross vehicle weight.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-

mum permissible load that can be carried by one

axle (front or rear axle).

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the

maximum permissible values (gross vehicle

weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),

have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-

pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)

weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-

ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-

ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.

government specifications. Their purpose is to

provide drivers with uniform reliable information

on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers

have to grade tires using three performance fac-

tors: :tread wear grade, ;traction grade and

=temperature grade. These regulations do not

apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in

North America are provided with the corre-

sponding quality grading markings on the side-

wall of the tire.

Quality grades can be found, where applicable,

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width.

Example:

RTreadwear grade: 200

RTraction grade: AA

RTemperature grade: A

All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-

utory safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-

cific and may deviate from the values in the

illustration.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.

government course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half times as well

on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon

the actual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices

and differences in road characteristics and cli-

mate.

Traction

GWARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-

nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-

acteristics.

!Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to

the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the

tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-

ured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

You should pay special attention to road condi-

tions when temperatures are around freezing

point.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread

depth of ãin (4 mm) on all four winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 325

Wheels and tires

Observe the legally required minimum tire tread

depth (Ypage 313). Winter tires can reduce the

braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in

comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-

tance is still much further than on surfaces that

are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-

priate care when driving.

Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)

(Ypage 314).

Temperature

GWARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause excessive heat

build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

:Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard

(Ypage 330)

;DOT, Tire Identification Number

(Ypage 329)

=Maximum tire load (Ypage 328)

?Maximum tire pressure (Ypage 318)

AManufacturer

BTire material (Ypage 329)

CTire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Ypage 326)

DLoad index (Ypage 328)

ETire name

The markings described above are on the tire in

addition to the tire name (sales designation) and

the manufacturer's name.

iTire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating

GWARNING

Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-

city and the approved maximum speed could

lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There

is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

326 All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

tire load rating and speed rating required for

your vehicle.

:Tire width

;Nominal aspect ratio in %

=Tire code

?Rim diameter

ALoad bearing index

BSpeed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer's

standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may

not contain any letters or may contain one letter

that precedes the size description.

If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-

tion (as shown above): these are passenger

vehicle tires according to European manufac-

turing standards.

If "P" precedes the size description: these are

passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-

ufacturing standards.

If "LT" precedes the size description: these are

light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing

standards.

If "T" precedes the size description: compact

emergency wheels with high tire pressure that

are only designed for temporary use in an emer-

gency.

Tire width: tire width :shows the nominal tire

width in millimeters.

Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ;is the size

ratio between the tire height and tire width and

is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-

ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.

Tire code: tire code =specifies the tire type.

"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-

onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over

149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size

description, depending on the manufacturer

(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).

Rim diameter: rim diameter ?is the diameter

of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim

flange. The rim diameter is specified in

inches (in).

Load-bearing index: load-bearing index Ais a

numerical code that specifies the maximum

load-bearing capacity of a tire.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

specified load limit. The maximum permissible

load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on

the driver's side (Ypage 322).

Example:

Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum

load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.

For further information on the maximum tire

load in kilograms and lbs, see (Ypage 328).

For further information on the load bearing

index, see "Load index" (Ypage 328).

Speed rating: speed rating Bspecifies the

approved maximum speed of the tire.

iTire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observe

the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your

driving style to the traffic conditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of

over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in

All about wheels and tires 327

Wheels and tires

the size description, depending on the man-

ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

The service specification is made up of load-

bearing index Aand speed rating B.

RIf the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no service specifications,

ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out

the maximum speed.

If a service specification is available, the max-

imum speed is limited according to the speed

rating in the service specification. Example:

245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is

the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-

resents the speed rating. The maximum

speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph

(300 km/h).

RThe size description for all tires with maxi-

mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)

must include "ZR", and the service specifica-

tion must be given in parentheses. Example:

275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-

cates that the maximum speed of the tire is

over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-

ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

iNot all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires. In

addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also

have the isnowflake symbol on the tire

wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-

ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-

tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of

Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on

snow. They have been especially developed

for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-

cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph

(210 km/h).

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory

may be higher than the maximum speed that the

electronic speed limiter permits.

Make sure that your tires have the required

speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. You

can find information on this under "Tires"

(Ypage 336).

Further information about reading tire data can

be obtained from any qualified specialist work-

shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load

index :may also be imprinted on the sidewall

of the tire. You will find this after the letter that

identifies the speed rating (Ypage 326).

RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standard load

(SL) tire

RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire

RLight Load: represents a light load tire

RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends

on the maximum load that the tire can carry at

a certain pressure

iTire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

1Or M+S ifor winter tires.

328 All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Maximum tire load :is the maximum permis-

sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

specified load limit. The maximum permissible

load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on

the driver's side (Ypage 322).

iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-

cific and may deviate from the values in the

illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-

ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on

the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders

to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-

relevant matters. It makes it possible for the

purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.

The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-

tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ?and

manufacturing date A.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tire

symbol :marks that the tire complies with the

requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-

portation.

Manufacturer identification code: manufac-

turer identification code ;provides details on

the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code

with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code

with four symbols.

For further information about retreaded tires,

see (Ypage 336).

Tire size: identifier =describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code ?can be used by

the manufacturer as a code to describe specific

characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A

provides information about the age of a tire. The

first and second positions represent the week of

manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-

endar week. Positions three and four represent

the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that

is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32

in 2014.

iTire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord

and the number of layers in sidewall :and

under tire tread ;.

iTire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate

from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used

Describes the number of plies or the number of

layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread

and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,

polyester and other materials.

Bar

Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds

per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)

are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the

U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the vehicle

is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

All about wheels and tires 329

Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires

with regards to tread quality, tire traction and

temperature characteristics. The quality grad-

ing assessment is made by the manufacturer

following specifications from the U.S. govern-

ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of

the tire.

Recommended tire pressures

The recommended tire pressure applies to the

tires mounted at the factory.

The Tire and Loading Information placard con-

tains the recommended tire pressures for cold

tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-

mum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-

ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-

ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-

ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional

equipment

The combined weight of all standard and

optional equipment available for the vehicle,

regardless of whether it is actually installed on

the vehicle or not.

Rim

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is

mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight

rating. The actual load on an axle must never

exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross

axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle

identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's

side.

Speed rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification.

It specifies the speed range for which the tire is

approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of

the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,

accessories installed, occupants, luggage and

the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross

vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-

cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-

cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the

driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross

weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the

vehicle including all accessories, occupants,

fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if

applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is

specified on the vehicle identification plate on

the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The maximum weight is the sum of:

Rthe curb weight of the vehicle

Rthe weight of the accessories

Rthe load limit

Rthe weight of the factory installed optional

equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)

Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-

sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is

bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of

1 bar.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load

index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of

the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity

more precisely.

Curb weight

The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment

including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-

tem and optional equipment if these are instal-

led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-

gers or luggage.

Maximum load rating

The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-

sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is

approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure

Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire

Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by

dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by

two.

330 All about wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

PSI (pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio

Relationship between tire height and tire width

in percent.

Tire pressure

This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-

ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-

face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per

square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.

The tire pressure should only be corrected when

the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure

The tires are cold:

Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours

and

Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than

1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread

The part of the tire that comes into contact with

the road.

Bead

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely

on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the

bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from

the wheel rim.

Sidewall

The part of the tire between the tread and the

bead.

Weight of optional extras

The combined weight of those optional extras

that weigh more than the replaced standard

parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These

optional extras, such as high-performance

brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-

formance battery, are not included in the curb

weight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

This is a unique identifier which can be used by

a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example

for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-

chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-

er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and

the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index

The load bearing index (also load index) is a code

that contains the maximum load bearing capa-

city of a tire.

Traction

Traction is the result of friction between the tires

and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-

uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level

with the bars, the wear limit of áin (1.6 mm)

has been reached.

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their

designated seating positions.

Total load limit

Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg

(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in

the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tire

The "Breakdown assistance" section

(Ypage 296) contains information and notes on

how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-

ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat

tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires

with run-flat characteristics" (Ypage 297).

Rotating the wheels

GWARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheels may

severely impair the driving characteristics if

the wheels or tires have different dimensions.

The wheel brakes or suspension components

may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-

dent.

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels

and tires are of the same dimensions.

!On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure

monitor, electronic components are located

in the wheel.

Changing a wheel 331

Wheels and tires

Tire-mounting tools should not be used near

the valve. This could damage the electronic

components.

Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safety

notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section

(Ypage 332).

The wear patterns on the front and rear tires

differ, depending on the operating conditions.

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern

has formed on the tires. Front tires typically

wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in

the center.

On vehicles that have the same size front and

rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-

ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's

warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no

warranty book is available, the tires should be

rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to

10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may

be required earlier. Do not change the direction

of wheel rotation.

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the

brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-

ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,

restart the tire pressure loss warning system

(Ypage 319) or the tire pressure monitor

(Ypage 321).

Direction of rotation

Tires with a specified direction of rotation have

additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-

planing. These advantages can only be gained if

the tires are installed corresponding to the

direction of rotation.

An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its

correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels

Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires

from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

XStop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground.

XApply the electric parking brake manually.

XBring the front wheels into the straight-ahead

position.

XShift the transmission to position j.

XMake sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor-

mal" on vehicles with AIRMATIC (Ypage 164).

XSwitch off the engine.

XVehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function

or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.

The vehicle electronics are now in key posi-

tion u. This is the same as the key having

been removed.

XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function

or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-

ton from the ignition lock (Ypage 124).

XMake sure that the engine cannot be started

via your smartphone (Ypage 126).

XIf included in the vehicle equipment, remove

the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

XSafeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it

can be found in the tire-change tool kit

(Ypage 296).

The folding wheel chock is an additional safety

measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling

away, for example when changing a wheel.

332 Changing a wheel

Wheels and tires

XFold both plates upwards :.

XFold out lower plate ;.

XGuide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the

openings in base plate =.

XPlace chocks or other suitable items under

the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-

nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

GWARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly at the

appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the

jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

There is a risk of injury.

Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-

ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

must be positioned vertically, directly under

the jacking point of the vehicle.

!Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you

could damage the vehicle.

Observe the following when raising the vehi-

cle:

RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-

cific jack that has been tested and approved

by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the

jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the

vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being

changed. It must not be used for performing

maintenance work under the vehicle.

RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-

hill slopes.

RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-

ing away by applying the parking brake and

inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the

parking brake while the vehicle is raised.

RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,

flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a

slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be

used, e.g. rubber mats.

RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects

as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not

be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity

due to the restricted height.

RMake sure that the distance between the

underside of the tires and the ground does not

exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).

RDo not place your hands or feet under the

raised vehicle.

RDo not lie under the vehicle.

RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.

RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid

when the vehicle is raised.

RMake sure that no persons are present in the

vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the

wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you

can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove

the hub cap. Two different variants can be instal-

led.

Vehicles with plastic hub cap:

XTo remove: turn the center cover of hub

cap :counter-clockwise and remove.

XTo install: before installing, ensure that hub

cap :is in the open position. To do this, turn

the center cover counter-clockwise.

XPosition hub cap :and turn the center cover

clockwise until hub cap :engages physically

and audibly.

XMake sure that hub cap :is installed

securely.

Changing a wheel 333

Wheels and tires

Vehicles with aluminum hub cap:

XTo remove: take socket ;and wheel wrench

=from the vehicle tool kit (Ypage 296).

XPosition socket ;on hub cap :.

XPosition lug wrench =on socket ;.

XUsing lug wrench =, turn hub cap :coun-

ter-clockwise and remove it.

XTo install: before installing, check hub cap :

and the wheel area for soiling and clean if

necessary.

XPut hub cap :in position and turn until it is in

the right position.

XPosition socket ;on hub cap :.

XAttach lug wrench =to socket ;and

tighten hub cap :.

The tightening torque must be

18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

iNote that the hub cap should be tightened

to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist

workshop.

XUsing lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the

wheel you wish to change by about one full

turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking points are located just behind the

front wheel housings and just in front of the rear

wheel housings (arrows).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with

AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,

the vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-

ing points on the outer sills.

XPosition jack Bat jacking point A.

XMake sure the foot of the jack is directly

beneath the jacking point.

XTurn crank Cclockwise until jack Bsits

completely on jacking point A. The base of

the jack must lie evenly on the ground.

XTurn crank Cuntil the tire is raised a maxi-

mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

334 Changing a wheel

Wheels and tires

Removing a wheel

!Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-

brake disc: during removal and repositioning

of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the

ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,

you should proceed carefully and get a sec-

ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you

can use a second alignment bolt.

!Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty

surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could

otherwise be damaged when you screw them

in.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for as

long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying

any external force on the brake disks. This could

impair the level of comfort when braking.

XUnscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.

XScrew alignment bolt :into the thread

instead of the wheel bolt.

XUnscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

XRemove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

GWARNING

Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged

wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel

bolts to come loose. As a result, you could

lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of

accident.

Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of

damage to the threads, contact a qualified

specialist workshop immediately. Have the

damaged wheel bolts or hub threads

replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

GWARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip

over. There is a risk of injury.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section

(Ypage 331).

Only use wheel bolts that have been designed

for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-

sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

only use wheel bolts which have been approved

for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective

wheel.

!Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-

brake disc: during removal and repositioning

of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the

ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,

you should proceed carefully and get a sec-

ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you

can use a second alignment bolt.

!To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold

the wheel securely against the wheel hub

while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

XClean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-

faces.

XSlide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-

ment bolt and push it on.

XTighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-

tight.

XUnscrew the alignment bolt.

XTighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight.

Changing a wheel 335

Wheels and tires

Lowering the vehicle

GWARNING

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts

and bolts are not tightened to the specified

tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.

Have the tightening torque immediately

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

after a wheel is changed.

XTurn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise

until the vehicle is once again standing firmly

on the ground.

XPlace the jack to one side.

XTighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise

pattern in the sequence indicated (:to A).

The tightening torque must be 111 lb-ft

(150 Nm).

XTurn the jack back to its initial position.

XStow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools

in the trunk again.

XMercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles

with AMG equipment: insert the cover into

the outer sill.

XCheck the tire pressure of the newly mounted

wheel and adjust it if necessary.

Observe the recommended tire pressure

(Ypage 315).

When you are driving with the collapsible spare

wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning

system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-

tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss

warning system or tire pressure monitor when

the defective wheel has been replaced with a

new wheel.

Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-

tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with

functioning sensors.

Wheel/tire combination

You can ask for information regarding permitted

wheel/tire combinations at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

!For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use tires and wheels

which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz

specifically for your vehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted for

use with the control systems, such as ABS or

ESP®, and are marked as follows:

RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original

RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)

RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-

tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may

only be used on wheels that have been spe-

cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested

and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain

characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise

emissions or fuel consumption, may other-

wise be adversely affected. In addition, when

driving with a load, tire dimension variations

could cause the tires to come into contact

with the bodywork and axle components. This

could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-

cle.

Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-

age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or

accessories other than those tested and

approved.

Information on tires, wheels and approved

combinations can be obtained from any quali-

fied specialist workshop.

!Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-

ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-

ous damage cannot always be detected on

retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz

cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded

tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if

you have no information about their previous

usage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-

ating conditions can be found:

Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side

Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

336 Wheel/tire combination

Wheels and tires

Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-

sures under various operating conditions

(Ypage 315).

Check tire pressures regularly, and only when

the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance

recommendations of the tire manufacturer in

the vehicle document wallet.

Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip

the vehicle:

Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left

and right)

Rwith the same type of tires at a given time

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended

tires)

Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-

ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.

Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with

run-flat characteristics" section (Ypage 297).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are

not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It

is therefore recommended that you additionally

equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount

tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from

a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel/tire combination 337

Wheels and tires

Information regarding technical data

iThe datastatedherespecifically refers to a

vehiclewithstandard equipment. Consult an

authorizedMercedes-BenzCenterfor the

datafor all vehiclevariants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobile

phones

GWARNING

The electromagneticradiation from two-way

radios can interfere withthevehicleelectron-

ics if two-way radios are manipulated or ret-

rofittedincorrectly. This could jeopardizethe

operating safetyof thevehicle. Thereis arisk

of an accident.

You should haveall workon electrical and

electronic componentscarried out at aquali-

fiedspecialist workshop.

GWARNING

If you incorrectlyoperate two-way radios in

thevehicle, theelectromagneticradiation

may interfere withthevehicleelectronics,for

exampleif:

Rthetwo-way radiois notconnectedto an

exteriorantenna

Rtheexteriorantenna is notcorrectlymoun-

tedor is notlow-reflection

This could jeopardizetheoperating safetyof

thevehicle. Thereis ariskof an accident.

Havethelow-reflection exteriorantenna

installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

Always connecttwo-way radios to thelow-

reflection exteriorantenna when operating in

thevehicle.

!The operating permit may be invalidated if

theinstructionsfor installation and use of

two-way radios are notobserved.

In particular, thefollowingconditionsmust be

complied with:

Ronly approvedwavebands may be used.

Robservethemaximum permissible output

in these wavebands.

Ronly approvedantenna positionsmay be

used.

Excessivelevels of electromagneticradiation

may causedamageto your healthand thehealth

of others. Using an exteriorantenna takes into

accountcurrentscientific discussionsrelating

to thepossible healthhazards that may result

from electromagneticfields.

Approved antenna positions

:Rear fender

On therear fenders, it is recommended to posi-

tion theantenna on theside of thevehicleclos-

est to thecenter of theroad.

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609

(Road Vehicles –"EMCguidelines for installa-

tion of aftermarket radiofrequency transmitting

equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios.

Observethelegal requirements for accessory

parts.

If your vehiclehas installationsfor two-way radio

equipment, use thepower supplyor antenna

connectionsintended for use withthebasic wir-

ing.Be sureto observethemanufacturer'sSup-

plementwhen installing.

Deviationswithrespectto frequency bands,

maximum transmission outputsor antenna

positionsmust be approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

338 Vehicle electronics

Technical data

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the

base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-

lowing values:

Frequency band Maximum

transmission

output

Short wave

3 - 54 MHz

30 W

4 m waveband

74 - 88 MHz

15 W

2 m waveband

144 - 174 MHz

25 W

Trunked radio system/

Tetra

380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband

400 - 460 MHz

15 W

Mobile communications

(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:

RTwo-way radios with a maximum transmission

output of up to 100 mW

RTwo-way radios with transmitter frequencies

in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-

mum transmission output of up to 2 W

(trunked radio/Tetra)

RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There is no restriction for antenna positions on

the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-

quency bands:

RTrunked radio system/Tetra

R70 cm waveband

R2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-

cle identification number (VIN)

XOpen the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA

only)

:VIN

;Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Can-

ada only)

:VIN

;Paint code

Identification plates 339

Technical data

iThe data shown on the vehicle identification

plate is used only as an example. This data is

different for every vehicle and can deviate

from the data shown here. You can find the

data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle

identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

XSlide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost

position.

XFold floor covering ;upwards.

The VIN is visible :.

The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-

tification plate (Ypage 339).

The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of

the windshield (Ypage 340).

Engine number

:Engine number (stamped into the crank-

case)

;VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

=Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali-

fornian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci-

ties

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Service products may be poisonous and haz-

ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.

Comply with instructions on the use, storage

and disposal of service products on the labels

of the respective original containers. Always

store service products sealed in their original

containers. Always keep service products out

of the reach of children.

HEnvironmental note

Dispose of service products in an environ-

mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:

RFuels

RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

RCoolant

RBrake fluid

RWindshield washer fluid

RClimate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must match.

Only use products recommended by Mercedes-

Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of

products which have not been recommended is

not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or

goodwill gestures. Products approved by

Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's

Manual in the appropriate section.

Information on tested and approved products

can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service

Center or on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

You can recognize service products approved by

Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on

the containers:

RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendations indi-

cate a level of quality or a specification in

accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB

229.5). They have not necessarily been

approved by Mercedes-Benz.

340 Service products and filling capacities

Technical data

Other identifications, for example:

R0 W-30

R5 W-30

R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel

incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-

sion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before

refueling.

GWARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.

There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:

RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-

out delay.

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-

ing.

RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 17.4 US gal

(66.0 l)

Model Of which

reserve

Mercedes-AMG C 63

Mercedes-AMG C 63 S

Approx.

2.6 US gal

(10.0 l)

Allother models Approx.

1.8 US gal (7.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade

!Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition

if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.

Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could

result in damage to the fuel system and the

engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop

and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained

completely.

!Only refuel using unleaded premium grade

gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

iE10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.

Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can

refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

!Only use the fuel recommended. Operating

the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-

age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust

system.

!Do not use the following:

RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol

RE100 (100% ethanol)

RGasoline with methanol

RM100 (100% methanol)

RGasoline with metalliferous additives

RDiesel

Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-

mended for your vehicle.

!To ensure the longevity and full perform-

ance of the engine, only premium-grade

unleaded gasoline must be used.

If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable

and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline

of a lower grade, observe the following pre-

cautions:

ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular

unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-

Service products and filling capacities 341

Technical data

mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as

possible.

RDo not drive at the maximum speed.

RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine

speeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuel

grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the

label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff.

iFor further information, consult a qualified

specialist workshop or visit

http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommended

fuel is not available, you may also use regular

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-

formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid

driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.

Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.

Information on refueling (Ypage 142).

Additives

!Operating the engine with fuel additives

added later can lead to engine failure. Do not

mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not

include additives for the removal and preven-

tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be

mixed with additives recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions

for use on the product label. More information

about recommended additives can be

obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-

ded fuels that have additives.

The fuel quality available in some countries may

not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the

fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,

and in consultation with an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed

with the cleaning additive recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes

and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

!Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with

specifications deviating from those expressly

required for the prescribed service intervals.

Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in

order to set replacement intervals longer than

those prescribed. This could otherwise cause

damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-

treatment.

Follow the instructions on the service interval

display for changing the engine oil. This could

otherwise cause damage to the engine or

exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the important

safety notes on service products (Ypage 340).

The engine oils are matched to the performance

of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.

You should therefore only use engine oils and oil

filters that are approved for vehicles with main-

tenance systems.

For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,

consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Or visit the website

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

The table shows which engine oils have been

approved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe or

MB-Approval

All models 229.5, 229.6

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils

for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

iMB approval is indicated on the oil contain-

ers.

342 Service products and filling capacities

Technical data

Filling capacities

The followingvaluesrefer to an oil change

includingtheoil filter.

Model Capacity

C300 7.4US qt (7.0 l)

C 300 4MATIC

Mercedes-AMG

C 43 4MATIC

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

Mercedes-AMG

C 63

Mercedes-AMG

C 63 S

9.5 US qt (9.0 l)

Additives

!Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

GWARNING

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture

from the air. This lowers the boiling point of

the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake

fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the

brake system when the brakes are applied

hard. This would impair braking efficiency.

There is a risk of an accident.

You should have the brake fluid renewed at

the specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-

tant safety notes on service products

(Ypage 340).

The brake fluid change intervals can be found in

the Maintenance Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-

Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval 331.0.

Information about approved brake fluid can be

obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or

on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

iHave the brake fluid regularly replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop in accordance

with the replacement intervals and the

replacement confirmed in the Maintenance

Booklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-

ponents in the engine compartment, it may

ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Let the engine cool down before you add anti-

freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled

next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the

antifreeze from components before starting

the engine.

!Only add coolant that has been premixed

with the desired antifreeze protection. You

could otherwise damage the engine.

Further information on coolants can be found

in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-

vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the

Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

!Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even

in countries where high temperatures prevail.

Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not

sufficiently protected from corrosion and

overheating.

iHave the coolant regularly replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop and the replace-

ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-

vice products when handling coolant

(Ypage 340).

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-

freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-

lowing tasks:

RAnti-corrosion protection

RAntifreeze protection

RRaising the boiling point

If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to

-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant

during operation is approximately 266 ‡

(130 †).

Service products and filling capacities 343

Technical data

The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor

concentration in the engine cooling system

should:

Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down to

approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).

Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down

to -49 ‡[-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be

dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/

corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance

with MB Specifications for Service Products

310.1.

iWhen the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled

with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate

antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

iThe coolant is checked with every mainte-

nance interval at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

Mercedes-AMG

C 43 4MATIC

11.5 US qt (10.9 l)

Mercedes-AMG

C 63

Mercedes-AMG

C 63 S

12.6 US qt (11.9 l)

Allother models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if

it comes into contact with hot engine compo-

nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of

fire and injury.

Make sure that no windshield washer con-

centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

!Only use washer fluid that is suitable for

plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB

WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-

age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

!Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit

washer fluid should be mixed together. The

spray nozzles may otherwise become

blocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-

wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.

When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-

tant safety notes on service products

(Ypage 340).

At temperatures above freezing:

XFill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of

water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB

SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing:

XFill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of

water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.

For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-

mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

iAdd windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-

merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all

year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes

The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-

led with refrigerant R‑134a.

The instruction label regarding the refrigerant

type used can be found on the radiator cross

member.

!Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil

approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.

The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with

any other PAG oil that is not approved for

R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate

control system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or

replacing component parts, may only be carried

out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-

cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,

must be adhered to.

Always have work on the climate control system

carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

344 Service products and filling capacities

Technical data

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label

:Warning symbol

;Refrigerant filling capacity

=Applicable standards

?PAG oil part number

AType of refrigerant

Warning symbol :advises you about:

RPossible dangers

RHaving service work carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

Mercedes-AMG

C 63

Mercedes-AMG

C 63 S

21.5 ± 0.4 oz

(610 ± 10 g)

Allother models 22.2 ± 0.4 oz

(630 ± 10 g)

Model PAG oil

Mercedes-AMG

C 63

Mercedes-AMG

C 63 S

4.2 oz

(120 g)

All other models 2.8 oz

(80 g)

Vehicle data

General notes

Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

RThe heights specified may vary as a result of:

-Tires

-Load

-Condition of the suspension

-Optional equipment

ROptional equipment reduces the maximum

payload

Dimensions and weights

Missing values were not available at time of

going to print.

Model :

Height when

opened

C 300 58.5 in (1486 mm)

C 300 4MATIC 58.9 in (1495 mm)

Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles

Missing values were not available at time of

going to print.

Mercedes-AMG C 43

4MATIC

Vehicle length 184.9 in (4696 mm)

Vehicle width

including exterior

mirrors

79.4 in (2016 mm)

Vehicle height 55.4 in (1408 mm)

Vehicle data 345

Technical data

Mercedes-AMG C 43

4MATIC

Vehicle height,

when opening/clos-

ing the roof

Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)

Turning radius 38.4 ft (11.7 m)

Mercedes-AMG C 63

Vehicle length 187.0 in (4750 mm)

Vehicle width

including exterior

mirrors

79.4 in (2016 mm)

Vehicle height,

Mercedes-AMG C 63

55.2 in (1403 mm)

Vehicle height,

Mercedes-AMG C 63

55.3 in (1405 mm)

Vehicle height,

when opening/clos-

ing the roof

Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)

Turning radius 37.1 ft (11.3 m)

All other models

Vehicle length 184.5 in

(4686 mm)

Vehicle width including

exterior mirrors

79.4 in

(2016 mm)

Vehicle height, C 300 55.5 in

(1409 mm)

Vehicle height, C 300

4MATIC

55.7 in

(1416 mm)

Vehicle height when open-

ing/closing the roof, C 300

78.0 in

(1982 mm)

Vehicle height when open-

ing/closing the roof, C 300

4MATIC

78.2 in

(1987 mm)

All other models

Wheelbase 111.8 in

(2840 mm)

Turning circle, C 300 36.8 ft

(11.22 m)

Turning circle, C 300

4MATIC

37.6 ft

(11.45 m)

346 Vehicle data

Technical data

347

348

MY18 C Cab Operators Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation